Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
Commands
Version 7.1
FEMAP Version 7.0 Commands
Copyright © 1986-2000 by Structural Dynamics Research Corp.
Proprietary Data. Unauthorized use, distribution, or duplication is prohibited.
All Rights Reserved.
Portions of this software and related documentation are derived from GHS3D software
under license from INRIA, other portions are copyrighted by and are the property of Elec-
tronic Data Systems Corporation and Spatial Technology Inc.
The FEMAP Documentation may not be copied, reproduced, disclosed, transferred, or
reduced to any form, including electronic medium or machine-readable form, or transmitted
or publicly performed by any means, electronic or otherwise, unless Structural Dynamics
Research Corp (SDRC) consents in writing in advance.
Use of the software has been provided under a Software License Agreement.
This manual and software product are both copyrighted and all rights are reserved by SDRC.
The distribution and sale of this product are intended for the use of the original purchaser
only and for use only on the computer system specified. The software product may be used
only under the provisions of the license agreement included with the FEMAP package.
Unless otherwise stated, you may only use this software on a single computer, by one per-
son, at one time.
Trademark Information
Throughout this manual, and the software, you will see references to other applications and
trademarks which are the property of various companies.
m NASTRAN and Cosmic NASTRAN are registered trademarks of NASA.
m IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
m MSC/, MSC/NASTRAN, MSC/pal, MSC/pal 2, and PATRAN are registered trademarks of The
MacNeal-Schwendler Corporation.
m CDA/Sprint is a trademark of The CDA Group.
m UAI/NASTRAN is a product of Universal Analytics, Inc.
m CSA/NASTRAN is a product of Computerized Structural Research and Analysis Corp.
m ME/NASTRAN is a product of Macro Engineering, Inc.
m ABAQUS is a registered trademark of Hibbitt, Karlsson, and Sorenson, Inc.
m CAEFEM is a trademark of Concurrent Analysis Corp.
m SDRC, SDRC I-DEAS and I-DEAS are registered trademarks of Structural Dynamics Research
Corporation.
m SSS/NASTRAN is a trademark of Schaeffer Software Systems, Inc.
m ANSYS is a registered trademark of ANSYS, Inc.
m STAAD and STARDYNE are products and trademarks of Research Engineers, Inc.
m COSMOS and COSMOS/M are registered trademarks of Structural Research and Analysis Corpo-
ration.
m WECAN is a registered trademark of Westinghouse, Inc., marketed by AEGIS Software Corp.
m ALGOR is a registered trademark of Algor Interactive Systems, Inc.
m CFDesign is a trademark of Blue Ridge Numerics, Inc.
m Pro/ENGINEER is a registered trademark of Parametric Technology Corporation
m GENESIS is a registered trademark of Vanderplaats, Miura and Associates, Inc.
m MTAB*Stress is a trademark of Structural Analysis, Inc.
m AutoCAD and DXF are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc.
m Solid Edge is a trademark of Intergraph Corporation.
m MicroStation is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems, Inc.
m SolidWorks is a trademark of SolidWorks Corporation.
m MARC is a trademark of MARC Analysis Research Corporation.
m LS-DYNA is a trademark of Livermore Software Technology Corporation.
m ACIS is a registered trademark of Spatial Technology, Inc.
m Parasolid and Unigraphics are registered trademarks of Electronic Data Systems Corporation.
m Windows, Windows NT,Windows 95, and Windows 98 are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation. Portions of the software contained on your FEMAP CD are copyrighted by Microsoft
Corporation.
Other brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
holders.
m Portions of this software are copyrighted by Spatial Technology, Inc., Electronic Data Systems,
Inc., INRIA, Cypress Software Inc., and Microsoft.
Manual Conventions
This manual uses different fonts to highlight specific features, to identify data that Windows
will display, or input that you must type.
Enter, Alt Shows one or more keys that you should press. In some
cases, you will see combinations like Alt+Shift+Back-
space. The plus signs show that you should press all keys
simultaneously.
a:setup Shows text that you should type. This is very similar to
the keystrokes described above, but is typically used for
strings of letters and/or numbers. The keystrokes typi-
cally refer to the more specialized, non-alphanumeric
keys.
OK, Cancel Shows text that you will see displayed by FEMAP in a
dialog box control, or in the menu.
Throughout this manual, you will see references to Windows. Windows refers to Microsoft®
Windows NT, Windows 95 or Windows 98. You will need one of these operating environ-
ment to run FEMAP for the PC. This manual assumes that you are familiar with the general
use of the operating environment. If you are not, you can refer to the Windows User’s Guide
for additional assistance.
Similarly, throughout the manual all references to FEMAP, refer to the latest version of our
software.
1Table of Contents
1 Introduction
2 File Manipulation
2.1 Opening a Model File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.1 File New... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.2 File Open... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2 Saving the Model File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2.1 File Save... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2.2 File Save As... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.2.3 File Timed Save... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.3 Import/Export of Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.3.1 File Import Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.3.2 File Export Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2.3.3 File Analyze... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.4 File Notes... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2.5 Print, Copy, and Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.5.1 File Page Setup.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.5.2 File Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
2.5.3 File Printer Setup... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.5.4 File Picture Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.5.5 File Messages Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
2.6 Macros, Settings, and Rebuild . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
2.6.1 File Program Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
2.6.2 File Rebuild... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
2.6.3 File Preferences... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
2.7 File Recent Models - 1,2,3,4 . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
2.8 File Exit... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
3 Geometry
3.1 Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.1 Geometry Point... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2 Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2.1 Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2.2 Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
3.2.3 Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
3.2.4 Splines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
3.2.5 Curves from Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
3.3 Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30
3.3.1 Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
3.3.2 Boundary Surfaces... . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
3.3.3 Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
3.3.4 Midsurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
3.4 Solids/Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
3.4.1 Volumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48
3.4.2 Solids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55
72&
FEMAP is a finite element modeling and postprocessing system that allows you to perform
engineering analyses both quickly and confidently. FEMAP provides the capability to develop
sophisticated analyses of stress, temperature, and dynamic performance directly on the desk-
top. With easy access to CAD and office automation tool, productivity is dramatically
improved compared to traditional approaches.
FEMAP automatically provides the integration that is necessary to link all aspects of your
analysis. FEMAP can be used to create geometry, or you can import CAD geometry. FEMAP
then provides powerful tools for meshing geometry, as well as applying loads and boundary
conditions. You may then use FEMAP to export an input file to over 20 finite element codes.
FEMAP can then read the results from the solver program. Once results are obtained in
FEMAP, a wide variety of tools are available for visualizing and reporting on your results.
Geometry
FEMAP can directly import geometry from your CAD or design system. In fact, FEMAP can
directly import a solid model from any ACIS-based or Parasolids-based modeling package. If
your modeling package does not use either of these packages, simply use the FEMAP IGES or
STEP reader. These files can be read and then stitched together to form a solid. This typically
requires using one command.
If you do not have CAD geometry, you can create geometry directly in FEMAP using power-
ful wireframe and solid modeling tools. FEMAP Professional includes solid modeling directly
in FEMAP with not one but two popular geometry engines (Parasolid and ACIS). You can
build solid models in either engine, and then export a model. This is very convenient if you
need to export geometry to CAD packages that are either ACIS or Parasolid based.
Finite Element Modeling
Regardless of the origin of your geometry, you can use FEMAP to create a complete finite
element model. Meshes can be created by many methods ranging from manual creation, to
mapped meshing between keypoints, to fully automatic meshing of curves, surfaces and sol-
ids. FEMAP can even work with your existing analysis models. You can import and manipu-
late these models using the interfaces to any of the supported analysis programs.
Appropriate materials and section properties can be created or assigned from FEMAP librar-
ies. Many types of constraint and loading conditions can be applied to represent the design
environment. You can apply loads/constraints directly on finite element entities (Nodes and
Elements), or you can apply them to geometry. FEMAP will automatically convert geometric
conditions to Nodal/Elemental values upon translation to your solver program. You may even
convert these loads before translation to convince yourself that the loading conditions are
appropriate for your model.
Introduction
FEMAP Documentation
In addition to the On-Line Help in FEMAP, FEMAP also comes with a complete set of doc-
umentation. Four manuals are provided with FEMAP: (1) Release Notes (2) Examples, (3)
1
75
,
Users’ Guide, and (4) Command Reference.
2
Release Notes... '
8
... contains a brief overview of new features in the latest release of FEMAP. This document &
7,
is especially useful to users who are upgrading from a previous version of the software. 2
1
Examples...
... contains several examples of building a finite element model from start to finish. This
manual provides the new user a quick tour of just some of the capabilities of FEMAP, while
familiarizing them with the program. Most users find after just one or two example problems
they can be quickly creating realistic models in FEMAP.
Users Guide...
... includes general information about FEMAP. Included in this manual are descriptions of
FEMAP’s Graphical User Interface, including the command toolbars, common dialog boxes
in FEMAP, and a general overview of the finite element process. This manual also contains
information on shortcut keys, as well as the use of function keys in FEMAP.
This manual provides an excellent overview if you are not certain how to do something in
FEMAP as well as information on getting started with FEMAP.
Command Reference...
... contains explanations of every menu command in FEMAP. If you are unclear about a cer-
tain command in FEMAP, you can use this manual to find its description. In general, the
commands are separated into chapters which correspond to the Main FEMAP menu. The
few exceptions to this are the List, Modify, and Delete Menu commands, which are
explained under the Chapter which contains the type of entities (i.e. if you are Deleting
Geometry, look under the Geometry chapter for Delete). In addition, the Tools and List
menus are combined under the Checking Your Model chapter, and the View and Group
menus are combined under the Viewing Your Model chapter.
There is also a special Postprocessing chapter describing commands specifically used for
postprocessing, and there is a brief description of using some of the View commands to
check your Model under the Checking Your Model chapter.
Introduction
2File Manipulation
This chapter describes the File Menu commands. The commands on the File menu work with
new or existing FEMAP models. They also produce printed or plotted hardcopy, and transfer
both text and graphics to other Windows and analysis programs.
This menu is separated into 8 sections. They are:
1. Opening a Model File
2. Saving a Model File
3. Import/Export of Files
4. Notes
5. Print, Copy, and Paste
6. Macros, Settings and Rebuild
7. Last Four Model Files
8. Exit
Each of these sections with their appropriate commands are discussed further below.
Hint:
If you are having a problem opening a file, please check to confirm that the file has only one
extension. Files with two extensions may have difficulty being opened due to the Windows
file structures and default parameters. Also, you may want to remove any spaces in the file
name. Spaces are typically not a problem, but may cause difficulty on certain file systems.
When you start FEMAP without specifying a model filename on the command line or the
“?” command line option, you begin with a new, empty model. This is just like using the File
New command.
Note:
FEMAP does not save solid geometric information to the scratch file. Restarting a
model after an abnormal exit will cause the existing solids to lose associativity with the
rest of the model and possibly corrupt the model beyond repair. You should therefore
not accept the option of restarting from the existing scratch file if you have any solid
geometry in your model.
Saving the Model File
Note:
The scratch file is typically deleted when you exit normally from a FEMAP model file. If
you do experience an abnormal termination, FEMAP does not delete this file. When you
then try to open this same model file, FEMAP will ask if you want to start from the existing
scratch file.
If you say Yes to this question, FEMAP will use that scratch file, which will allow you to
recover any data that had not been saved before the abnormal termination. Since it was an
abnormal termination however, it is possible that your file is corrupt. You may want to per-
form a File Rebuild and then due a File Save As (see following section) to save it under a
different file name. This would enable you to keep both versions of the model file until you
decide if the file resulting from the abnormal termination had been corrupted. As mentioned
above, FEMAP does not save solid geometry data to the scratch file, therefore you should
never restart from an existing scratch file when you have solid geometry in the model
,/
)
If you say No to this question, FEMAP will delete the scratch file, and create a new scratch (6
file which is a duplicate of the original model. Any changes which were made to the file
since the last Save command will be lost. Answer No only when you do not want to attempt
to save this information.
In general, you should save whenever you make a significant change to your model and you
are certain the change is correct. It usually does not take long to save the model, and the ben-
efits can be well worth the time. Alternatively, you can use the File Timed Save option to
save your model automatically, at a time interval that you specify.
the many solver programs that can be automatically executed by FEMAP. The commands
under this area of the menu are explained more fully below.
)
2. Parasolids Solid Model Files - *.X_T files (6
3. IGES Files - *.IGS files
4. STEP Files - *.STP files
5. Stereolithography Files - *.STL files
6. Wireframe Files - *.DXF files.
7. CATIA Models - *.MDL files
8. CATIA Express Files - *.EXP, *.DLV files
9. VDA Files - *.VDA files
10. I-DEAS Files - *.IDI files
11. Pro/ENGINEER Models - *.PRT files
12. Unigraphics Models - *.PRT files
13. Solid Edge Models - *.PAR, *.PSM files
In each of these cases, simply select the file to import. Normally FEMAP will display all of
the files that it knows how to read, using the most common filename extensions for these
formats. If your file uses a different extension, you may rename it, or simply drop down the
“File Type” list, and choose the appropriate format, then specify the filename. If you do not
use the standard extensions for each of the formats, and you are use the default “All Geome-
try” type, FEMAP may choose the wrong format to read the file, which will result in errors.
Depending upon the type of file you choose, FEMAP may display information in the Mes-
sages and Lists Window and then prompt you with one or more additional dialog boxes
where you can set various options. For more information on the options contained in the dia-
log boxes, please see the Translator Reference Section in the FEMAP Users Guide, and look
for the specific file format that you are attempting to read.
File Manipulation
Note:
Many of the geometry interfaces are not available in all versions of FEMAP. If an interface
is not available in your version, you will see an error message which informs you to contact
us to purchase that interface.
Note:
You should always import Analysis Results into an existing model containing those Nodes
and Elements. If you read information for entities that do not exist in your model, FEMAP
will provide a warning. This could mean that you have read the results into the wrong (or
modified) model.
)
6. VRML Files
(6
The first two solid model options are only
available if you have created or imported a solid model of the particular type. The STEP
interface will allow you to export a Parasolid entity to a STEP AP203 solid via a conversion
from the Parasolid modeling kernel into the STEP standard. Similarly, the IGES interface
will allow you to export Parasolid geometry to an IGES file. The stereolithography file is
only applicable for a meshed model. FEMAP will export a faceted representation of your
model using the FEA mesh as the basis of this file. The final option, VRML, allows easy
viewing of Solid or Meshed models in many standard viewing programs. You can even save
a Deformed, Contour plot in VRML format.
Note:
Be careful when using the Translation Text option. The information included in the Notes
area must have the appropriate syntax for the type of translation you are performing.
FEMAP will not perform any checks on this syntax. It will simply write the information as
you input it, therefore, improper syntax could cause a fatal error in your analysis run.
Print, Copy, and Paste
,/
)
(6
Note:
If you are using True Type, or other scalable fonts, you will often see only one size in the
“Point Size” list, and it will usually be a very large size - 50 point or larger. Since the font is
scalable, you can choose any size that you want, you just have to type it manually.
File Manipulation
Hint:
If the display looks fine on the screen, but characters are improperly printed, it is likely that
your Windows Printer Driver does not support the selected Font. Simply change the Font
both in this dialog box as well as under View Options, Label, Entities, and Colors, Label
Parameters to a supported Font.
Hint:
FEMAP listings will not be as easy to read if you select a proportionally spaced font. Select-
ing a fixed pitch font will properly align all columns in the listing.
Page Margins
These margins identify the distance from the four edges of the page where you want printing
to occur. When you are printing listings, printing will start at the top-left margin. The bottom
and right margins will be used to compute the line length and number of lines on the page.
For graphics printing, FEMAP combines the margins with the options in Plot Position and
Size to compute the actual size and position of the graphics image.
Often printers and plotters cannot print closer than some minimum distance from the edge of
the paper. Check your printer documentation for information on these minimum values. Set-
ting a margin smaller than those minimums can result in FEMAP trying to print to an inac-
cessible region of the paper. This should not cause any unrecoverable problems, but you will
not see the portion of the print that is in the inaccessible regions.
Plot and Metafile Style
The three options in this group allow you to control some specific details regarding the
appearance of a graphics plot. FEMAP uses these options when you print a graphic image
using File Print, or place an image in a Metafile using either the File Picture Save or File Pic-
ture Copy commands. When Draw Border is active, a single line border will be drawn
around the image. The location of this border is equivalent to the on-screen window border.
In FEMAP's default configuration, graphic windows have black backgrounds, with white or
colored images. When you print a window, you would normally see the same image on the
paper (i.e. WYSIWYG - What You See Is What You Get). In many cases, you may want to
retain the white background of the paper and print with black lines - even though it does not
match the image on the screen. Setting Swap Black and White will automatically reverse the
black and white colors during your print, resulting in the print style described. This option
has no effect on other colors, which will always be printed as shown on the screen. This
File Page Setup..
option also controls color swapping for Metafiles that you transfer to the Clipboard using
File Picture Copy or save to disk using File Picture Save.
Note:
Swap Black and White relies on being able to change the color palette of bitmaps. Windows
does not support color palettes, and only operates in WYSYWIG mode, on devices which
can display more than 256 colors. This includes boards/graphics modes which support
32000 colors or full 24-bit color. If you are using one of these graphics boards, FEMAP will
be unable to automatically swap the black and white colors. You must manually set up the
screen (change background to white, entities to black). This limitation does not apply to
Metafiles. Therefore, if you are printing, you will be able to use Swap Black and White suc-
cessfully when you print at printer resolution (uses a Metafile), but not when you print at
screen resolution (uses a bitmap). Swap Black and White should always work successfully
for any Windows mode that supports 256 or fewer colors.
,/
)
If you are printing to a black and white printer, like a laser printer, you may find that certain (6
colors that are displayed on the screen do not show up very well (or at all) when you print
them. This is caused by the method Windows uses to shade colors on the monochrome
printer. To overcome this problem you can change all your model colors to black and white
so they can print well, or just turn on the Monochrome switch. In this case, colors will still
be displayed on the screen, but all colors (except color 0, which is black) will be converted
to white when they are printed. You can combine Monochrome with the Swap Black and
White to print all black lines on a white background.
While the Monochrome option can quickly make a print look much better, it must be used
with caution. Since it sets all colors but background to a single color, it can result in a picture
which is totally illegible. For example, you should never use it if you are using a color other
than color 0 for the background. If you try, nothing will be visible. Similarly, any plot with
filled areas is not usually a good candidate for Monochrome. Especially contour plots, which
rely heavily on color shading will not work well.
Setting Transparent Background will simply skip plotting the background. For printing on
white paper, you will still want to use Swap Black and White. Otherwise, you will get white
lines on your white paper! Transparent Background is most often used when creating a
Metafile to be transferred into another application. Here, you may want just the graphic
image, and rely on the other application to supply the background. This creates an image that
can be overlaid on top of other text/graphics without erasing them.
Reset Clipping
When this option is turned on, FEMAP will reset the clipping region at the end of each draw-
ing operation or window. This is not be required for most printers, so you may be able to turn
it off. Certain printers, like DeskJets, however have trouble printing multiple view layouts,
headers and footers if this option is off. We therefore recommend leaving this option on
(which should work for all printers), unless you are experiencing some incorrect clipping of
graphics on printed images.
File Manipulation
of the other options reduce the image size) your choice here will not matter. FEMAP fills the
margins. Whenever the image does not fill the margins however, these options control the
alignment. For example, choosing Top and Left will result in an image that has its’ top and
left borders aligned with the top and left margins. By combining these alignment options
with the margins, you can position an image anywhere on the page.
Reset and Permanent
Permanent allows you to save your Page Setup options, so that they will be the defaults for
all future models and sessions. Reset deletes the saved options, and returns you to the normal
FEMAP defaults. These buttons work just like the same buttons in the File Preferences com-
mand, except that they save the Page Setup options.
)
The Print dialog box (6
allows you to choose what
will be printed and in what
format. You will see two
command buttons, Page
Setup and Printer Setup,
which provide you with
further control of printing
parameters. These buttons
simply invoke the File
Page Setup and File
Margins Footer Paper Orientation and Size Printer Setup commands
respectively.
Print to File
This button allows you to print directly to a file rather than to your printer. It can be used to
create files in a native printer format (for example, postscript). When you press the OK but-
ton, you will see an additional dialog box that asks you for the name of the file that you want
to create.
Header and Footer
These options provide a quick way to set the headers and footers that will be placed at the
top and bottom of the page. They can also be set via the Page Setup command or button. In
fact, you must use Page Setup if you want to change fonts or other options.
Page Preview
This section of the dialog box shows a symbolic graphical representation of your printed
page. It quickly lets you know if your page and printer setup options are correct. You do not
need to waste a piece of paper, or the time required to make a print. The outer black border
represents the paper on which you will print. FEMAP calculates the size and orientation of
File Manipulation
this boundary (and the paper) from your Windows printer configuration. You can change
these settings using Printer Setup.
Inside this border you will see four lines (Top, Bottom, Right and Left) that represent rela-
tive margin positions. You also may see shorter horizontal lines located inside the top and
bottom margins. These lines represent the locations where the page headers and footers
(specified in Page Setup) will be printed. They are only visible if the header and/or footer is
not blank. Finally, located inside the margin lines, is a filled rectangle. This rectangle repre-
sents the size and position of your printed image. If the printed image is smaller than you
expected, FEMAP may have automatically reduced the size due to your Page Setup choices.
Maintain Window Aspect Ratio and Integer Scaling are especially important.
What to Print
These options specify what will be printed or plotted. Selecting Active View will print a pic-
ture of your model as it currently appears in your graphics window. If you currently have
multiple graphics windows open, only the “top-most” (the one that you last selected) win-
dow will be printed. If you do have multiple windows, and want to print them all as they are
positioned on your screen, choose the Layout option. Layout is only available when you are
printing at printer/plotter resolution with multiple active windows.
Choosing Desktop will print an image of your entire screen. This includes all windows -
even non-FEMAP windows. This option is only available if you choose the Screen Resolu-
tion option. The final graphics printing choice allows you to print a graphic image stored in a
File. You can choose Screen Resolution to print a saved bitmap. If you choose Printer resolu-
tion, FEMAP will print a saved Metafile or Placeable Metafile. For the best results, you
should always save and print Placeable Metafiles. They contain additional information that
allows FEMAP to properly choose font sizes and scale the picture. If you use standard Win-
dows Metafiles, FEMAP will be able to print them, but the font sizes will vary somewhat
depending on the resolution of your printer and the resolution of the graphics adapter you
used to create the Metafile.
Hint:
FEMAP can only print a multi-window layout as it is arranged on the screen with the Layout
or Desktop options. Best results are usually obtained with Layout if you turn off the graphics
window title bars. Otherwise, you will see gaps between the printed windows that represent
the areas occupied by the title bars. In Layout mode, the Page Preview diagram shows one
overall rectangle that surrounds all of your windows. Individual windows are not shown. For
even more printing flexibility, you can transfer FEMAP graphics to other Windows pro-
grams which will allow you to print other page layouts.
Printing Messages
The final print option allows you to print text/messages that are in the Messages and Lists
Window. If you do not want to print all of the messages, you can select the lines that will be
printed. Refer to the “File Messages Menu” later in this chapter for instructions. When you
are printing messages, the Resolution setting, and the shape of the active graphics window
File Print
do not matter. When you choose this option, you will see the printed image disappear from
the Page Preview area. Do not worry, this is normal behavior, because the position of the
printed messages is just based on the margin settings.
Hint:
You can also print messages by using the File Messages Copy command and copying them
to another Windows application, or by setting the List Destination to your printer and then
doing any of the list commands.
Resolution
You have two choices for the print/plot resolution mode. “Screen” resolution directs FEMAP
to use the on-screen bitmap and copy it to paper. The bitmap will be scaled and stretched, as
required, to fill the desired margins and print size. However, the resolution of the screen
image determines the ultimate print quality. This option is not available for some printers
and for most plotters that cannot print a bitmap. When you choose Printer/Plotter resolution, ,/
)
FEMAP recomputes the image at the resolution of the printer. The resulting printed image is (6
almost always of much higher quality, but can take significantly longer for complex images.
Copies
If your printer/plotter supports making multiple copies, you can use this option to request the
number of copies you need. If you choose multiple copies, and your printer does not support
this option, you will receive a warning. Then, you will only get one copy of your print. For
many printers, you can set this feature permanently using the Setup option under Printer
Setup.
Note:
FEMAP can only print a Bitmap in Render Mode. FEMAP performs operations to provide
more detail than the standard Bitmap export, but it still may not be as clear and sharp as a
Windows Metafile. You may want to switch out of Render Mode when you are printing.
Hint:
Review the following items for some additional hints on printing:
m Use the Page Setup and Printer Setup options on this dialog box instead of the commands
on the File menu. They graphically show the results of your settings in the Page Preview
diagram.
m If you want a quick draft hardcopy, print using Screen resolution. For final, high-quality
output, always use Printer/Plotter resolution.
m When you are printing the Active View using Screen resolution, you will get a better
quality (higher resolution) print if you enlarge the window. Choose the Maximize button
in the Window Title Bar to enlarge it to full-screen size prior to choosing File Print.
File Manipulation
m Printing high-resolution images (especially color images) takes a lot of memory and/or
disk space. You will need to make sure that your TEMP environment variable specifies a
disk with plenty of room if you are going to print large models. Windows writes tempo-
rary files to this disk as it is printing. These files can often require several megabytes or
more.
m Some older Windows printer drivers have problems handling complex pictures (espe-
cially if you choose Printer resolution). If you are having any problems printing, and you
have a fairly old version of Windows or an older printer driver, you should check with
either Microsoft or your printer manufacturer to see if there is a newer printer driver
available. These drivers are frequently updated to correct errors and add new capabilities.
If a new printer driver does not solve your problems, you may be able to reduce the com-
plexity of the picture by selecting a group or modifying your View Options. For example,
if you are doing a contour plot, reducing the number of contour levels can dramatically
reduce the complexity of the image that you are printing.
m You cannot print when the active window is animating.
m If you want to print a contour plot on a monochrome printer, you may want to adjust the
contour palette before printing. In particular, choose the View Options command. Then
select the Postprocessing category and the Contour/Criteria Levels option. Press the Set
Levels... button, then press the Reset Gray button. Choose OK twice, to accept the gray-
scale contour palette. With the grayscale palette loaded, your prints should come out
much cleaner. If you are having trouble distinguishing contour levels on the print, you
can adjust the individual colors in the palette. One good approach is to change every
other color so that it uses a cross-hatched color instead of a solid color. This will result in
contours that alternate between solid and the various hatch patterns.
m Some printers (like DeskJet printers) have trouble clipping multiple regions, such as a
multi-window layout, or even a window with headers or footers. If you are experiencing
this type of problem you can go to Page Setup and turn on the “Reset Clipping” option.
This option resets the clipping region in a way that is compatible with these printers.
File Printer Setup...
)
like the active printing mode (6
(i.e., 75, 150 or 300 dots/inch), portrait or landscape paper orientation, fonts, colors and
many more.
The dialog boxes that you see when you choose Setup are not really part of FEMAP. They
are part of the printer driver that you loaded when you installed the printer for Windows.
You also can modify all of the same settings using the Windows Control Panel. Refer to the
Windows documentation, and the documentation for your printer for further advice on set-
ting options for particular printers.
Using Control Panel, you can also install or activate additional printers. You can even make
changes while FEMAP is still running. The next time you choose the Print or Printer Setup
command it will recognize any Control Panel changes that you have made.
When you change certain printer settings, like the paper orientation (landscape vs. portrait)
or paper size, it is usually good to review the Page Setup options. This will give you the
opportunity to make any changes to margins, plot sizes or positions that are appropriate for
your new printer settings.
Note:
Just like the File Print command, FEMAP can only export a Bitmap when in Render Mode.
You may want to change to standard mode to export a Windows Metafile.
File Manipulation
Note:
Remember that the clipboard only holds one image, so every time you choose this command
you automatically overwrite the previous contents of the clipboard.
When you transfer a Metafile or device independent bitmap to the clipboard, the black and
white colors can be swapped. This is useful for changing a picture with white lines on a
black background into black lines on a white background. The Swap Black and White Meta-
file option, in the File Page Setup command, controls color swapping. If this option is on,
FEMAP will swap the colors. The File Page Setup Monochrome option can also be used to
convert to a monochrome image. These options have no effect on regular device dependent
bitmaps which are copied to the clipboard. Additional Page Setup options control the back-
ground and border for Metafiles.
The File Picture Copy command will be disabled if the current window is animating. You
cannot transfer animations to the Clipboard.
Transferring Graphics to Other Applications
After you use File Picture Copy to load your graphics to the clipboard, simply switch to the
application that you want to receive the image. For most Windows applications that accept
graphics input from the clipboard, you will find a Paste command somewhere in the menu
(often under Edit). Pressing Ctrl+V (or Shift+Ins) will usually invoke that command, or you
can simply choose it from the menu. The Paste command should immediately load the image
into the other application.
Some applications (like Windows Paint) sometimes require you to choose Paste twice. Other
applications require you to define a region or area where the graphics will be placed prior to
pasting. Refer to the documentation for the receiving application for more information.
In addition, to the normal fields in the file access dialog, there are five additional options that
specify the picture format:
1. Bitmap
2. Metafile
3. Placeable Metafile
4. Bitmap Series
5. Video for Windows - AVI
6. JPEG
All formats are not available for all types of pictures.
If you select Bitmap, which is available for all views, the default file extension is .BMP, and
the file will be saved as a Windows Device Independent Bitmap. Bitmap files contain only
the array of pixels currently displayed in the window and are therefore equivalent to the size
of the window. When you choose this format, FEMAP will ask if you want to compress the ,/
)
bitmap. Compressed bitmaps usually take up significantly less disk space, but are incompat- (6
ible with some Windows programs. Check the documentation for your other applications, or
try transferring a compressed bitmap to see if your other applications can support it. If you
only plan to replay your bitmaps using FEMAP, you should always use the compressed for-
mat.
If you select either Metafile or PlaceMF, the default file extension is .WMF. Both options
save the picture as a Metafile. Metafile chooses the Windows Metafile format while
PlaceMF chooses the Placeable Metafile Format that is used by many Windows’ applica-
tions. Most often you will want to use the Placeable Metafile for more reliable transfer to
other programs. Metafiles contain commands that draw graphics into the current window.
For this reason, when you load a Metafile into another application, you can scale and stretch
it. The Metafile will redraw itself for the new shape. If you plan to load your pictures into
another Windows application, you should refer to the documentation for that application to
find advice on choosing the best format for that application. The Metafile and Placeable
Metafile options are not available in Render mode.
Just like for the File Picture Copy command, the colors black and white can be swapped
when you save a Metafile or device independent bitmap. You can control color swapping
with the Swap Black and White Metafile option in the File Page Setup command. If this
option is on, FEMAP will swap the colors. FEMAP will also convert all colors to a black
and white image if the Monochrome option is on.
If your active graphics window is animating, FEMAP will let you choose either a bitmap,
bitmap series, or AVI format. The single bitmap animation file format is very similar to the
standard bitmap format, but will be incompatible with most (if not all) Windows applications
other than FEMAP. Likewise, you will not be asked to choose compression. FEMAP uses
the .BMP default file extension for animation files just like for standard bitmaps. Depending
on the number of animation frames, the size of your animating window and the number of
colors supported by your graphics board, these files can be very large. Unlike standard bit-
File Manipulation
maps or Metafiles, the various Page Setup options do not change animations. They are
always saved just as they appear on the screen.
You can also save animations as a bitmap series, that is a series of static bitmaps - one per
animation frame with sequentially numbered filenames. This format can be used with other
tools to create video (AVI) files. You can also simply save the picture as an AVI file. The Bit-
map Series and AVI files are only applicable for Animations. AVI files can be imported
directly into most Windows applications. If Bitmap series is chosen, FEMAP will save each
frame in the Animation as a series of bitmaps, under the names *n.bmp, where n ranges from
0 to n-1 frames. If you want to save an Animation to replay in FEMAP, you should save the
entire Animation as one bitmap, not a series of bitmaps. This format is strictly for programs
which can play a series of bitmaps.
Hint:
When saving an AVI file, you must have a color resolution > 256 colors. if you have 256 col-
ors or less, you will not be able to successfully import the AVI files into other applications.
slow down dramatically. If you do change the size, you can always use the Original Size
command to restore the window.
Note:
FEMAP will never close the replay window. You must do that manually, by double clicking
the system menu with your left mouse button, or by choosing Close from the system menu.
By leaving the window open, you can continue to work in FEMAP and display many simul-
taneous pictures just by replaying different files. The only limitation is the amount of mem-
ory available for Windows. You must be careful if you are running FEMAP or any other
application maximized to the full screen. When you choose the next FEMAP command,
your replay window or windows will disappear behind the maximized FEMAP window. It is
very easy to forget about these extra windows. While they do no harm, they are using system
resources (especially if they are animating!) that may be better applied to FEMAP or some
other ongoing process. Therefore, you should always Close the window as soon as you are
,/
)
finished looking at it.
(6
Replaying Pictures Outside of FEMAP
When you choose the File Picture Replay command, FEMAP actually runs a separate Win-
dows program (REPLAY.EXE). At any time you want to view a picture, you can run that
program yourself without running FEMAP. When you run REPLAY by itself, you will see a
dialog box that asks you for the picture filename. This is not the standard file access dialog
box, and it does not list the available files. You must already know the complete filename of
the file that you want to view, and type it in the dialog box. You must also include the file-
name extension (.BMP or .WMF, for example). Alternatively, you can specify the full file-
name on the command line, for example:
REPLAY PICTURE.BMP
REPLAY automatically determines the type of file that you are specifying from the data in
the file. It does not rely on the filename extension, so you can specify any name.
The commands shown above assume that both Windows and REPLAY are in directories
along your PATH. If they are not, you must add the names of the appropriate directories to
these commands.
scrolled out of FEMAP’s buffer. You can set the number of lines saved in the buffer using
File Preferences Database.
Selecting Messages
If you do not want all of the text, you must select the lines that FEMAP will copy prior to
invoking these commands. To select messages, point to the line that you want to select with
the cursor. Press the Left mouse button and drag the cursor to the last (or first) line that you
want to select. As you do this, the color of the selected lines will change. Now release the
button. Don’t worry if some lines appear to be missed as you drag the cursor. When you
release the mouse button, FEMAP will select all lines between the two points. Simply click-
ing on a line with the left mouse button selects just that line. Clicking anywhere in the Mes-
sages and Lists window with the right mouse button cancels any lines that you have selected.
If you want to change your selection, just repeat the process. You do not have to cancel your
previous selection.
Note:
Remember that the Windows’ Clipboard only holds one image or one set of text. Every time
you choose this command, you automatically overwrite the previous contents of the Clip-
board.
Program files are scripts which can execute FEMAP commands to automatically create or
modify your models. You can also add logic commands (IF, GOTO...) to program files to
further customize them. The commands on this area of the menu allow you to automatically
record and run program files.
Scripts use the FEMAP BASIC Scripting language to provide direct access to the FEMAP
Database Engine through the BASIC Interpreter built into FEMAP, a Visual Basic type pro-
gramming language to perform direct manipulations on the FEMAP database. These com-
mands are most useful for importing and exporting results information from FEMAP, as well
as creating and manipulating views for postprocessing.
For more information on program files and the scripting language, please see the Customiza-
tion chapter of the FEMAP Users Guide and the api_ref.doc file contained in the FEMAP
executable installation directory.
Note: ,/
)
Program files enable you to perform any command in FEMAP, but they actually work on a (6
Windows-Key Stroke level. As a result, they can be easily interrupted or broken. Script files,
however, enable you to write scripts to manipulate the FEMAP database. Because they work
on a database level, they are not easily broken, but only those commands contained in the
scripting language are available.
Note:
Do not press any keys on the keyboard while your program file is executing. Windows can-
not tell the difference between keystrokes that come from your program file and keystrokes
from the keyboard. If you press a key, it will be intermixed with the program file data and
will cause unpredictable results. The only exceptions to this are when a program file stops to
ask you for input. In a program file, you can ask for input via the <USER> and #ASK( )
commands. In these cases, the program file will be temporarily stopped, and you should
complete the dialog box using either the keyboard or mouse.
This command runs a program file when you request it. Using File Preferences you can
specify a program file that FEMAP will automatically execute every time you start a model.
execute after this command will be recorded in the program file. To stop recording, choose
the File Program Stop Recording command, or just exit FEMAP.
This command provides a quick way to develop a basic program file. You can then edit the
file to add logic, variables, or additional commands. You will see a check mark beside this
command in the menu whenever you are recording a file.
Restrictions
In general you can use any input method when recording a program file - you are not
restricted to just using the keyboard. FEMAP will automatically convert “mouse picks” to
equivalent keyboard actions. However, there are several limitations when recording a pro-
gram file:
m You can not use the Toolbar. Toolbar buttons cannot be accessed from the keyboard,
therefore FEMAP cannot convert your graphical selection of a toolbar action into an
equivalent keystroke in the program file. While recording, you can still use the toolbar,
but those commands will not be recorded in the program file - be careful!
m The View Align By Dynamic command can not be recorded in a program file. Use the
other rotate, pan and zoom commands.
The more thorough level of rebuilding (“fully rebuild”) does everything that the quick
method does and also reconstructs many internal database details. If you experience a power
failure while a database is being written, or run out of disk space your model file may
become corrupted. This level of rebuild will recover any data that is still present.
Whenever you delete entities from a FEMAP model, the space that they occupied is marked
as empty. The space is still retained in the model file. When you create new entities, FEMAP
will reuse this empty space before allocating any new space. Therefore, as long as you plan
to add to your model, the space will not be wasted - it will be reused. If you have a shortage
of disk space, or if you have done a large amount of deleting, such as deleting sets of output
data, you may want to choose the full rebuild option and allow it to compress your model.
This will remove all of the empty space and reduce the size of your model file.
Rebuilding is not usually required, but it is non-destructive so you can use it any time you
have a question about the integrity of your model. Instead of using Rebuild, you can also use
the FEMAP Neutral File translator to export a neutral file and then and import it to a new
FEMAP database. The new database will also be free of empty space. ,/
)
(6
2.6.3 File Preferences...
... allows you to customize the operation of
FEMAP. These options control how certain
commands will operate, set defaults, and
define disks or files to be used.
This command is partitioned into nine different
dialog bases based upon the type of entity you
want to modify. Each of these areas are dis-
cussed in more detail below.
Note:
If you make any modifications to these parameters, FEMAP will ask you if you want to save
these options as permanent. If you say Yes, they will become a permanent part of your
femap.ini file (used to set default parameters when entering FEMAP) and will be set to the
options you chose when you start FEMAP. If you say No, the changes will apply only to the
current session.
Hint:
Be careful when changing preferences labeled Startup Preferences. These preferences cannot
be modified for the active session, and must be saved as Permanent to have any impact on
the settings. If you do save them with Permanent, the next time you enter FEMAP the
options will be set as you selected them.
File Manipulation
ally spaced font, none of the FEMAP reports or listings will be properly aligned and they
will be harder to read.
Colors:
These options let you choose the colors of text to be displayed. You can enter a numeric
color value, or choose the Palette button to select the color from the standard color palette.
For these options, you must select solid colors. You can not select any cross-hatching or pat-
terned lines. You should also make sure that you do not choose a color for the background
which matches any of the text colors - or you won’t be able to see the text. Furthermore, for
best results, you should always pick a background color that results in filled areas and lines
being the same color. If you do not, the background may be a different color “behind the
text” than it is “to the right of the text”.
)
box for Views. (6
This dialog box is partitioned into
five areas:
1. Startup View
2. Clipboard Formats
3. View and Dynamic Rotation
4. Render
Each of these areas and the individ-
ual options are discussed below.
Startup View
The View Library contains Views
that can be loaded into your model.
This file must exist if you are going
to use the Load View or Save View buttons in View Quick Options.
Specifying a Default View
The Default option lets you change the View that FEMAP uses when you start a new model,
or when you create a new view. When Default is set to 0 (zero), FEMAP uses its normal
defaults. If you want a different View, use the Quick Options (View Options, Quick Options,
or Ctrl+Q) dialog to store a View in the library, then set Default to the ID of that View as it is
stored in the library. The first view in the Library has an ID of 1, the second is 2, and so on.
Remember to say Yes to the Permanent question to save the Preferences. When you start a
new model, that View will be used as the default.
Options
These options control various operational features of FEMAP Views.
File Manipulation
)
View Rotate command buttons. The default views are Isometric, Dimetric and Trimetric. In (6
addition to the rotation angles you can also set the button text. Place an ampersand (&) in
front of the letter that you want to be able to access using the Alt+Letter keyboard combina-
tion.
Render
These options control how Render will be implemented and the level of functionality while
in the Render mode.
Hardware Accel (startup only)
This option controls whether you use Hardware Acceleration while in the Render mode or if
the rendering is to be done by software in Windows. This will be defaulted to on but will
only work when a Hardware Acceleration board has been installed in your computer. Once
the board has been installed and you do not wish to use Hardware Acceleration you can
uncheck this option. You must save this preference and restart FEMAP for this option to take
effect.
Rotate Animation
When this option is checked, you can dynamically rotate a model during an active animation
if you are in render mode. This option defaults to off.
Use Midside Nodes
If this option is selected FEMAP will use the midside nodes when drawing rendered plots.
This increases the complexity of the graphics and decreases the speed of drawing the graph-
ics window. This option defaults to on.
Rotate with Edges
If this option is selected FEMAP will include the element edges during any dynamic rota-
tions in the render mode. Turning this option off significantly reduces the amount of graph-
ics information being processed and increases the speed of dynamic rotations on large
models. This option defaults to on.
File Manipulation
Vertex Arrays
Using vertex arrays allows FEMAP to reduce the amount of memory used to display
OpenGL graphics, and on most graphics boards that support them, results in substantial
increases in drawing performance. Unfortunately, we have found a number of graphics cards
drivers that claim to support vertex arrays, but either crash or simply won’t draw properly
when they are used. In general, you should leave this option turned on, unless you are having
trouble with FEMAP graphics in Render mode. If you are having problems, turn off this
option, exit FEMAP, restart and retry the operation.
With this option enabled, you can learn about the FEMAP commands simply by pointing to
a menu, pressing down the left mouse button and then drag the cursor through the menus. As
long as you hold the button down, a new description will be displayed for each menu entry
that you select. You will also see the descriptions when you select menus with the keyboard.
The window title will revert to the original text whenever you choose a command, or cancel
the menus.
Graphical Selection
Track Mouse Picking:
This option activates dynamic selection tracking. When you move the cursor through the
graphics window to select nodes, elements or other geometry, FEMAP dynamically high-
lights the entity that will be selected if you click the mouse button. This makes accurate
selection much easier in complex models.
Pick All Inside:
This option controls selection of entities when screen area (using Box or Circle) picking is
,/
)
used to select entities whose position is defined by other multiple entities (i.e. Elements by
(6
their Nodes, Curves by their Points). If this option is On, all entities which comprise the
selected entity must be inside the selected area (i.e. for an Element, all of its Nodes must be
in the selected area for it to be picked). If it is Off, only one entity must be selected (i.e. for
an Element, only one Node must be in the selected region when this option is Off).
Show (startup only)
These commands control whether the Status Bar and command Toolbars are visible, and the
location of the Toolbars. In general, you will want to show all three of these options. You
may want to modify the location of the View (defaults to Top of Window) and Command
(defaults to Right) Toolbars. You cannot modify the location of the Status Bar.
keys. The Add command allows you to define a key as a command, while Delete will
remove the command definition from the chosen key.
By defining shortcut keys for your most used commands, you can save time moving through
the FEMAP menu structure. Shortcut Keys are only available from the FEMAP menu level.
If you are already in another command or dialog box, pressing these keys will not have the
desired effect. In most cases it will simply result in typing the letter that you pressed.
You may also save these values by saying Yes to Permanent when you exit Preferences, or
you may simply change them for the active session. Some hints are provided below for
quickly changing the shortcut keys.
m You can quickly assign commands to keys by clicking on the appropriate letter in the
Shortcut Key list and then double-clicking in the Menu list.
m You can quickly delete shortcut key assignments by double clicking in the Shortcut Key
list.
m These Shortcut Keys are not eliminated by the Reset ALL option.
m If you have created your own Menu commands, they can also be accessed in the same
manner as any other Menu commands.
2.6.3.5 Database
These options control certain database options, including memory management and location
of scratch files. All of these options, with the exception of those labeled immediate, are only
used at startup. You must therefore answer yes to the Permanent question when exiting Pref-
erences to save any changes you make.
When you select this
option, you will see the
Database and Startup Pref-
erences dialog box.
This dialog box is parti-
tioned into four areas
1. Database Options
2. Timed Save
3. Scratch Disks
4. Startup Program File
Each area is discussed
more fully below.
Database Options
These options control how FEMAP interacts with the FEMAP model file (binary database).
Database
)
a mistake, you can always restart your model and get back to the point of your last save. If (6
this option is off, FEMAP is directly modifying your model and you may not be able to eas-
ily recover.
Delete Model Scratch File:
When this option is on, FEMAP will automatically delete your scratch file whenever you
begin a new model, or exit FEMAP. This option has no effect if the Use Model Scratch File
option is not enabled.
Undo Levels:
Controls how many commands (0-99) that you will be able to undo. Setting this to a larger
number gives you greater flexibility in being able to backup your commands, but can take a
significant amount of disk space. All files are placed on the Undo Files scratch disk.
Cache Pages and Blocks/Page:
These options control how FEMAP accesses your database file and handles internal caching
of database information. A database block is 4096 bytes. When FEMAP needs to read from
disk, rather than simply reading one block it reads a “page” consisting of a number of contig-
uous blocks. Since most commands access groups of entities, this minimizes the number of
disk accesses, and speeds-up FEMAP. The Blocks/Page number sets this “page” size. The
optimum setting of this number depends on the speed of your disk and controller. The Cache
Pages numbers indicates how many of these pages FEMAP will retain in memory simulta-
neously. When FEMAP starts with a new model, it allocates the number of pages specified
in Cache Pages. If your model is even larger than that, any additional data will be written to
disk (in the model scratch file). The Max Cached Label sets the largest label that FEMAP
will reserve memory for. This option must be set to a ID higher than any entity in the model.
Please see the Getting Started Section (Memory Allocation) section in the FEMAP Users
Guide for more information.
File Manipulation
Timed Save
On and Notify:
The selected option specifies if FEMAP should Notify you when it hits a preset limit or if it
should just automatically save the model.
Interval and Commands:
The Interval sets the time in minutes between automatic save’s while the number of Com-
mands set the number of commands performed before FEMAP notifies you performs a auto-
matic save.
Scratch Disks
These options determine where temporary files will be placed. The Model Scratch file is
only used if it is turned on. The scratch file is a duplicate of your model file and therefore is
the same size. The size of the Undo files depends upon how many levels of undo you choose
and the FEMAP commands that you execute. They can be large. The Message File contains
the text which is displayed in the Messages and Listings Window. The model scratch file is
not deleted (unless you request deletion using the “Delete Model Scratch File” option), when
you exit FEMAP, but all other files are deleted.
In Windows 3.1 these must be a single character that selects the disk where the scratch files
will be placed. For Windows NT, 95 and UNIX, these can (and often times should) be com-
plete pathnames.
Startup Program File...
... allows you to automate tasks that you want to occur every time you start FEMAP and
every time you start a different model. You can use this technique to load data into your
models, change the screen setup, or anything else that you can do in a program file (see Cus-
tomization chapter of the FEMAP Users Guide).
If you specify a program filename, FEMAP will run that program at startup and every time
you start a new or existing model. If you check the “Run Program for New Models only”
button, FEMAP will not run the program when you open an existing model (either at startup
or with the File Open command).
Mesh in Memory:
This preference determines whether additional memory will be allocated by the FEMAP
Boundary mesher. If this option is selected, FEMAP will allocate new memory to create the
mesh. If it is not selected, FEMAP will utilize the memory allocated in the database to per-
form the mesh. By allocating new memory, the FEMAP mesher can run significantly faster
than if it is limited to the database memory. Therefore, this option should almost always be
turned on. The only reason to turn this option off is if the available memory on the current
machine is low enough that allocation of new memory is extremely limited.
Geometry
2.6.3.6 Geometry
The Geometry button allows access to the
Geometry Preferences dialog box.
You can specify the default geometry engine
for solid modeling, as well as the Midside
Node Load Adjustment. Each of these sec-
tions are described below.
Geometry Engine
FEMAP has the capability to perform solid
modeling with either ACIS or Parasolids Solid
Modeler. This option controls the default
geometry engine upon entering FEMAP. Choice of this option is only important if you have
only purchased one of the geometric engines, or plan on exporting a solid model to another
ACIS or Parasolids-based program. If you do not plan to export a solid model, either engine
,/
)
can be used to develop a solid model for use in FEA.
(6
When importing geometry, FEMAP will automatically switch to the appropriate geometry
engine.
Solid Geometry Scale Factor (startup only)
The scale factor is used and applied to solid geometry only. The scaling is done internally in
FEMAP so that a part of 1.0 on the desktop will be stored as 0.0254 in the database. The
scaling will allow you to import and model parts that are outside of the Parasolid modeling
limits. The default is 39.37 which will allow you to import a part using the default import
scaling options of also 39.37 and continue to work in inches without manually having to
scale the part. This is a Startup Preference, therefore you must save the preference and
exit FEMAP for it to take effect.
Portion of Load on Midside Nodes
This section sets the defaults for modification of the distribution of Nodal Loads (such as
Force and Moment) on Parabolic elements. To obtain an even distribution of force across a
parabolic element, most programs require a larger portion of the force be assigned to the
midside nodes. The factors for edges, Tri-Face, and Quad-Face can be set, and represent the
amount of the total load on the element which will be applied to the Midside Node.
You will typically want to use the default values above, as well as use the Midside Node
Adjustment. If you have further questions on the distribution required for your solver pro-
gram, please consult the reference documentation for your analysis program.
File Manipulation
2.6.3.7 Interfaces
This section controls defaults for interfaces to other pro-
grams. When you select this option, the Preferences dia-
log box will appear. This dialog box controls the defaults
for the Analysis Interface and Analysis Type, calculations
for importing of results, and the solid geometry scale fac-
tor.
Interface:
This option simply chooses the default analysis program
that FEMAP will display in the File Import/Export Analy-
sis Model and File Import Analysis Results command.
You should set t his option to the translator that you use
most often.
Analysis Type:
This option chooses the default type of analysis that will be performed. Set this to the type of
analysis you perform most often.
Configure for Thermal Analysis Only:
This option will configure FEMAP in a thermal mode only, changing many dialog boxes.
Many structural options will be hidden, and you will no longer have access to them. This
mode is only recommended when performing modeling specific to thermal analysis and
exporting to a thermal specific program (such as SINDA). If this option is grayed, the ther-
mal mode is not available on your system.
Skip Comments when Exporting:
When this option is on FEMAP will not write any comments into the input file. Comments
include FEMAP names and id’s for corresponding groups and sets. Header information indi-
cating the version of FEMAP used and the date the file was written will also not be written.
Compute Principal Stress/Strain:
When this option is on and you read analysis results, FEMAP will automatically compute
Principal, Von Mises, Max Shear and Mean Stresses and Strains if they have not been read,
and if all required XYZ components of Stress/Strain have been read. You can turn this option
off if you do not want to postprocess these output quantities. Turning this option off can
result in substantial speed improvements during the final phases of reading results.
You may also want to turn this option off if your analysis program already computes these
values. FEMAP does not compute new values if results exist already, but the checking pro-
cedure for these vectors will take some time, especially in extremely large models.
Read DirCos for Solid Stress/Strain:
This option can be set on when you wish to retrieve the direction cosines for Solid Stress/
Strain postprocessing information from your analysis program. Previous versions of
FEMAP would ask you if you wanted to read this data during the results import process.
This is off by default since the direction cosine information can be quite large and most users
do not use this information
Colors...
Libraries
This section allows you to define the
default libraries as well as the default
view.
For any of the libraries, you do not have
to specify a complete path as long as the
file is in a directory which is along your
DOS PATH. FEMAP first searches your
current directory and then along your
path until it finds the file.
The material, property, function and report format libraries are files which contain data that
can be accessed via the Save and Load buttons on the respective creation (or list) commands.
You must specify the name of an existing file if you plan to use the Load option, however
Save will create a new file if one does not currently exist.
,/
)
The toolbox library is the file that contains the commands and pictures for the toolbox. This (6
file must exist if you are going to use the FEMAP toolbox.
The contour library contains the user-defined contour palette colors. This file must exist if
you are going to choose the user-defined palette in the View Options command.
The Material Type Definition file contains the dialog box titles as well as the record formats
for Other Types of materials. This file can be modified to include additional material types,
but modifications are only suggested when accessing FEMAP information from a FEMAP
neutral file since dedicated translators such as ABAQUS or LS-DYNA3D will not recognize
these user materials. Materials contained in the mat_scr.esp file installed with FEMAP are
supported by the specific dedicated translators.
2.6.3.8 Colors...
... allows you to access the Model
Color Preferences dialog box.
You can control the default colors
for all entities. You can also choose
the palette to use for these colors.
The colors you choose will be used
whenever you start a new model.
You must save these changes per-
manently if you want them to have
any effect.
Reset
The Reset button on this dialog box
changes all colors back to the
FEMAP defaults.
File Manipulation
Geometry provides the framework for most finite element meshes. Therefore, it is necessary
to have robust tools for creating geometry. FEMAP has the capability to build geometry from
simple points to complex 3-D solids. Commands that affect geometry can be separated into
three major categories: (1) Creating Geometry, (2) Copying Geometry, and (3) Modifying
Existing Geometry.
This section describes the commands available for these three categories of geometry com-
mands. For ease of reference, the first category is separated into four sections, based upon the
type of geometry you need to create. Therefore, the geometry section of this manual is sepa-
rated into six main sections, which are listed below.
1. Points
2. Curves
3. Surfaces/Boundaries
4. Volumes/Solids
5. Copying Geometry
6. Modifying Geometry
7. Deleting Geometry
As mentioned above, the first four sections deal with creating geometry from scratch. The
commands for initial geometry creation are all contained under the Geometry menu. Creating
new geometry from existing geometry, or copying commands, are also contained on the
geometry menu. The final section, Modifying Geometry, explains commands pertaining to
manipulation of geometry, and are found on the Modify menu.
Each of these sections and their associated menu commands are explained in more detail
below.
3.1 Points
Points are used for constructing other geometry or finite element data. You may also apply
loads and constraints to points and FEMAP will automatically apply them to Nodes attached
to the Points. Points are similar to Nodes in that they are simply located at a specific location.
Unlike Nodes however, they are not a finite element entity and are not translated to analysis
programs. Instead, they are used for defining geometry. Just as Elements reference Nodes,
Curves reference Points.
Geometry
3.2 Curves
Curves form the basis from which you can create surfaces, and they can also be generated
from surfaces. They reference Points to define their location. You can apply loads and con-
straints directly to curves, and FEMAP will automatically convert them to Nodal/Elemental
values on the attached FEA entities.
The Geometry Curve Menu section is separated into five major sections, based upon the type
of curve or creation method. They are:
1. Line
2. Arc
3. Circle
4. Spline
5. From Surface
3.2.1 Lines
Lines are simply straight lines connecting two points. The Geometry Curve-Line menu is
partitioned into 3-sections. The top portion creates lines in the Workplane. Any locations
which are specified in 3-D space, will be automatically projected onto the Workplane. The
second section consists of the command Rectangle. This command creates a rectangle in the
Workplane. It is separated from the commands above because it creates four-lines at once.
The bottom portion of the menu contains commands that are used to create lines in 3-D
space. These commands do not project the inputs onto the Workplane.
Hint:
You can use this command to create a 2D projected image of 3D geometry. Just setup the
workplane so the workplane normal is along the direction that you want to project, and pick
the endpoints of the existing lines (using Snap To Point). New lines will be created in the
workplane.
*
projected onto the workplane, along a vector which is perpendicular to the workplane. The 0
projected location is used as the center of the line. (7
5
The length of the horizontal line in either direction from the center is controlled by the Hori- <
zontal/Vertical Line length parameter. You can adjust this length by pressing the Parameter
button on the standard coordinate dialog, and entering a new value prior to defining the cen-
ter location.
Hint:
Since control of the line length is somewhat difficult using this method, but positioning the
line is very quick, this method is often used for creating initial construction geometry which
you then plan to modify with trim, join or break commands.
Note:
If you choose a curve that does not lie in the current workplane, the selected curve will first
be projected into the workplane, then the perpendicular to the projection will be determined.
The projection method will work fine for lines, but if you choose an arc or circle that is not
oriented parallel to the workplane, the resulting line will not be perpendicular to the projec-
tion. Rather, it will go through the projection of the original arc/circle center point.
appropriate side of the line, and click with the mouse. The actual coordinates do not matter,
just their relationship to the original curve. The new line will be offset toward the side of the
line that you specify.
The length of the new line is identical to the length of the original line that you choose.
*
which is normal to the workplane.
0
Finally you specify the (7
angle from the Workplane 5
X axis to the line. Positive Workplane Positive Angle
<
angles are measured from
the positive Workplane X Yw θ
axis toward the positive
Workplane Y axis. Nega- Projected
tive angles are measured Xw Coordinates
toward the negative Work- Original
plane Y axis. Coordinates
can specify any location, but if you specify a location that is not on the workplane, those
coordinates will be projected along the workplane normal, to a location which is on the
workplane.
The only restriction on the end point location is that it must lie outside of the arc/circle that
you chose. No tangent can be formed which passes through an interior point to the curve.
Finally, the standard coordinate dialog is displayed again. This time you must specify a loca-
tion on the side closest to the tangent that you want to use. Since there are two tangents that
can be formed through any exterior point, this allows you to choose the one that you want.
There is no need for precise coordinates in this dialog. You must simply choose a location
which is closer to one tangent point than the other. Typically, a location on the appropriate
side of the circle.
For this command FEMAP considers arcs to be the same as circles. That is, you can still
form a tangent to a portion of the arc that lies outside of the arc endpoints. FEMAP ignores
the endpoints, just as if the arc were a full circle. For this reason, you must still choose the
“near” location for an arc, even though there may only be one tangent possible that falls
within the endpoints.
Note:
If you choose an arc or circle that does not lie in the workplane, FEMAP will project the
keypoints of that curve onto the workplane, and use the arc/circle defined by those projected
locations to calculate the tangent. If the curve was parallel to the workplane, this will not
cause any problems, however, if the curve normal is not parallel to the workplane normal,
(2
*
the resulting tangent will be calculated based on a circle with a projected radius. Use this
option carefully. 0
(7
3.2.1.10 Geometry Curve-Line Tangent... 5
<
... creates a line in the workplane which is tangent to two arcs or circles. First, you must
choose the two curves that you want to use:
You can choose any
arcs or circles, but Selected “To Curve”
Pick near here
neither curve can lie to create tangent
completely inside as shown
the other. If it did,
no tangents could
be computed.
When you have
Selected “From Curve“
selected the curves, or, Pick near here All in Workplane
FEMAP will ask for to create crossing tangent
dialog boxes. This location does not have to be specified precisely, but is used to select
which tangency points will be used.
Typically, as shown above, when you select two circles, there could be four possible tan-
gents - one above, one below and two “crossing” tangents. You must choose a location near
the endpoint on the first curve (the From Curve) of the tangent that you want to create. The
location is not used to compute the tangent. It is just used to select from the four choices.
You can continue to specify coordinates and create lines for as long as you like. There is no
limit on the number of lines you can create in a single command. When you are done, press
Cancel, to stop creating lines. If you press Cancel after having created two or more lines, you
will be asked whether you want to close the lines. If you choose Yes, a final line will be cre-
ated joining the last location that you specified to the first location - thus creating a closed
polygon.
Hint:
If the lines that you need to create are not coincident at their endpoints, use the Geometry
Curve-Line Coordinates command instead of this command.
*
you select happen to be located in
0
the workplane. (7
5
3.2.1.14 Geometry Curve-Line Coordinates... F9 <
... creates a single line in three dimensional space between two coordinate locations that you
specify using the standard coordinate definition dialog box. This command is very similar to
the Geometry Curve-Line Continuous command, except that it requires two endpoints for
each line that is created. You should use this command when you have a series of lines to
create, but the lines are not connected at their endpoints.
When you have selected the existing curve, you will see the standard vector definition dialog
box. The vector that you specify will be used to compute the offset location of the new line.
You do not have to specify the base of the vector at either endpoint, nor at any other specific
location. The vector components are simply used to offset the endpoints of the original line.
The length of the vector that you specify will be the offset distance.
Hint:
If you need to offset multiple curves along the same vector, including curves that are not
lines, use the Geometry Copy Curve command instead.
3.2.2 Arcs
You may also define circular arcs with FEMAP by using the commands under the Geometry
Curve-Arc menu. This submenu is broken into two sections. The commands at the top of the
menu (above the separator line) all create arcs which lie in the current workplane. The other
commands can create arcs anywhere, including in the workplane.
All of the methods can be used to create equivalent arcs. The various commands are merely
for convenience in specifying the input.
*
direction (relative
to the workplane 0
axes) from starting
(7
Positive Radius 5
to ending points. Yw
End point Negative Radius Start point
<
The following fig-
ure shows several
possibilities:. Xw Start point Negative Radius End point
Reversing the direc-
tion of the work- Positive Radius
always have an Xw
included angle less
than 180 degrees. Specifying a negative angle creates a complimentary arc with an included
angle that is larger than 180 degrees. By definition, the chord length must always be shorter
than twice the radius (the distance from the center to starting point).
*
any point along the arc and the third for the ending location. Since the arc is drawn from the
0
start, to the middle, to the ending locations, there are no clockwise/counter-clockwise con- (7
ventions. The direction is simply based on the relative positions of the three locations. 5
<
3.2.2.7 Geometry Curve-Arc Center and Points...
. . . creates an arc which is defined by its center, start and ending locations. The arc created
by this command does not have to lie in the workplane. It is oriented by the locations that
you define.
The standard coor-
Center Other Location
dinate dialog boxes
will be displayed
Start four times during
End Center this command. The
first three coordi-
nates are used to
Other Location
Start End
define the center,
starting and ending
locations. The arc
radius is defined by the distance from the center to the start location. The ending location is
Geometry
used to determine the included angle. The end of the arc will always lie along the line con-
necting the center and the ending location that you specify. Since the arc radius is constant
however, the arc will not necessarily end at the location you specify. The only time it will
end exactly at that location is if the distance from the center to the end is identical to the dis-
tance from the center to the start.
After you specify the first three locations, the standard coordinate dialog box will be dis-
played a fourth time. The fourth location can be specified anywhere, but it is used to deter-
mine which of the two possible arcs will be created. Since there is no clockwise/counter-
clockwise convention for this three dimensional arc, the arc will be drawn in the direction
from the start to the end that causes it to pass nearest to this fourth position.
Note:
The only restriction on the vector direction is that it must not be parallel to the line connect-
ing the starting and ending locations. If it were, it could not be an arc tangent. Similarly, it is
relatively unusual to choose vectors that are very close to being parallel. They will result in
arcs with very large radii.
3.2.3 Circles
There are several methods of creating circles in FEMAP. The Geometry Curve-Circle sub-
menu is partitioned into two sections. The commands at the top of the menu (above the sep-
arator line) all create circles which lie in the current workplane. The other commands can
create circles anywhere, including in the workplane.
Geometry Curve-Circle Radius...
All of the methods can be used to create equivalent circles, the various commands are
merely for convenience in specifying the input.
Points on a Circle
No matter which command is used, five points will be created for each circle - one at the
center, one at the starting location on the perimeter, and three more every 90 degrees around
the perimeter from the starting location. The radius of the circle is determined by the dis-
tance from the center to the starting location. The other points are merely for your conve-
nience in defining other geometry. For example, you can easily snap a cursor selection to any
of these locations by choosing the Snap To Point method.
If you are modifying (moving, rotating. . .) points, you must be careful. If you do not move
all of the points for each curve, the circle radius may change, and the other points will no
longer lie on the perimeter. In general you should always use the curve modification com-
mands, rather than the point modifications if you wish to preserve the original geometry.
*
prior to defining the circle.
0
The standard coordinate definition dialog boxes will be displayed twice. First for the center, (7
then for the starting point. As shown in the figure, the points on the perimeter are oriented 5
<
relative to the line between the center and starting locations. They are not based on the work-
plane X or Y axes.
*
command:
0
(7
5
The circle to be cre- <
Pick Curve 2 graphically
ated will be tangent in this quadrant to create
to the two curves this circle
that you select. If
Curve 2
you are choosing
two lines, make cer- Curve 1
tain they are not Yw
parallel. The radius Other possible tangent
circles. Center Near
can be any value, chooses which one will
but must be large Xw be created
enough to make the
double tangency possible. For example, if you are choosing two circles that are separated by
10 inches, a 1 inch radius cannot possibly be tangent to both.
The coordinates that you specify for “With Center Near”, are simply used to choose from
among the several possible tangent circles that could be created. Only the circle which has
its center closest to the location that you specify will be created. For convenience, you can
change the coordinate system in which this location is specified.
Geometry
If you are using your mouse to select the curves graphically, the “With Center Near” coordi-
nates will automatically be set to the location where you choose the second curve. If you are
careful, when you select this curve, you will not have to respecify any additional center
coordinates.
Note:
You can choose any type of original curves for this command, however they should lie in the
current workplane. If they do not, they will be projected onto the workplane prior to comput-
ing the tangency and you may not get the results that you expected. Similarly, because of
inaccuracies in computing offset splines (which are used in the tangency calculations), you
may find that if you choose one or more splines, the resulting circle does not actually touch
the spline. For this reason, this command is not recommended when you are working with
splines.
3.2.4 Splines
FEMAP has the capability to produce splines containing from between 4 to 110 points.
Splines created in FEMAP with 4 points will be stored as cubic Bezier curves. Splines cre-
ated through the Ellipse, Parabola, Hyperbola, Equation, Tangents, and Blend suboptions
will automatically contain four points and be stored as cubic Bezier splines. Splines created
with the remaining commands with more than 4 points will be stored as B-Splines. In addi-
tion, Non-Uniform Rational B-Splines (NURBS) can be imported through the IGES transla-
tor.
(2
*
Splines are created from their Control Points. The actual curve passes through the first and
0
last control point, but does not pass through the intermediate points. FEMAP does have (7
methods which allow you to input a spline based upon points on the spline, however, 5
FEMAP will use these points to calculate the Control Points, and then store the spline with
<
its Control Points.
The control points
Final Control
of a spline deter- Starting Tangent Point
mine the direction First Control Point
of the spline.
Final Tangent
In addition to direc-
tion, distance
between control Intermediate
Control Points
points influences
curvature of the
spline. The further Final Tangent
the control point is Starting Tangent
pulled from the pre-
vious control point,
the more the spline is “pulled” toward the intermediate point, and the curvature is increased.
Geometry
Displaying Splines
Splines are computed internally with full double precision accuracy. For display purposes
however, splines are displayed as a series of line segments. If you want to change the accu-
racy of the display, either to make it more accurate (but slower), or less accurate (but faster),
use the View Options command. Choose the Tools and View Style list, and the Curve and
Surface Accuracy option. Then set the Max% Error value. A smaller number makes the dis-
play more accurate.
The Geometry Curve-Spline submenu is partitioned into three sections: splines in a Work-
plane, splines from analytics (also in the Workplane), and splines in 3-D space. Each of the
commands on these menus are discussed below
Note:
The Cancel button on the dialog box is utilized to both cancel the creation of the spline, as
well as create it. If less than four points have been chosen, the Cancel button will enable you
to terminate the process without creating a spline. Once four points have been defined, how-
ever, the Cancel button is used to terminate input of more points and a spline is created. If
you make an input error after four points have been defined, you cannot Cancel the proce-
dure without creating the spline. Simply use the Tools Undo command to remove the spline
if it is inaccurate. This is true for all procedures under Create Spline that enable you to create
B-Splines.
This command is typically used to create two-dimensional splines to fit a curve through
known locations. It lets you precisely control points to lie along the spline. Some care should
be taken however when choosing those points. If you choose points that are extremely close
together, it can result in control points at great distances from the spline.
*
pal axis of the ellipse. If you specify equal radii, the splines will approximate a circle.
0
(7
5
Note: <
Since the underlying mathematics of the spline are based on a parametric cubic equation, the
resulting splines cannot precisely represent a circle or ellipse. For most FEA analyses, how-
ever, the approximation is close enough. Given the four spline layout created by this com-
mand, with equal radii, the maximum deviation from a true circle would be 0.027% of the
radius. If this is not close enough, use arc/circle commands to create precise geometry.
The first location is the vertex of the parabola. The spline will start from this location. The
next location is the focus of the parabola. These coordinates (along with the vertex) are used
to determine the focal length and focal direction of the parabola. Neither the spline nor its
control points are actually located at the focus. For reference, however, an extra point is cre-
ated at this location. The final location is an approximate end for the spline. These coordi-
nates do not have to be specified precisely. They do not have any impact on the shape or
orientation of the parabola, they simply define where you want the parabola to end.
Hint:
This command always creates a parabola which extends completely to the vertex. If you
need some other segment of a parabola, you can still use this command to create a basic
curve, then use the Modify Trim command to cut away the portions that you do not need.
Note:
Even though the spline is defined by a parametric cubic equation, the representation of a
parabola is precise. Unlike ellipses and hyperbolas, there is no deviation from a true parab-
ola.
Hint:
This command always creates a hyperbola which extends completely to the vertex. If you
need some other segment of a hyperbola, you can still use this command to create a basic
curve, then use the Modify Trim command to cut away the portions that you do not need.
Note:
Since the underlying mathematics of the spline that this command creates is a parametric
cubic equation, it can not precisely represent a hyperbola. For most finite element applica-
tions however, the deviations are acceptable. The exact deviations are dependent on the
geometry specified, but even extreme cases will be very accurate.
*
0
3.2.4.8 Geometry Curve-Spline Equation... (7
5
... creates a spline by <
specifying the coeffi-
cients of its parametric
cubic equations. This
is a rather cumber-
some way to create a
spline, but provides
complete control over the resulting curve.
The parametric equations are shown in the dialog box with blanks for the coefficients. Leav-
ing a coefficient blank effectively eliminates that term from the equation. If you leave all
coefficients for one of the x, y or z equations blank, the spline will be planar in the corre-
sponding global plane.
Geometry
causing more curvature near the center of the spline. Smaller numbers make the tangency
weaker, therefore, most of the curvature will be near the ends of the spline. The following
figure shows some possibilities:
If you specify a blend factor which is too large, or too small, you can create splines that have
loops, or extreme curvature.
*
Offset
side of the original curve you want. 0
(7
5
<
Note:
Cubic bezier splines (ones with only 4
points) can not be offset precisely, due
to the underlying mathematics. You will
find that the offset curve is not a constant distance from the original - sometimes by a signif-
icant deviation. This is especially true when the spline is nonplanar. Offset B-Splines are
modified by adding control points to improve how well the offset spline tracks the original
curve. If you need precise offsets, you cannot use splines. Instead, use a series of arcs, since
arcs can be offset precisely.
cated, FEMAP will create a FEMAP engine spline that closely approximates the selected
curves.
Note:
Take care to avoid sharp corners, as the resulting spline will not be
able to match the geometry correctly.
(2
*
0
(7
5
<
This command is very useful for imprinting one surface, composed of its bounding curves,
onto the surface of a solid. You must have the Geometry Curves - from Surface Update Sur-
face on (see Section 3.2.5.1) to imprint the curves onto a surface of the solid.
Geometry
When Update Surfaces is On (see Section 3.2.5.1), you can quickly partition a surface into
several segments, which is often useful for loading and meshing purposes.
Surfaces is On (see Section 3.2.5.1), the affected surfaces will also be partitioned by the
slice.
(2
*
0
(7
5
<
Geometry
3.3 Surfaces
There are several types of surfaces in FEMAP. The following table summarizes those types,
and the commands that create them.
Surface Types
Surface
Commands Characteristics
Type
Boundary Sketch, Boundary Sur- Bounded by curves on all edges and can contain
face voids (holes). Typically used for planar meshes and
as basic framework for solid model generation.
Bilinear Corners, Edge, Plane Bounded by lines on all edges. Surface is defined by
bidirectional linear interpolation between the edges.
Ruled Edge, Ruled, Extrude, Bounded by any curves on two opposing edges, with
Sweep, Cylinder lines joining the endpoints. Surface is defined by
linear interpolation between the two edge curves.
Revolution Sector, Revolve, Sweep, Surface is defined by revolving a curve through
Cylinder, Sphere some angle. Original defining curve can be of any
type.
Coons Edge Surface bounded by three or four curves of any type.
Interior is defined as a bidirectional cubic interpola-
tion.
Bezier Aligned Surface defined by 16 control points (arranged in a
four by four array). The surface only passes through
the control points at the corners.
Face All of the Above Complex trimmed surfaces obtained from Solid
Model Boolean operations or imported from IGES
files.
You do not have to worry about which type of surface is being created. All surfaces can be
used equally well for meshing or other purposes. This information is just provided so you
can understand the various methods that are being used.
Note:
When you use these commands in the FEMAP Standard geometry engine to create surfaces,
you cannot perform Boolean operations on these surfaces. They can be used for meshing as
well as creating volumes, but not for intersection or Boolean solid operations.
Sketch
Surface Parameters
When you are creating surfaces, you will see
numerous dialog boxes with a Parameter button.
Choosing this button lets you set various options
which control the surfaces that you will create. You
will see the Geometry Parameters dialog box:
All of the parameters of interest are in the Surface
section. You can choose the ID of the next surface
to be created, although it is usually not of great con-
cern. You can also choose a color for the surface -
either by typing its number or by pressing the Pal-
ette button and choosing from the standard palette.
If you do not set a color, you can always change the
color later with the Modify Color Surface com-
mand.
Surface Divisions
The final surface parameters are the number of
divisions. When surfaces are displayed, intermedi-
ate curves are drawn to show you the shape of the
interior of the surfaces. They have no impact on the actual shape of the surface or on the
position of any location on the surface, they are purely for display purposes. By changing the
number of divisions, you will control how many curves will be drawn for each surface. Typ-
ically, very curved surfaces will need more divisions, planar surfaces need fewer.
(2
*
You can independently control the divisions along the two parametric surface directions
(shown as s and t). By setting the parameters to different values in the two directions, you 0
can very quickly see (by counting the number of curves) the orientation of the surface direc- (7
5
tions. This can be of assistance when setting mesh sizes on surfaces. <
You can modify the number of divisions on surfaces that you have already created using the
Modify Update Surface Divisions command.
Commands
There are three commands/menus in the surface area of the Geometry menu. The first two,
Sketch and Boundary Surface, create a Boundary Surface, while the third listing, Surfaces, is
actually a submenu of several commands for creating surfaces. Each of these commands will
be discussed in more detail below. The major difference between a boundary surface and a
surface is that a boundary surface is typically planar, while a surface is typically 3-dimen-
sional. Also, surfaces can be readily mapped mesh, while boundary surfaces require a “free-
mesher”.
3.3.1 Sketch
The Sketch command provides a quick method to create Boundary Surfaces. This command
essentially combines the capability of the individual geometry creation commands under the
Geometry Menu, with the Geometry Boundary Surface command. When you first select this
Geometry
command, the following window will appear, and the right hand toolbar will be switched to
one of the geometry toolbars
.You can then use the toolbars, as well as the Menu commands to cre-
ate geometry. Once you create the geometry for your Boundary Sur-
face, simply hit Finish Sketch on the above Window, and FEMAP will
automatically create a Boundary Surface from the geometry you just
created. Until you select Finish Sketch, the individual geometry which
you just created contains no association between the geometric entities. If you hit Cancel,
the geometry you just created will remain, but a Boundary Surface will not be created.
If you have accessed this command through the Solids Toolbar, you will also have the option
to Extrude or Revolve. When you select one of these options, FEMAP will automatically
create the Boundary Surface and then move to the Solids Extrude/Revolve menu.
For more information on Boundary Surfaces, please review the next section, Boundary Sur-
faces.
You can select the curves that form your boundary in any order, and you can even “box” or
“circle” pick to select all the curves with one selection. FEMAP will automatically order
your selections to put them in boundary order. This feature makes it extremely easy to use
the area cursor picking methods to choose all of the curves in an area as part of your bound-
ary. You may only select up to 750 curves to define a boundary (including holes).
Adding Holes to Boundaries
“Holes” are areas inside the boundary that you do not want this boundary to mesh. They may
or may not represent physical holes in your structure. The procedure for defining a hole is
identical to that for defining the outer boundary. Simply pick all curves around the boundary
of the hole at the same time you are selecting the outside boundary. FEMAP will automati-
cally sort the curves and determine which ones are associated with the hole(s), and which
curves form the outer boundary.
The same restrictions (single, closed loop...) apply to curves that represent holes. In addition,
as you might expect holes cannot overlap (or touch) each other, and they must be totally
inside the outer boundary but outside all other holes.
You can define as
Good, multiple holes Bad, holes overlap Bad, holes inside each other
many holes as you
like in the bound-
ary, but the total
count of all curves
that define the
boundary and the
holes cannot
exceed the 750 (2
*
curve limit. 0
(7
5
<
Note:
You may also map a boundary onto a surface to obtain a non-planar mesh. Please see the
Modify Update Other Boundary on Surface command for more details on this capability.
Improving Meshing Speed
Original Boundary Two, Simpler Boundaries
While you can
define and mesh
very large, compli-
cated boundaries,
it is often more
productive to
break them into
multiple smaller
pieces. Typically,
the boundary mesh
command will be
Geometry
able to mesh two smaller boundaries faster than one large one. In addition, you have some
extra control over the mesh. The following figure shows a typical example:
Obviously there is a trade-off between the time you might save when making the mesh, and
the time it takes to split the boundaries. In general, it is probably worthwhile if you can make
the splits by just adding a line or two, like the picture above. Otherwise, it is probably faster
to mesh the entire boundary. On the other hand, you may still want to add the extra “splits”
to get the extra control of the mesh. With the extra curves, you can specify exactly the num-
ber of nodes along those splits.
Another area of concern is, meshing boundaries that are set to “Map onto Surface”. They can
take substantially longer than meshing boundaries that just use the boundary curves. This
delay is caused by the extra mapping required to insure that the mesh lies on the surface.
the closed loop that is necessary to create a boundary, and the interior curves can be properly
identified. Although the order of your selection is not important, you must select surfaces
that create a single region. You can not select surfaces that are disconnected, or that only join
at a single point. If you want to create multiple regions, you must do this in multiple com-
mands. Just as boundaries can have holes, you can select surfaces that surround holes (or
simply surround other surfaces that you do not select).
When you mesh a multi-surface boundary, FEMAP will mesh it as a planar boundary. It is
therefore very important that you do not combine surfaces that contain too much curvature.
Best results will be obtained if you combine surfaces that are nearly planar, or have moderate
curvature from the “average” plane. There is no checking to prevent you from combining
surfaces that have a very large curvature (even greater than 180 degrees), but the resulting
mesh quality will surely suffer if you do this. Taken to the extreme, the resulting boundary
surface will not be meshable.
Although the surface is meshed as a planar boundary, the resulting mesh is projected and
smoothed back to the original surfaces. This is much like the Modify Project Mesh onto
Solid command. This is very different than what happens when you use the Modify Update
Other Boundary on Surface command to attach a boundary to a surface. In that case, the
mesh is created in the parametric coordinates of the surface.
Any features (curves or surfaces) in the interior of the boundary will simply be meshed over.
“Interior” does not, in this case refer to holes which are still on the inside of the boundary. It
refers to curves and surfaces that are completely surrounded by surfaces that have been com-
bined. Therefore, if you combine things like fillet surfaces into other adjacent surfaces, they
will be meshed over. Some nodes may still lie on the fillet, but there is nothing to retain the
basic shape of the fillet. Similarly, if you combine two surfaces that are not tangent at their
(2
*
intersection, the mesh will simply blend over this intersection. There will not be any distinc-
0
tive break between the surfaces. (7
5
When you create multi-surface boundaries, FEMAP does several things automatically to <
help you in later meshing of your surfaces. First, the underlying surfaces that you select are
moved to the no-pick layer, and they are feature suppressed. This means that when you later
select surfaces or solids for meshing, the underlying surfaces will not be meshed, nor will
they even be pickable.
If you are creating many multi-surface boundaries, it can sometimes be difficult to tell which
surfaces have been selected, and which boundary contains the surfaces. If you go to the
Modify Color Surface command and choose the boundary surfaces, you will be asked if you
want to randomize the colors. Doing this will update the color of the surfaces, in each
selected boundary, to be a distinct, but different color.
Working with Unstitched Geometry
This command only works with stitched surfaces. If you are unable to stitch the surfaces that
you want into a single solid you will not be able to use this command. You may however,
still be able to accomplish the same meshing result. The first step is to create a boundary
using curves around the outside of the region of interest. You may need to make additional
curves, if the curves that you have are not joined at their endpoints. Then, mesh the boundary
Geometry
surface as normal, and go to the Modify Project Mesh onto Solid command to project the
mesh back onto the original unstitched surfaces.
3.3.3 Surfaces
These commands enable you to create surfaces in the Standard Geometry Engine, or the
Parasolid or ACIS Geometry Engine.
Corner 4
The standard coor-
dinate definition
dialog boxes are
Corner 3 used to specify the
corner locations.
The locations you
specify are not
Surface t Direction projected in any
way, they are sim-
ply used to define
Corner 1
the surface.
Corner 2
Surface s Direction
Geometry Surface Edge Curves...
(2
*
0
(7
5
First, you should <
choose the desired Curve 3
either graphically or
by specifying their
IDs. You must Surface t Direction
choose the curves in Curve 1
Surface s Direction
order, going around
the boundary. You cannot choose the curves in a random order.
You can choose any type of curve as an edge. In addition, the curves can be in any orienta-
tion, so long as they are all coincident at the endpoints. The curves do not have to form a pla-
nar surface. However, you should not create surfaces with extreme warping, or extreme
corner angles. These will be fine as surfaces, but when you apply the finite element mesh
Geometry
you may create very distorted elements. If you do have these extreme types of surfaces, they
should be meshed with triangular elements to minimize element distortions.
Note:
Since this surface does not coincide with the curves along its edges, it can be difficult to join
it with surfaces of other types. It will join properly with another aligned surface that uses the
same edge. As shown in the figure, if you have a linear edge (the bottom edge), the surface
will coincide with the control curve, so you can join the surface to other surface types.
Parasolid or ACIS Geometry Engine
The advanced geometry engine allows you to fit a lofted surface between a series of curves.
It differs from the standard aligned surface in that you can use any numbers of curves to
define the surface, and the curves will be on the surface that is constructed. This is a very
powerful method to create surfaces with varying curvature simply by defining curves at crit-
ical locations.
Note:
The curves used for this command with the Parasolid engine must always be in the same
direction. FEMAP will not automatically reverse the direction. Therefore, if you are having
difficulty defining the surface, you should check the direction of the curves by using the
View Options, Tools and View Style, Curve and Surface Accuracy option to turn Directions
on. This will enable you to confirm that all curves are formed in the same direction. If the
directions are not aligned FEMAP will ask you if you want to try and create a surface
through the interpolated points of the curves. You can try this or change the direction of the
curves.
(2
*
3.3.3.4 Geometry Surface Ruled... 0
(7
... creates a quadrilateral surface between two curves. The surface is formed by linear inter- 5
polation between corresponding parametric locations along the selected curves. The only <
inputs for this command are the two curves.
After you select
the curves, two Curve 2
additional lines
are created
which join the
endpoints of the
original curves. Surface t Direction
These new lines
Automatically creates
do not control edge lines
Surface s Direction Curve 1
the surface, but
do help to show
its boundaries.
Geometry
Ruled surfaces are very easy to create. You can choose any type of curves, in any orientation.
They do not have to lie in the same plane. In addition, the resulting surface is usually fairly
uniform parametrically and yields very good finite element meshes.
*
ing. In this case, the resulting surface will be twisted and effectively unusable for meshing.
No checking is done for this case, so you can create these surfaces, but you will probably 0
(7
want to avoid this situation. 5
<
3.3.3.7 Geometry Surface Sweep...
... allows you to create surfaces by moving or sweeping one or more curves along a path
defined by other curves. The required input for this command is minimal. You simply select
the curves that define the cross section that you want to sweep, using the standard entity
selection dialog box. Then with a second entity selection dialog box, you select the curves
that make up the path along which you will sweep the cross section.
Selecting the Path
Even though you choose it after the cross section, it is important to understand the implica-
tions of choosing a path before you define the cross section. The curves that you select for
the path must form a single continuous loop - either closed (the end is also connected to the
start) or open. They must not branch, or have any gaps. They do not have to be connected to
the same points, but must have coincident endpoints.
If, in addition to being coincident, all curves along the path are also tangent at their end-
points, the sweeping operation will maintain a constant cross section as it traverses the path.
On the other hand, if you include nontangent curves, the corners will be automatically
Geometry
mitred to the half angle between the tangents of the curves. This however, will result in a
nonuniform cross section, and in some cases a cross section that is somewhat distorted.
Choosing Splines in the Path
You can use any type of curves in the path, however, if you are using the standard FEMAP
geometry engine this command cannot create a single swept surface along a spline. If you
choose splines in the path they will be broken into multiple line segments, and the cross sec-
tion will be swept along these segments rather than the true spline. This will result in multi-
ple surfaces. You can control the number of line segments by setting the mesh size along the
spline prior to sweeping using the Mesh Mesh Control Size Along Curve command.
Selecting the Cross Section
Just as for the path, you can choose any curves that you want for the cross section. You do
have to be aware however of the relationship between the path and the cross section. Here
are some general rules to follow:
1. The curves in the cross section must be positioned in space at the appropriate location rel-
ative to the path. This command simply extrudes and revolves the cross section along vec-
tors which are defined by the curves you select as the path. It is up to you to properly
locate the starting position of the cross section. The surfaces created by this command will
be located wherever you start the cross section. All offsets from the path to the cross sec-
tion will act as rigid links as the cross section is swept around a curve.
2. If your path contains arcs, make sure that your cross section does not protrude further than
the arc radius to the “inside” of the path. If it does, the resulting surfaces will be twisted as
they are swept around the arc.
3. Typically you will want to create the curves for the cross section in a plane that is normal
to the ending tangent of the path. If you do not, the cross section that you sweep will be a
projection of the true cross section.
Cross Section Curve
Path Curves
Spline in Path
uses Mesh Size
If the cross section that you choose contains arcs or circles, and your path contains curves
that are not tangent to one another, the arcs and circles will be converted to equivalent
splines before they are swept. This is not a precise representation, but it is fairly accurate. It
is required because of the automatic mitred corners that will be generated between the non-
tangent curves. The cross section at those corners will no longer be circular, it will be ellipti-
cal (which must be represented by a spline).
Geometry Surface Plane...
Path Curves
*
appropriate plane, you will be prompted for the width (along Plane X) and Height (along
Plane Y) of the plane. 0
(7
The width and height of the plane are combined with the orientation of the plane to deter- 5
mine the other three corners. While limited to rectangular surfaces, this command offers <
great flexibility in positioning of planar surfaces.
orientation of the centerline of the object. The magnitude of the vector that you specify is
also used as the object length. By choosing the various vector definition methods, you can
either explicitly specify the length, or automatically determine it from the endpoints of the
vector.
After you have defined the centerline vector, the standard vector dialog box will appear
again. This time you must specify a vector which points toward the circumferential location
where you want the lateral curved surfaces to begin. Just as the centerline positioned and ori-
ented the surfaces in space, this vector orients the surfaces by rotating them around the cen-
terline. This is fairly obvious when you are going to generate a partial cylinder (< 360
degrees), but is also necessary for full cylinders. If you really don’t care where the surfaces
start, you can choose any nonzero vector that is not parallel to the centerline.
Finally, the following dialog box is used to specify the remaining parameters:
The shape controls the type of object that will be created. Cones and cylinders only have one
lateral (curved) surface, but tubes have two, an inner and outer surface. The various radii
must be specified to define the object size. Unnecessary radii for each shape will be grayed
and disabled. The inner radii are only available for tubes. They must always be greater than
zero, but less than the respective outer radius. The bottom radii are applied at the base of the
centerline vector. The top radii are used at the tip of the centerline vector.
The default
End Cap Cylinder Tube with angle (360
capping surfaces
degrees) creates
a full cylinder/
Lateral Cap
cone/tube. If you
only want to cre-
ate a partial
object, specify a
Partial Cylinder Partial Cone smaller angle.
with capping surfaces The resulting
surface(s) will
subtend the
selected number of degrees of arc around the centerline.
By default, the “Make cap surfaces” box is not checked. In this case, only the lateral or
curved surface is created. If you check the box however, this command will also automati-
cally make planar capping surfaces at the top and bottom of the cylinder/cone/tube. Planar
lateral surfaces will also be made. When you do not specify an angle of 360 degrees, these
Geometry Surface Sphere...
surfaces are required to close the sides of the object. With a 360 degree angle, these surfaces
are actually inside the object, but will be needed if you later want to use the Create Volume
Surfaces command. They are also useful if you want to make elements in a cross section that
you can revolve into a mesh.
Note:
If you are creating a Parasolid or ACIS surface, you can only choose from a cylinder or a
cone (tube will be grayed), and “Make cap surfaces” will not be available.
*
sphere to the upper
(“north”) pole of 0
the sphere. The
(7
5
base is used as the center of the sphere, and the vector components orient the sphere in <
space. The magnitude of the vector is also used as the default radius, however you will have
an opportunity to change this radius later.
Next, another vector is required, which is used to position the origin of the spherical sur-
faces. Just as the first vector oriented the sphere in space, this vector controls the rotation of
the surfaces around the polar vector. If you do not care how the surfaces are rotated, just
choose any nonzero vector that is not parallel to the polar vector.
Finally, you will see the following dialog box:
Geometry
It lets you choose the portion of the sphere that the surfaces will represent. The Longitude
angles must range from -90 to +90 degrees. Zero degrees is at the equatorial plane, -90
degrees is the north pole (along the first vector that you defined) and +90 degrees is the
south pole. Latitude angles go around the circumference of the sphere. The zero angle is
defined by the second vector that you specified. Increasing angles are measured in a counter-
clockwise sense when looking at the equatorial plane from the north pole of the sphere. That
is, they follow the normal right-hand rule convention around the pole vector. The default
angles, as shown in the dialog box, will define a full sphere.
Note:
If you are creating a Parasolid or ACIS surface/sphere, you will only be able to create a com-
plete sphere. The Longitude and Latitude Angles will be grayed, and the Make cap surfaces
will not be visible.
This command
Full Sphere will create a single
spherical surface,
Partial Sphere
with capping surfaces unless you include
both poles (-90 and
+90 longitude). In
that case, two sur-
faces, split at the
Partial Sphere equator will be
created.
Additional planar
surfaces will be created if you choose “Make cap surfaces”. Top and bottom capping sur-
faces will be created if you do not choose the corresponding pole. These surfaces are defined
parallel to the equatorial plane. Lateral capping surfaces are always created. If you specify
latitude angles less than 360 degrees, they close the sides of the spherical segment. Other-
wise, they are created internally, just like the lateral caps for cylindrical volumes created by
the Create Surface Cylinder command.
3.3.4 Midsurface
The midsurfacing commands are available only when using the Parasolid or ACIS geometry
engines. They are useful for generating surfaces from thin-walled solid geometry. The mid-
surfaces can then be used as the basis of plate meshes. Care must be taken to make certain
that the resulting plate mesh adequately represents the model.
3.3.4.2 Single...
...creates a single sheet surface between two surfaces. The resulting surface will be larger
than both of the selected surfaces. Not all surface pairs can be midsurfaced. The command
will simply return if the midsurface operation fails.
*
surface if necessary. 0
(7
Pick this curve 5
<
two surfaces
3.3.4.5 Automatic...
...runs the three steps of semi-automatic midsurfacing (Generate, Intersect, and Cleanup
below) at once. The command requires you to select the surfaces and specify a midsurface
tolerance. Any surfaces with a distance between them of less than the midsurface tolerance
will have a midsurface generated. The command then intersects all created midsurfaces with
one another and lastly, deletes all small free floating surfaces.
Geometry
3.3.4.6 Generate...
...automatically creates all possible midsurfaces from selected surfaces. This command
requires you to select the surfaces for generation and enter a midsurface tolerance. Any sur-
faces with a distance between them of less than the midsurface tolerance will have a midsur-
face generated.
3.3.4.7 Intersect...
...automatically intersects/splits all selected surfaces with one another. The only input to this
command is the surfaces to intersect.
3.3.4.8 Cleanup...
...automatically determines which surfaces can be deleted by checking for small free floating
surfaces. The only input is the surfaces to check. It does not delete these surfaces, but rather
places them on a separate layer so they can be reviewed before they are deleted.
3.4 Solids/Volumes
The last commands for geometry creation in the Geometry Menu involve creation of 3-D
Solids and Volumes. In FEMAP, there is a distinct difference between Volumes and Solids.
Solids are formed by using the either the ACIS or Parasolid modeling engine to form com-
plex 3-D shapes. Boolean operations can be performed with these Solids, and they can have
voids, or holes in them. The number of faces (or surfaces) to a Solid is not limited. Solids
provide an excellent method to form complex 3-D shapes, and can be automatically meshed
with tetrahedrals, or if care is taken, semi-automatically meshed with hexahedrals.
Volumes are formed from analytics as well as joining selected surfaces. Volumes generated
from surfaces require 4-6 surfaces which form a complete enclosed volume. Voids (or holes)
are not permitted in volumes. The restrictions on number of surfaces and no voids limits the
usefulness of Volumes. They are typically only created when you must model a very regular
pattern volume (with no holes), and brick or wedge meshes are essential.
3.4.1 Volumes
The Geometry Volume menu allows you to create volumes which can be used for meshing of
solid elements. All volumes in FEMAP are essentially the same, although you can create
Volumes
volumes with several different “shapes”. In this case, “shapes” refers to the number of sur-
faces which are used to bound the volume. The following table summarizes those shapes.
Volume Shapes
Shape Characteristics
Brick
Wedge
Pyramid
*
0
Tetra (7
5
<
Four triangular surfaces
You can choose any of these volume shapes that you need to fill the portion of your model
that you want. In fact, the shapes shown are just the basic outlines if you used regular, planar
surfaces. In fact, any surfaces can be used and the shapes really refer more to the overall
topology than the actual shape of the volume.
Volume Parameters
When you are creating volumes, you will see numerous dialog boxes with a Parameter but-
ton. Choosing this button lets you set the ID and color of the Volume. The ID is not usually
of great concern. You can choose a color for the volume either by typing its number or by
pressing the Palette button and choosing from the standard palette. If you do not set a color,
you can always change the color later with the Modify Color Volume command.
Geometry
Displaying Volumes
The display of volumes is largely based on displaying the surfaces that are used to define the
volume. The only thing actually drawn for the volume is an outline around the surface
boundaries. You can control the overall display by adjusting the surface divisions and sur-
face display options.
Geometry Volume Menu
The Geometry Volume Menu is partitioned into three sections based upon the method of cre-
ation. The first section of commands (Corners, Surfaces, Between), create Volumes from
framework geometry of Points, Surfaces, or both. The second section (Extrude, Revolve)
perform operations on a surface to create a Volume. The final section (Cylinder, Sphere)
involve analytical Volumes. Each command on the Volume menu is discussed further below
5 6 4
4 3 3 2
1 2 1
4
Pyramid Tetra
5
3 2
4 3
1 2
1
It is always best to follow the conventions shown for specifying the order of the corner loca-
tions, however, FEMAP does check the locations that you specify to see if they match the
correct shape. If they do not, FEMAP will automatically change the selection order and
attempt to create a valid volume. This “fixup” will often create the correct volume even if
you specify the corners in a different order, but there is no guarantee.
(2
*
The same volume will be created no matter what coordinate system or systems you use to
define the corner locations. Straight lines will be used to connect all of the corners, and all 0
surfaces will be bilinear. (7
5
<
3.4.1.2 Geometry Volume Surface... Alt+F9
... allows you to select and combine existing surfaces to form a volume. The only dialog box
required is the following one:
Here you select the shape of the volume that you want to create (Brick, Wedge, Pyramid or
Tetra) and the surfaces that will define the volume. You can select any type of surface, but
you must follow these guidelines:
m The surfaces that you choose must have the appropriate shape (triangular or quadrilat-
eral) to define the shape of volume that you choose. The required shapes are listed in the
table at the beginning of this section for the Create Volume Menu.
Geometry
m All surfaces must have coincident edges. The surfaces do not have to use the same edge
curves, but they must use exactly coincident curves, so that there are no gaps between the
edges. If the surfaces do not use the same edges, the curves will be automatically merged
by this command. This insures that the surfaces that you choose form a complete closed
volume.
You do not have to
Top choose surfaces
that have their
parametric direc-
Side
tions aligned, nor
Side
do you have to
t direction choose the “Sides”
u direction in any particular
order. The volume
s direction parametric direc-
Bottom
tions are based on
the parametric
directions of the first surface that you select. The first and second (s and t) volume directions
are aligned with the parametric directions of the bottom surface. The third parametric vol-
ume direction (u) goes from the bottom to the top surface. If these directions do not form a
right-handed coordinate system, then the s and t directions are reversed (negated, but still
along the same direction).
Note:
You can choose any type of surface for a volume, but you will probably not want to choose
any Bezier surface that was created by the Create Surface Aligned Curves command. Since
this type of surface does not typically follow its edge curves exactly, any volume that you
create may have gaps along its edges and you will not be able to use it for meshing.
Geometry Volume Between...
*
.If you are using the “2 Surfaces” option, you simply choose the two surfaces which form the
0
top and bottom of the brick or wedge. All of the side surfaces are automatically created (7
between the respective edges of these surfaces. The same approach is followed for the “Sur- 5
face and Point” option, but instead of specifying a top surface (“To Surface”), you will spec- <
ify a top point. The point must already exist, you cannot specify coordinates. Again the
required side surfaces and curves are automatically created.
3.4.2 Solids
These commands provide tools for building solid models in FEMAP. They are only available
if you have the ACIS or Parasolid geometry engine active.
The Solids Menu is partitioned into six major segments:
1. Activate - select and or name the active solid
2. Creating/Editing- Extrude, Revolve, Primitives, Stitch, Explode
3. Modifying - Fillet, Chamfer, Shell, Slice, Slice Match, Slice Along Face, Embed Face
4. Boolean Operations - Add, Remove, Common, Embed
5. Slicing/Face Operations - Slice, Slice Match, Slice Along Face, Embed Face
6. Cleanup - cleanup the active solid
(2
*
The functionality of these commands are explained in more detail below. 0
(7
3.4.2.1 Geometry Solid Activate... 5
... is used to change between active solids, or to reset to make no solid active. When you
<
select this command, the Activate Solid dialog box appears.
ID
You can select the ID by inputting its ID or
simply select it from the list.
Title
You may rename a solid by typing in a dif-
ferent Title.
Reset
Choose this option to deactivate all solids.
Geometry
Note:
Unlike other similar Activate commands, such as Model Load Set and Constraint Load Set,
you cannot create a new solid by inputting an unused ID. You must create a new solid by
using one of the commands under the Solids menu which actually forms the solid and select
New Solid. FEMAP will then automatically create a new solid with the title you input.
The dialog box is separated into four major sections: (1) Material, (2) Direction, (3) Length,
and (4) Option Buttons.
Note:
You cannot extrude a FEMAP base (standard) surface, or a nonplanar boundary surface.
Material
This section controls the type of action to perform. The default will be based upon the Add/
Extrude Material option mentioned above (Section 3.4.2.2), or the last previous operation.
You can create a New Solid, Add to the current Solid (Protrusion), or Remove from the cur-
rent Solid (Hole). The Add and Remove commands are similar to the Geometry Solids Add
and Remove commands below, except you do not have to form an additional solid to Add or
Remove. You simply move a boundary or surface along a vector to add or remove material.
Geometry Solid Extrude...
Direction
This option controls whether you extrude in the Negative, Positive, or Both Directions. You
will see a small white arrow along the surface or boundary denoting the current direction. If
you switch from positive to negative, the direction of the arrow will switch.
FEMAP can extrude both planar and non-planar surfaces, but it can only extrude planar
boundaries. For all planar entities, FEMAP will automatically choose the normal to the
entity as the vector along which to extrude. If you want to extrude a non-planar surface, or
want to extrude along a vector other than the normal, you must select the extrusion vector by
pushing the Along Vector... button.
Length
You can extrude to a particular depth along the vector, to a specific location, or through all of
the solid(s) along the vector direction. If you select the location option, you must input the
location using the standard coordinate definition dialog box after hitting OK on the Extru-
sion Options dialog box.
Options Buttons
These buttons allow you to change the defaults for the extrusion.
Active Solid...
...allows you to change the active solid which will be used in the extrude operation. When
you select this option, a list of the available solids will be provided (the same dialog box
which is used in the Geometry Solid Activate command). Simply select the appropriate
solid.
Along Vector...
(2
*
... uses the standard vector definition dialog box to define the vector along which to extrude.
0
If you do not select this option, FEMAP will automatically extrude along the normal vector (7
for all planar surfaces. If you attempt to extrude a nonplanar surface, you must use this 5
option to define the extrusion vector. You cannot use this option to extrude boundary sur- <
faces. Boundary surfaces area always extruded normal to their definition plane.
Pattern...
... allows you to create multiple extrusions from a single surface or boundary extrusion. This
is an extremely useful option when multiple holes, in a symmetrical pattern are required
through a solid. You can simply define one boundary/surface, and then choose Pattern.
When you choose this command, the Patterns dialog box will appear.
Geometry
None
The default option is None. A single extrusion will be
performed with this option.
Rectangular
This option allows you to identify the number and
spacing in Y. If you are planning to use this option, the
work plane must be aligned with the pattern. Also, the
original surface/boundary you create should be at the
most negative position on the Workplane. FEMAP will
automatically move in the positive X and Y Workplane
directions (unless you specify a negative distance) to
create additional entities in the pattern. The spacing
values input must be the distance form center to center
of the boundary/surface you are extruding.
Radial
This option is very similar to Rectangular, except it defines a radial pattern. You input the
center, the number, and the total angle, and FEMAP will create these extrusions into or
through the solid.
Examples
Below you will find two examples of a pattern definition.
Rectangular Pattern
The first example uses a rectangular pattern of 3 in X and 3 in Y with the same spacing for
both. The origin is specified as the center of the circle in the Workplane in the bottom left
corner. FEMAP then uses the X spacing and Y spacing to form the 9 holes in the solid.
Radial Pattern
The Radial Pattern is similar except a number of 6 and a total angle of 360 degrees was spec-
ified.
Boundary/Surface
These options allow you to select the Boundary or Surface to extrude. By default, FEMAP
will use the last Boundary created for extrusion. If you would like to change this, simply
select the option and pick the entity.
Geometry Solid Revolve...
Note:
When you perform this command, the construction geometry (boundary or surface) will
remain, but it will be automatically moved to the Construction Geometry Layer (Layer
9999). This layer by default is chosen as the No Pick Layer on the View Layers command.
Since the boundary or surface will occupy the same space as a Solid Face, it could be acci-
dentally selected when applying loads or constraints. By moving it to a No Pick Layer, this is
avoided. If you need to graphically select it later, you can simply change the No Pick Layer
on the View Layers command.
(2
*
Note: 0
When you perform this command, the construction geometry (boundary or surface) remains,
(7
5
but it is automatically moved to the Construction Geometry Layer (Layer 9999). This layer <
defaults to the No Pick Layer on the View Layers command. Since the boundary or surface
will occupy the same space as a Solid Face, it could be accidentally selected when applying
loads or constraints. By moving it to a No Pick Layer, this is avoided. If you need to graphi-
cally select it later, you can simply change the No Pick Layer on the View Layers command.
material from an existing solid. When you select this command, the Solid Primitives dialog
box appears.
This dialog box is very similar to the Extrude Options and Revolve Options dialog box. Each
of these areas are discussed below.
Material
You can create a New Solid, Add to, or Remove from an existing Solid just as in the
Extrude/Revolve commands above. For this particular command, however, you also have
the option to form a new solid from common areas of the primitive you are about to create
and the current active solid.
Direction
You may also choose to move in a Positive or a Negative direction, just like the commands
above.
Origin
You simply specify a location for the origin of the primitive. If you plan on using a rectangu-
lar pattern, you should use the origin of the primitive which is in the most negative position
in the workplane, since FEMAP will always move in the positive direction to create the pat-
tern.
Primitive
This section defines the actual primitive to be created. You can create a block, cylinder,
cone, or sphere. For the block, you can input the origin at the center or corner of the
block.You must then specify the distances in the X, Y and Z directions. These directions are
all relative to the Workplane. For a cylinder you simply input a height and radius. A cone
requires a top and bottom radius as well as a height, while a sphere requires only a radius for
input.
Options
You may also change the active solid (Activate Solid) or choose to create a Pattern (see
Geometry Solid Extrude) similar to the Geometry Solid Extrude/Revolve commands.
(2
*
3.4.2.9 Geometry Solid Chamfer... 0
... operates identically to Geometry Solid Fillet except it produces a chamfer instead of a fil- (7
5
let. Input for this command is simply the solid edge (curve) and the chamfer length. Exam- <
ples of this command are shown below.
Examples
Note:
If a solid is not connected to any of the other chosen solids, it will not be added and will
remain as a separate entity.
Geometry Solid Remove...
Example
(2
*
- 0
(7
5
<
Example
Common
=
3.4.2.14 Geometry Solid Embed...
...similar to the common command except that it forms two solids. One from the shared vol-
umes and one from the remaining volume of the base solid. You are first asked to pick the
base solid, then the solid to embed.
Example
Embed
Hint:
This command is extremely useful when importing CAD files of symmetrical parts. Most
solid models in CAD systems will be of the entire model to generate drawings. You can use
this command to slice the part through its plane(s) of symmetry and produce a much smaller
and efficient model for meshing and analyzing. If you need to mesh the entire model due to
nonsymmetric loading conditions, simply mesh the sliced portion and then reflect the mesh.
You will be able to produce a much better mesh in less time, than if you attempt to mesh the
entire part. You will also be guaranteed to obtain a symmetrical mesh.
+ (2
*
0
(7
5
<
If a planar face is selected FEMAP uses the face normals as the extrusion direction. If you
select a curved surface, FEMAP will ask you for a direction vector to use for the extrusion.
two solids
*
0
(7
5
<
Remove Redundant Geometry
Redundant geometry is geometry that is not required to define the volume of the solid.
Examples of this could be curves that have been imprinted in a face to split it into regions,
points used to split curves, or multiple surfaces that are all really part of the same underlying
geometric surface. If you check this option, this geometry will be removed, resulting in a
simplified solid.
Note:
Do not use this option if you have imprinted curves or performed some of the matching com-
mands since imprinted curves are considered extraneous and will be removed.
Remove Sliver Surfaces
“Slivers” are small faces that are created because of numerical inaccuracies in Boolean or
other solid modeling operations. Typically these faces are much smaller than the other faces
that define your solid. While they are small, they can cause great difficulties in meshing.
Geometry
They will often completely prevent a part from being hex meshed. This option removes
these surfaces and attempts to restitch your solid without them. This option is only available
with Parasolid geometry.
Check Geometry
Once you have cleaned geometry, especially if you removed sliver surfaces, it is often good
to check it to be confident that it is still a good, usable solid. You may even want to do this
without any of the other options just to check the validity of a solid that you are creating.
Copying Geometry
*
Specifying Generation Options 0
(7
The generation options control how many copies FEMAP will make, and choose parameters
5
for the resulting entities. You have the following choices: <
Parameters:
These two choices select the parameters that will be assigned to the entities you create (such
as Color and Layer). If you select Use Current Settings, the entity parameters will match the
active parameters. This is the same as if you had created new entities using the geometry cre-
ation commands (i.e. Geometry Point, Geometry Curve-Line Project Points, etc.) If instead,
you choose Match Original Entities, each new entity will exactly match the parameters of
the entity that was copied to create it.
Repetitions:
By default this option is one. One repetition will create one copy of each selected entity. If
you want multiple copies, set this option to the number desired.
Update Every Repetition:
When this option is off, FEMAP will only ask you for one vector that will be used to posi-
tion the copies. In this mode, FEMAP will always offset the position of the current repetition
Geometry
from the position of the previous repetition, based on the direction and length of the vector
that you define.
If you select the Update Every Repetition option however, FEMAP will ask you for a new
vector before every repetition. This new vector will be used to offset from the original enti-
ties you selected, not from the previous repetition. You will want to check this option when-
ever you want to create multiple copies that do not lie along a single vector.
5 10 15 20
Original Points
4 9 14 19
3 8 13 18
2 7 12 17
1 6 11 16
Make 3 copies
along this vector
Copy
FEMAP will compute a direction vector for each
entity which runs from the center that you chose, to
the entity, as shown here.
Original
In a three dimensional case, these commands are
actually a spherical copy, since the copy vector is
computed from the “center of the sphere”.
For more information regarding the specifics of
Center
Radial Vectors Offset using the various generation options refer back to the
Geometry Copy command.
Geometry Scale Menu
Note:
This command is not available for Solids. It is used most often to copy arcs and other basic
geometry. You must also be careful when using this command with arcs. You should typi-
cally use the center of the arc as the center of the radial pattern, otherwise the arc formed by
the copy may be significantly different than you would expect.
*
you chose, to the entity, as shown here. Copy
0
In these commands, both the direction and (7
Scale=2.0 5
magnitude of these vectors is used. The
Original <
direction is used to determine the original
“copy” vector components. These compo-
Center
nents are multiplied by the scale factors to
calculate the final offsets from the center Scale=2.0
Note:
If you use a scale factor of 1.0, the resulting copy will be located at the same location as the
original in that coordinate direction. Scale Factors of (1.0, 1.0, 1.0) will result in a com-
pletely coincident copy of the originals.
Geometry
to be reflected.
16 15 14 4 5 6
Then FEMAP will
display the Gener- 13 12 11 1 2 3
not choose multiple repetitions. In addition, you can specify a Trap Width. FEMAP will not
make a copy of any selected node if it is closer to the reflection plane than the trap width that
you specify. If you set the trap width to zero, all of the nodes that you select will be reflected.
This option is used most often when reflecting elements, and will usually be zero when
reflecting geometry.
Next, FEMAP will display the standard plane selection dialog box, so you can define the
reflection plane. You can choose any plane that you want. It does not matter how your
selected entities are oriented with respect to the plane. They can be on one side, or they can
be on both sides of the plane. Just remember that the reflected entities will be located on the
opposite side of the plane from the original.
*
(3) Edit/Parameters
0
(4) Advanced Updates (7
5
These commands are all contained on the Modify menu. The Curve Operation commands <
are contained on the top section of the Modify Menu, while the Move Geometry commands
are contained in the middle section. The bottom section of the Modify menu contains the
Edit/Parameters commands (Modify Edit, Modify Color, Modify Layer), and the Advanced
Updates (top portion of the Modify Update Others menu). Each of these areas and their com-
mands are discussed more thoroughly in the sections below.
the coordinate location in the “Near” inputs. If you make a mistake, you can always set the
input back to the center location and pick new coordinates.
These curve operations cannot be performed on curves that define a surface or solid. The
available commands are (1) Modify, (2) Trim, (3) Extend, (4) Break, (4) Join, (5) Fillet, and
(6) Chamfer. Each of these commands are explained below.
Note:
These curve operations cannot be performed on curves that define a surface or a solid. You
must delete any entities that reference these curves before you can perform any of these
Curve Operations.
You must select the curve you want to trim and define a location (“Remove Near”) near the
portion of the curve that you want to eliminate. Assuming they intersect, the cutting curves
always divide the curve that you are trimming into at least two sections, and possibly more.
The portion of the curve closest to the “Remove Near” location you specify will be removed.
This could be one of the ends of the curve, or a segment on the interior. The location must be
specified relative to the coordinate system shown, but other than this, the coordinate system
has no impact on this command.
When you have selected the curve and location you want to trim, you can press OK or More.
Choose OK if this is the only curve that you want to trim with the selected cutting curves.
Press More if you want to trim more curves without selecting new cutting curves.
By far, the easiest way to use this command is to use your mouse to graphically select the
curve. While input is set to the ID field, point at the portion of the curve that you want to
remove and click the left mouse button. This will select both the ID and the “Remove Near”
location. If you double-click the mouse instead, it will also automatically press the OK but-
ton and trim the curve.
The extended trim option controls how the cutting curves are used. With extended trim on,
cutting curves extend past their endpoints toward “infinity”. Trimming intersections can be
Modify Extend...
found anywhere along these extended curves. If extended trim is off, the cutting curves stop
at their endpoints and intersections can only be found between the endpoints.
Examples
Curve to Trim
if Remove Near is if Remove Near is
at this end at this end
if Remove Near is
in the middle
Curve to Trim
Curve to Trim
(2
*
0
(7
5
<
Closest to
specified location
Extend to here
Extend to here
Examples
Original Curves
Break here
Original Circle
Starting location
of circle
Two arcs
Break here
*
location near the intersection where you want to join the curves. If you are joining lines, you
0
can specify any location that you want since there will only be a single intersection. For (7
other curve types, where multiple intersections are possible, the curves are joined at the 5
intersection that is closest to the location you specify. The coordinate system can be used for
<
convenience in specifying the location, but is not used otherwise.
The “Update 1” and “Update 2” options control whether the respective curves will be
extended (or shortened) to the join location. If you turn one of these off, that curve will not
be updated, but the other curve will still be extended to the join location. Do not turn both off
- nothing will be updated.
This command cannot work, if the curves, or the extensions of the curves past their end-
points, do not intersect. If the selected curves intersect within their original length, the Near
location is used to determine which portion of the curves will be kept after they are updated.
Just like Modify Fillet, the portion of the curve closest to the Near location is kept.
Geometry
Examples
Join these curves
These portions
have been removed
Near
These portions
Join these curves have been removed
Near
Just like the Modify Join command described above, only one dialog box is required for this
command. You must choose the two curves to fillet, and a location that is near the center of
the desired fillet. Since even at a line-to-line intersection there are four possible quadrants
for the fillet, this location is always important. It must lie in the quadrant where you want the
fillet arc. For other curve types, it also chooses between the many possible intersection loca-
tions. The examples below will show you how to specify this location.
If you are filleting intersecting curves, like lines, you can choose any fillet radius that you
want. If you are filleting nonintersecting curves, like two arcs or circles, the fillet radius
must be large enough to span the gap between the curves.
Modify Fillet...
As long as the “Trim Curve” options are on, the endpoints of the respective curve will be
adjusted to be coincident with the ends of the fillet arc. If you just want to add an arc, but not
trim the curves, turn one or more of these options off.
If you are having trouble creating the arc that you want, check the location and alignment of
your workplane. The coordinates that you pick are typically in the workplane and if it is
skewed relative to the curves that you are filleting, the point you choose may not be in the
quadrant that you expected. It is always best to do filleting in a view where the curves and
the workplane are normal to the screen.
Examples
Original Curves
Both curves trimmed
Fillet Arc
or extended to the
fillet locations.
(2
*
0
(7
5
<
Original Curves Original Curves
Fillet added
without trimming
original circles
Limitations
You may encounter the following limitations when you are attempting to fillet curves:
m If you are going to fillet an arc, circle or spline, the other curve should lie in the same
plane. If it does not, the fillet that is created will probably not be tangent to both curves,
or no fillet will be created. Fillet expects the geometry to be planar.
m If you attempt to fillet splines, the fillet arc will probably not be tangent to the spline.
Since splines cannot be precisely offset, the center location of the fillet arc is not calcu-
lated precisely. You will have to adjust the position manually or use another technique.
Geometry
Note:
These commands cannot be used to move entities of solids. You must use the commands
under the Geometry Solids menu to perform manipulations on solid entities. You can move
an entire solid, however.
*
points that you want to
Points projected onto 0
project. You then “extended” curve (7
select the curve for the 5
projection. <
Original Locations
You can choose any Projected Locations
curve, and all of the
selected points will be
projected onto it. Refer
to the description
above (Modify Project
Point projected onto
Menu) for more infor- “extended” arc
mation on how the pro-
jection will be done.
(2
*
0
y y y y
CSys 3 moves
4 3 These nodes defined 4 3 and so do nodes (7
5
z x z x z x z x
relative to CSys 3
<
If your model was built in a hierarchical manner, using multiple coordinate systems, this
command can quickly move large, related portions of your model. If you want to update the
location of a coordinate system, but leave the entities that reference it in their original posi-
tions, you can also use the Modify Update Coord Sys command.
Modify Move To Point...
... moves selected Points to a specified coordinate. Curves and any other geometry that refer-
ence the selected Points will also be moved. Refer to the description above (Modify Move
To Menu) for more information.
dialog box will be displayed. The vector you specify must contain both a direction and mag-
nitude. All of the selected entities, and the entities that reference them will be moved by that
vector. This essentially means that the location of the selected entity is updated by adding the
components of the vector.
Move By vector
*
fied vector. Refer to the Modify Rotate To Menu description above for more information.
0
(7
3.6.2.5 Modify Rotate By Menu 5
These commands are similar to the commands on the Modify Rotate To menu but you must <
specify a rotation angle instead of locations. You can also specify an optional Translation
Distance with these commands. By combining both rotation about, and translation along the
axis of rotation, you can move entities along a “screw-thread” or helix shaped path.
Simply select the
entities, chose a
vector, and define
the Rotation Angle
and the Translation
Distance.
The selected enti-
ties will be rotated
(following right- Axis of rotation
hand rule conven-
tions) around the
axis of rotation by the specified angle. Simultaneously, they will be translated, along the
Geometry
same vector, by the specified distance. The actual length of the vector is not used. If you
specify a zero rotation angle, these commands will simply translate along the vector - much
like the Modify Move By commands.
Modify Rotate By Coord Sys...
... just like the Modify Rotate To commands, will rotate all of the selected coordinate sys-
tems. Points or other coordinate systems that reference a selected system are also moved as a
rigid body. Their movement is based on the transformation of the selected coordinate sys-
tems. This can be very powerful if your model is constructed with multi-level coordinate
systems. Refer to the Modify Rotate By Menu description above for more information.
Modify Rotate By Point, Curve, Surface, Volume, Solid...
... rotates the selected points, and all geometry that references them, around the specified
vector. Refer to the Modify Rotate By Menu description above for more information.
When you rotate points that are connected to curves those curves will rotate also. If you only
select some of the points which are attached to a curve, the shape and size of the curve will
probably change. Be especially careful when rotating points that define arcs or circles. Small
movements can often lead to large changes in the curve definition.
Finally, FEMAP displays the Scale dialog box which requires input of a coordinate system
(2
*
as well as scale factors. You can specify three different scale factors, one for each coordinate
direction. For any coordinate direction that you do not want to scale, you must use a scale 0
factor of 1.0. Scale factors that are larger than 1.0 increase the physical size of your model.
(7
5
Scale factors smaller than 1.0 decrease its size. You can use a negative scale factor to reflect <
the entities about the base location. Similarly, a scale factor of 0.0, will move all entities to
the base coordinate, just like the Modify Move To commands.
Original Model After Scale Factor of 2.0 in Horizontal Direction Only
All scaling is done in the Coordinate System that you select. The coordinate directions are
along the axes of this system. If you select a non-rectangular system, you can scale your
model radially or tangentially.
Geometry
3.6.3 Edit/Parameters
The first three commands in the third section of the Modify Menu (Modify Edit, Modify
Color, and Modify Layer) enable you to change specific items in the geometry. Each of these
commands are described below.
selecting from the Color Palette, FEMAP will prompt you to choose a new layer number
from the list of available layers. All of the selected entities will be modified to the specified
layer.
Again, Modify Edit can be used to change layers, but this command is faster for multiple
entities.
*
3.6.4.3 Modify Update BSpline Knots... 0
(7
... is used to insert control points on the selected B-Splines. This command provides you 5
with a powerful tool to modify the curvature and smoothness of a particular curve by insert- <
ing control points at precise locations. You simply select the curve(s) to update and then
enter the location of the Knot (control point).
surface which the boundary had previously is removed. Therefore, you can use this com-
mand to either attach a boundary surface to a surface, or remove a connection.
entities which reference them.The following table lists the entities that can cause an entity to
be nondeletable:
Nondeletable Entities
Hint:
You can use this feature to great advantage in “cleaning up” a model. For example, if you
want to get rid of all of the unused Points, simply choose Delete Point, and select all Points.
This may seem dangerous, but in fact only those Points which are not referenced by any
other geometry or loads will be deleted. If you attempt to delete an entity, and FEMAP says
it is nondeletable, and you believe that there are no connections to it, perform a File Rebuild.
This will check all connections in the model, and verify whether there are connections to this
entity.
After you Delete
When you delete entities from a FEMAP model, the space that they occupied is simply
marked as empty and available for reuse. The model file does not decrease in size. Normally,
as long as you are going to create additional data, this is not a problem since the space will
(2
*
be reused. In some cases however, when you delete a lot of data you may want to immedi-
0
ately remove that empty space from your model and reduce the size of your model file. (7
5
The File Rebuild command can do just that. Choose the File Rebuild command, and press <
Yes to perform a full rebuild. Then press Yes again to allow FEMAP to compact the model.
If you had blocks of empty space, they will be removed and your model will decrease in
size. You should only use this option after you delete large blocks of data. FEMAP cannot
usually compact space if you have only deleted one or two scattered entities, and the savings
will not be worth the time it takes to perform the command.
Geometry
4Finite Element Modeling
The commands on this menu provide the basic entity creation commands for finite element
information in your model. The menu is partitioned into different sections based upon the type
of input. The first five sections will be discussed in this section, while the sixth section, Model
Output, will be discussed in the Postprocessing section of this manual. In addition, this chap-
ter will include commands for modifying and deleting these entities (copying commands are
described under the Meshing section of this manual).
The eight portions of this chapter are as follows:
1. Coordinate System Creation
2. Finite Element Entities (Nodes, Elements, Materials, Properties)
3. Loads and Constraints
4. Contact
5. Optimization
6. Functions
7. Modifying FEA Entities
8. Deleting FEA Entities
Coordinate systems are separated from the finite element information in this structure because
it is applicable for both geometry and finite element information.
Each of the Menu sections and their commands are explained more fully below.
(Global Cylindrical), and 2 (Global Spherical) are always defined. You can create any addi-
tional coordinate systems that you need for your model with this command.
When you choose this command you will see the Define Coordinate System dialog box
which allows you to define numerous parameters which determine the type of coordinate
system to be created.
ID, Title, Color/Palette and Layer
These options set parameters for the coordinate system to be created.
Ref CSys
The coordinate system you create will be defined in this coordinate system. This will also be
the default coordinate system for coordinate or vector definition - although you can change
that system when those dialog boxes are displayed. The reference coordinate system is uti-
lized to create a hierarchy of coordinate systems which can be used in later Modify Move
commands.
Type
Determines the type of coordinate system that will be created. Coordinate specification for
each of the types is shown in Section 5.3.
normal to the Workplane. Since this command uses the current Workplane, no additional
input is required.
Hint:
Always specify meaningful titles. They are shown along with the ID in the drop-down list
2
0
Permanent Constraints
Permanent Constraints, like other constraints are defined relative to the Output Coordinate
System. Unlike Constraints which can be defined in multiple sets, there is only one group of
Permanent Constraint per Node. The six degrees of freedom which can be constrained are
the X, Y and Z translations (TX, TY, TZ) and the X, Y and Z rotations (RX, RY, RZ). The
Permanent Constraints are combined with the Constraint sets that you request for analysis.
angle for all elements that are created until you '
change to a different orientation. (/
,1
This includes elements that are created using the *
various generation techniques. Refer to the Modify
Update Material Angle command for further infor-
mation. Proper specification of material angles is
extremely important if you are using nonisotropic
materials.
Finite Element Modeling
Formulation
If you are exporting to ABAQUS, LS-DYNA3D, or
MARC, you should also select the element formula-
tion. These programs have several different sub-
types, or formulations, for the same basic element.
When you select Formulation..., the Element For-
mulation dialog box will appear. You will be able to
set options for LS-DYNA3D, ABAQUS, and
MARC.
The inputs to the dialog box will be slightly different
based upon the current element type but all element
types will have separate inputs for DYNA and
ABAQUS/MARC. The element formulation for LS-
DYNA3D is exported on the *SECTION cards as part of the property definition, while most
options for ABAQUS/MARC change the name/number of the element.
Each element type has a different formulation which is stored as a global variable. Once the
formulation is set, all elements of that type created from that point on will have that formula-
tion. To change to a different formulation for future meshes, simply enter the element for-
mulation dialog box with the appropriate element type active, and select from the available
options.
Note:
If you do not set the formulation before meshing, or would like to change the formulation,
you can use the Modify Update Elements Formulation command to change the formulation
of a few elements, or an entire mesh. To determine which formulation is best for your analy-
sis, please consult your analysis program documentation. For instance, the hybrid option in
ABAQUS and MARC is typically used for large elastic (hyperelastic) materials. Please con-
sult the Element Reference chapter in the FEMAP Users Guide for more information on the
different available formulations. Each element has a section on their formulations.
Common Features of All Element Dialog Boxes
There are quite a few different dialog boxes used for creating the various element types in
FEMAP. The major difference between them is the changing number of nodes required to
define the various element types. Most other features are identical. Near the top of each dia-
log box you will notice a group of controls which are used to set various parameters for the
element to be created. The Type button, used to choose a new element type can be found
here also.
Model Element...
ments, you must choose either a triangular or quadrilateral shape. For Volume Elements,
'
your choices are a brick, wedge or tetrahedron. As you change the shape, you will see the (/
number of required nodes change also. Because of the automatic node creation feature ,1
described above, you can not define a triangle with the shape set to quadrilateral and then *
only entering 3 nodes. If you try this, FEMAP will ask you to create the fourth node.
Parabolic plate and solid elements allow you to pick nodes at the midsides of each element
edge in addition to the corner nodes. You can however skip the midside nodes by leaving
them as blank or 0. For this reason, the automatic node creation feature can only be used
with the corner nodes of parabolic elements, not with the midside nodes.
Finite Element Modeling
For the Bar, Beam and Curved Beam however, you will see a more complex dialog box.
This dialog also requires two nodes, but lets you define element offsets, orientation and
releases.
Offsets:
Offsets are used to move the end of the element a specified distance from the node. The End
A and End B command buttons will display the standard vector definition dialog boxes to let
you define the offset at each end of the element. Both the magnitude and direction of this
vector are used to define the offset. If the element has a constant offset at both ends, you can
simply define the offset at End A, then press End B=End A to copy the offset to End B. If
you have already defined offsets, and want to delete them, press No Offsets. When offsets
have been defined, the titles of the End A and End B buttons will change to End A... (On)
and End B... (On) to reflect the status. By default, after you define an element with offsets,
the next element will use the same offsets. You can turn them off with No Offsets.
Xe Ze
Plane 2 (XZ)
Offset B
Cz
2
Ye A
Plane 1 (XY)
Third Node, or Cy
Orientation Vector Offset A
1
Orientation:
Each, of these element types, requires that you orient the cross section of the element. The
element X axis is always along the length of the element (between the nodes). The orienta-
tion defines the Y and Z axes. FEMAP provides two methods of orientation. You can either
specify another node or a vector. If you specify an Orientation Node, the element XY plane
will be defined by the element X axis and the vector from the first element node to this ori-
entation (or third) node. If you specify a vector orientation, that vector, along with the ele-
ment X axis will define the XY plane. You can enter the orientation node directly into the
dialog box, or choose the Vector Orient command button to orient using a vector. The stan-
dard vector definition dialog boxes are used. If you attempt to specify both a vector and an
orientation node, only the orientation node will be recognized.
When you define a vector, FEMAP will update the button title to Vector Orient... (On), to
reflect the status. The default orientation is the same as the orientation that you specified on
the last element that you created.
Releases:
In some cases you do not want an element to be structurally connected to all six degrees of
freedom at each node. You can choose the Releases command button to specify the degrees
of freedom that you do not want to connect. By default, all degrees of freedom are con-
nected. The Element Releases dialog box lets you choose the translational (TX,TY,TZ) and
rotational (RX,RY,RZ) degrees of freedom to release at each end of the element. When you
specify releases, FEMAP changes the button title to Releases... (123456/123456), or some
variation of those numbers. The numbers one through six correspond to the six elemental
degrees of freedom (TX, TY, . . ., RZ). The numbers before the slash represent the releases
on the first end of the element. The numbers after the slash represent the second end. Just
like offsets and orientations, FEMAP remembers the releases that you define and uses them
as the defaults for your next element.
2
0
'
(/
As described previously, for either of these dialog boxes you must choose either a triangular ,1
or quadrilateral shape. As you choose the shape, the number of required nodes will also *
change. For parabolic plate elements, midside nodes can be specified, but they can also be
blank. This feature allows elimination of some elemental degrees of freedom and can be
used to join linear and parabolic elements, or for transitioning between varying mesh densi-
ties. Since midside nodes are not required and the automatic node creation feature only
works for required nodes, you must specify an existing node or it will be left blank.
Finite Element Modeling
Also, just like plane elements, you must specify a shape (Brick, Wedge, Tetra) and parabolic
midside nodes can be skipped.
In addition to the nodes, you must specify one or more degrees of freedom to be rigidly con-
nected between the independent and dependent nodes. You may specify different degrees of
freedom for each dependent node, as well as different factors. You simply select the Interpo-
lation degrees of freedom (and Factor if applicable) you want for a Node or Nodes, press the
Nodes... button, and select the appropriate Nodes. You may do this as often as required to
define the connections to the Dependent Nodes. Use the Delete button to remove an entry in
Other Elements
the list, or the Reset button to remove the entire list. If you need to connect dependent nodes
to different degrees of freedom on the Reference Node however, you must use multiple ele-
ments.
Note:
If you select the interpolation factor check box, you will be creating an interpolation ele-
ment, otherwise you are creating a rigid element. You can only change the status of this
option when no dependent nodes are selected.
Slide Lines
Slide Elements are used to define contact and sliding conditions between Nodes on surfaces.
The Master and Slave Nodes are selected by choosing the appropriate button. The Standard
Entity Selection box will appear to choose Nodes. Once Nodes have been chosen, the button
for the chosen Nodes will contain (ON). Otherwise, only the headings Master Nodes... and
Slave Nodes... appear. A Node may not be chosen as both a Master and a Slave.
You may select as many Master and Slave Nodes as you need, but the order that you select
them defines the order that they will be included into the element. Slide lines should have
their Master and Slave Nodes selected in reverse order compared to each other. If you select
them in the same order, you will be asked whether you want to automatically reverse the
order of the slave selection.
Contact
This element allows you to specify a Contact pair for analysis in ABAQUS, LS-DYNA3D,
or MARC and is defined using the CONTACT PAIR Element dialog box. You can also
specify this type of element directly with the Model-Contact-Contact Pair command
2
0
'
(/
You need to select both a Master and Slave Contact Segment. You can pick these graphi- ,1
cally, or use the drop-down box to select from a list of Contact Segments. You must specify *
both a Master and a Slave. If you want to specify self-contact (or Single Surface contact in
LS-DYNA3D), simply select the same Segment for both the Master and the Slave. You must
also specify a Contact Property, where you can input values such as static and dynamic fric-
tion, as well as other properties and limits on the contact.
Finite Element Modeling
In addition to selecting existing Contact Segments, you also have the option to Define a new
Segment or Edit an existing Segment for use in this Contact element. Define Segment sim-
ply accesses the Contact Segment/Surface option to create a new Segment, while the Edit
Segment access the Modify Edit Contact Segment/Surface command.
Note:
For both ABAQUS and DYNA, you will need to specify Contact elements to have contact
occur in your model. Contact Segments are not placed into contact in these programs unless
a Contact element is created. For MARC, you only specify a Contact element when you
want to limit contact to just certain segment pairs. If no Contact elements exist in the model,
all Contact Segments will be able to contact one another.
Copying Materials
If you need to create a material which is similar to another in your model, you do not have to
enter all of the material values manually. Pressing the Copy button, will display a list of all
existing materials. When you choose a material from the list, the material values will be cop-
ied from that material and displayed in the current material creation dialog box. You can then
modify those values in any way you want, or even change your mind and copy a different
material, before pressing OK to create the new material.
If you copy a material of one type into a material of a different type, FEMAP automatically
converts the material to the new type. The material constants are converted to a form which
represents the material which you copied. For example, copying an Isotropic material to a
3D Orthotropic material will result in stiffness values which are identical in all three direc-
tions, that is isotropic. If you copy the other direction, 3D Orthotropic to Isotropic, there is
no way to represent the orthotropic nature of the material and that information will be lost.
You should review carefully any materials which you copy between different types.
Working with Material Libraries
Material libraries allow you to create standard materials that you can use over and over again
in many different models. When you press Save, the current material is added to the material
library file. Pressing Load will display a list of the materials in the library and let you choose
one to be loaded into the material creation dialog box. Just like Copy, you can then modify
the values before pressing OK to create the material. Also, just like Copy, when you Load a
material of a different type it is automatically converted. The material ID, Color, Layer and
Coordinate System are not saved in the library, nor updated when a material is loaded from
the library. Refer to the Common Dialogs chapter for more information on Libraries.
2
0
'
(/
,1
*
Properties which are not required for your analysis may be left blank (or 0.) For example,
there is no need to specify any of the thermal properties if you do not plan to do a thermal
Finite Element Modeling
analysis. Typically, you can always leave one of the three stiffness parameters (E, G, nu)
blank also. FEMAP will maintain its value as zero, but most analysis programs recognize
this situation and automatically calculate the third parameter from an Isotropic formulation:
E
G = ---------------------------
2 × (1 + υ)
ν 21 – ν 31
1- –----------
----- - ----------- 0 0 0
E1 E 2 E 3
– ν 12 1 – ν 32
ε1 ----------- ------ ----------- 0 0 0 σ1
E1 E 2 E 3
ε2 σ2
– ν 13 – ν 23 1
ε3 ----------- ----------- ------
E1 E 2 E 3
0 0 0 σ3
=
γ12 1 σ 12
0 0 0 --------- 0 0
γ23 G 12 σ 23
γ13 --------- 0
1 σ 13
0 0 0 0
G 23
1
0 0 0 0 0 ---------
G 13
where the bold constants in the shaded area are the ones that you enter. During translation,
these terms are converted to the other ones, if required by the analysis program.
2D and 3D Anisotropic Materials...
The Limit Stress/Strain section allows you to specify limits for tension and compression as
well as a shear limit value. Either Stress or Strain Limits may be input (for 2-D only). These
values are typically used in conjunction with the Laminate property for failure calculations.
2
0
'
(/
,1
*
Finite Element Modeling
You can input both the Distortional and Volumetric Deformation Constants and the Strain
Energy Polynomial Order, or input stress/strain test data in the Experimental Data Functions
area to allow the analysis program to calculate these constants. These data functions must be
defined as vs. Stress type FEMAP Functions with Stress as the x value and Strain as the
dependent Y value.
Note:
Many solvers do not support hyperelastic materials and those that do have restrictions.
Please investigate the applicability/rules of Hyperelastic Materials in the analysis program
that they plan to utilize.
Note:
When entering the Hyperelastic material constants, Di, be careful. They are translated
directly for NASTRAN and ANSYS, but for ABAQUS the values written are 1 / Di.
Fluid Materials...
The properties on the fluid material type are similar to the heat transfer properties on other
material types, however additional fluid specific properties are also available.
2
0
'
(/
,1
*
option, you will see the above dialog box. The inputs to the dialog box will change based
upon the material type that you choose. The values are then stored with that material type in
the FEMAP database. The actual dialog box contents are read from a library file which con-
tains the appropriate information for each material, including type of input, storage area,
Finite Element Modeling
limits (if any), and dialog box text. This library file can be set in File Preferences Libraries.
A default library file with the supported materials is shipped with FEMAP.
Input can include real numbers, integers, and functions. They may also have input limits
associated with them. Function values are designated by the 0..None value when first enter-
ing a new material. You will need to input an existing function ID for these fields (or leave it
at None). Simply Press Ctrl+F to see a list of available functions when in the field.
This material type is most often used to define LS-DYNA3D materials instead of using the
Isotropic, Orthotropic, and Anisotropic defaults, but FEMAP also supports additional
ABAQUS and MARC materials. The default library file shipped with FEMAP contains
these material types. If you are only using ABAQUS or MARC, you can edit the library file
to remove other materials for easy reference, but do not to modify any numbers of materials
you want to use. You can modify the text in quotes, but all other data must remain the same.
You can also create your own materials by adding to the current list. FEMAP will store the
information in the appropriate data fields. For information on how to create your own mate-
rials, please refer to the MS Word file, neutral.doc, installed with the FEMAP executable.
Creating materials in this manner, however, is only useful for programs that access FEMAP
through a neutral file since our dedicated translators will not recognize them.
Next and Prev
FEMAP supports over 200 inputs on the Material card, but only 24 at a time can be dis-
played in the dialog box. When you press Next or Prev, the dialog box will scroll to show the
other entities that can be input for the specific material model
Hint:
All functions that you select for a material must be of the same type. For example, you can
not choose a Time function for one value and a Temperature function for another.
Nonlinear Materials
H = ET ⁄ ( 1 – ET ⁄ E )
If you have already defined Young’s Modulus (E), you may hit the Compute from Tangent
Modulus. By selecting this feature, you can simply input the tangential modulus, ET, and
FEMAP will use E to calculate the Plasticity Modulus, H.
The Yield Criterion option contains information on the yield types to be used. This box is
only relevant for Elasto-Plastic and Plastic Nonlinearity Types. Four Yield Criterion are
available (von Mises, Tresca, Mohr-Coulomb, and Drucker-Prager). von Mises and Tresca
require input of the Initial Yield Stress, while Mohr-Coulomb and Drucker-Prager require
input of 2*Cohesion and Angle of Internal Friction.
Nonlinear Materials - Extended Material Model
2
0
The Extended Material Model enables you to define further information for the Nonlinear '
(/
Material Model. This is currently only available for the von Mises and Drucker-Prager Yield ,1
Criterion. When you select the Extended Material Model, and Drucker-Prager is specified, *
the following dialog box will appear.
Finite Element Modeling
Note:
Support of the Extended Material Model by analysis programs is limited. You should verify
that both the FEMAP translator and the code itself supports the Extended Material Model
Resulting Stress -
Function Dependence Yield Function
Strain Curve(s)
vs. Stress Not Used Single Curve
Function vs. Temperature vs. Temp Temperature Dependent
Function vs. Strain Rate vs. Strain Rate Strain Rate Dependent
1. vs. Stress
Function vs. Strain Rate vs. Strain Rate Strain Rate and Tempera-
2. Function vs. Temperature TempFunction vs. ture Dependent
Strain Rate
Nonlinear Materials
c b d
Creep Law Class 2 : ε (σ, t) = aσ t
The appropriate law and coefficients are defined by their equations in the dialog box. All
inappropriate information will be grayed.
The second Creep Formulation is Tabular Model which requires only function inputs under
the Tabular Creep Law section. You must define FEMAP Function Types vs. Stress for the
three coefficients Kp, Cp (primary creep) and Cs (secondary creep) of the uniaxial rheologi-
2
0
cal model.
'
(/
,1
Note: *
Similar to Hyperelastic Materials, support of Nonlinear and Creep Material Properties by
analysis programs is limited. You should verify that both the FEMAP translator for your
analysis code and the code itself supports Creep Material Properties.
Finite Element Modeling
All of the fields are function dependent. You should specify the constant value in the field to
the left, which is applied as a multiplier to any function you select from the lists. If you do
not select a function, the values are simply constants. The “Front Side” and “Reverse Side”
for InfraRed and Solar properties refer to planar elements, where the “Front” is the face in
the direction of the element normal.
both the property and the element must be the same type. The only exception is that there is
no distinction between linear and parabolic properties. In fact both linear and parabolic ele-
ments can reference the same property.
Common Features of All Property Dialog Boxes
There are many different dialog boxes used for creating the various property types since dif-
ferent values are required for nearly every element type. Near the top of each dialog box
however, you will notice a group of controls which are used to set various parameters for the
property to be created. The Type button, used to choose a new property type can be found
here also. This button will display the same dialog box as described in the Create Element
command.
ID, Color/Palette and Layer:
These options set parameters for the property to be created. Every time you create a property,
the default ID will be automatically incremented.
Title:
This option allows you to provide a title of up to 25 characters for the property. You should
always specify descriptive titles because they will appear in the drop-down selection lists
and will help you identify the property.
Material:
This drop-down list allows you to choose the material to be referenced by the property. A
few property types (Mass, Stiffness Matrix...) do not require a material, but most do. For
your reference, all materials which are defined in your model will be shown in the list. You
can choose any type of material, but you should review the Translator Reference Section
which describes how the various material types translate to your analysis program.
In general, for plane element/property types you should pick either an Isotropic, Orthotropic
2D, or Anisotropic 2D material. Similarly Isotropic, Orthotropic 3D or Anisotropic 3D
materials should be used with solid elements. Some analysis programs however, support 3D
Orthotropic materials for plate elements to add transverse properties. You can make your
choice by typing an ID, choosing from the list, or by graphically selecting an existing ele-
ment which references the material that you want. If you do not specify a material (leave the
option blank or 0), when you press OK, you will be given a chance to automatically create a
new material. This is the same as using the Model Material command, except that the prop-
erty creation dialog box is still visible and the resulting material ID will automatically be
entered into the list.
2
0
'
Copying Properties (/
If you need to create a property which is similar to another in your model, you do not have to ,1
enter all of the property values manually. Pressing the Copy button, will display a list of all
*
existing properties. When you choose a property from the list, the property values will be
copied from that material and displayed in the current property creation dialog box. You can
then modify any of these values, or even change your mind and copy a different property,
before pressing OK to create the new property.
Finite Element Modeling
Copying is only useful when you copy properties of the same or similar type. When you
copy properties of the same type, all values are directly transferred to the new property. If
you copy a property of one type into a property of a different type, FEMAP converts the
property to the new type, but many of the property constants may be meaningless. If the
property types are similar, like a Bar and Beam, the similar properties will be copied. If you
attempt to copy a Plate property to a Beam, or vice versa, you will get meaningless con-
stants. You should review carefully any properties which you copy between different types.
Working with Property Libraries
Property libraries allow you to create standard properties that you can use over and over
again in many different models. When you press Save, the current property is added to the
property library file. Pressing Load will display a list of the properties in the library and let
you choose one to be loaded into the property creation dialog box. Just like Copy, you can
then modify the values before pressing OK to create the property. Also, just like Copy, when
you Load a property of a different type it is automatically converted. The property ID, Color,
Layer and Material are not saved in the library, nor updated when a property is loaded from
the library. Refer to the Common Dialogs chapter for more information on Libraries.
C × Mθ
τ = ------------------
J
where,
τ is the torsional stress
C is the coefficient of torsional stress,
J is the torsional stiffness, and
Mθ is the torsional moment.
In addition to the cross sectional area, numerous inertia properties must also be defined for
the Bar element. These properties are identical to those required for Beam Properties except
that Beam elements contain additional inputs. Please see the Beam Element Properties sec-
tion below for more information.
Beam Element Properties
Beam properties are identical to Bar Properties except that you can specify different proper-
ties at each end of the Beam, and you can define a Neutral Axis Offset from the Shear Cen-
ter. You must turn on the Tapered Beam option if you want to enter different properties at
the second end of the Beam. If this option is off, the properties at the second end will be
equal to the first end.
Care must be taken in properly specifying these properties with respect to the element axes.
For FEMAP, I1 is the moment of inertia about the elemental Z axis, which will resist bend-
ing in the outer fiber in the elemental Y direction. Some people look at this as the moment of
inertia in Plane 1, the plane formed by the elemental X and Y axes. Refer to Chapter 6 of the
FEMAP Users Guide for more information on the element directions. The following picture
will give some examples of cross sections, their orientations and relative inertias.
Vectors show the elemental
Y axis, which is the
2
0
orientation direction.
'
(/
,1
*
You can specify up to four Stress Recovery locations in the plane of the element cross sec-
tion. If you just specify the first location, and leave the remaining ones blank or zero,
FEMAP will automatically assign the remaining three locations with positive and negative
combinations of the location that you specified. This feature automates stress recovery for
the four corners of a rectangular cross section.
The Neutral Axis Offsets should be specified in the local Beam Coordinate system, based
upon the Orientation Node or Vector for the particular elements. This Offset is only used to
Offset the Neutral Axis from the Shear Center. The Offset of the Shear Center (and Neutral
Axis) from the vector between the two Nodes defining the Beam is input on the Beam Ele-
ment command, not the Beam Property command.
Line Element Properties
2
0
'
(/
,1
*
An arbitrary shape requires creating a surface before entering Model Property, and then
selecting General Section, pushing the Surface button, and selecting the surface. Whether
Finite Element Modeling
you select a common or arbitrary shape, you can have FEMAP draw the cross section by hit-
ting Draw. An error in the input will prevent drawing of the cross section. This dialog box
can also be used to define the Stress Recovery locations and orientation vector direction.
Note:
The offset stored on the element record calculated from the Reference Point moves both the
Neutral Axis and Shear Center from the line joining the two nodes of the beam. The offset
stored on the property record and calculated when Compute Shear Center offset is checked
offsets the Neutral Axis from the Shear Center.
The Attributes Along Curve command also has the capability to place the Reference Point at
a distance from the line joining the two nodes of the beam by setting y and z values. Please
see the Mesh-Mesh Control-Attributes Along Curve command section near the beginning of
Chapter 5 for more information.
Orientation Direction
This section simply allows you to specify the direction of the orientation vector. This is very
important since an inappropriate direction of the vector with respect to the beam mesh will
result in erroneous results. The Cross Section Definition dialog box provides a visual repre-
sentation of the required direction of the orientation vector for the beams.
Change Shape
This option is only available when editing a cross section for which properties have already
been calculated. This option must be turned On before any properties can be changed. Once
this option is selected, FEMAP will use the cross section generator to calculate new proper-
ties when exiting this dialog box via the OK button. If you simply want to edit stress recov-
ery locations or orientation, FEMAP will use stored values to calculate any change in
properties instead of creating an entire new set. This can save some time when making these
simple changes.
Compute Shear Center Offset, Compute Warping Constant
These options are only available for Beam Properties. They are not available for Bar or
Curved Beam properties since they are not supported by most analysis codes for these types
of elements.
If Compute Shear Center Offset is On, FEMAP will use its cross section generator to com-
pute the offset of the neutral axis from the shear center and store the result on the property
record. This is On by default since this offset can be important with certain cross sections
and such programs as NASTRAN, ABAQUS, and ANSYS provide support for these offsets.
2
0
If Compute Warping Constant is On, FEMAP will calculate the warping constant for the
'
cross section. This is Off by default since warping is often not important in beam analysis (/
and there is limited support among the analysis programs for warping. ,1
*
Link Element Properties
Link element properties consist of just the stiffness values, in all six degrees of freedom, at
each end of the element. The Link Element is rigid between the ends.
Curved Beam Element Properties
The Curved Beam Element properties are just like those for the Bar element (see previous
paragraphs), and similar to the Beam Property (except neutral axis offsets from the shear
Finite Element Modeling
center and warping are not supported) except that you must also specify a bend radius. All
elements which reference this property will use this constant radius.
Spring Element Properties
The FEMAP spring element is a combined linear spring and damper, which connects either
translational (Axial) or rotational (Torsional) degrees of freedom. You can specify both stiff-
ness and damping values for the same elements, however, some analysis programs do not
support the damping values.
DOF Spring Element Properties
Unlike the Spring Element which acts along the line between the elemental endpoints, the
DOF Spring connects two nodal degrees of freedom - independent of their orientation rela-
tive to each other. You choose the degrees of freedom via the buttons at the left of the dialog
box. Like the Spring however, you can specify both stiffness and damping.
Gap Element Properties
For gap elements you can specify an initial gap distance, tension, compression and trans-
verse stiffness and friction constants. You should carefully review which of these options are
supported by your analysis program before using gap elements.
For zero length gaps (coincident node gaps), you can specify a coordinate system for orien-
tation. Additional NASTRAN Options include limits on Penetration, and Adjustment, as
well as an Adaptive option.
For ABAQUS, Gap properties are also used to define properties of interface elements, and
you can specify the Interface normal and width/area.
Plane Element Properties
These property types are all variations of plate element properties. They all require the thick-
ness property, but the Plate type allows you to vary the thickness at each element corner. Be
careful though, these corner thicknesses will be applied to each element that references this
property. The stress recovery locations are measured from the neutral axis of the plate
toward the top fiber. These are not offsets, they are simply the location where stresses are
recovered.
NASTRAN Options
The Bending Stiffness (12I/T**3) and Transverse Shear Thickness/Element Thickness (Ts/
T) properties are used by NASTRAN to simulate non-isotropic or sandwich material behav-
ior. In addition to these options, FEMAP now supports choosing different materials for the
2
0
Bending, Transverse Shear and Membrane-Bending Coupling behavior. By default, the plate
'
will use the material that you select at the top of the dialog box, however you can disable any (/
of these properties, or select a different material simply by choosing the options in the lists. ,1
*
Finite Element Modeling
Properties of this type are different than those for any other type of element. In this case, the
normal material reference (at the top of the dialog box), is not used. It is provided just for
your convenience. Rather, you must specify a material ID, thickness and orientation angle
for each layer or ply in your laminate. Leaving the material ID blank or zero eliminates that
layer, however, if you specify a nonzero thickness or nonzero angle, FEMAP will ask
whether you want to create a material rather than eliminate the layer. The material ID for any
ply can be specified by graphically selected an existing element referencing the desired
material ID.
The layers are specified in order from the “bottom” or -Z face of the element. The angles are
specified relative to the material axes which were defined for the element. If you did not
specify a material orientation angle, these angles are measured from the first side of the ele-
ment (the edge from the first to the second node). They are measured from the rotated mate-
rial axes otherwise.
Many programs support the failure theories listed. You must specify the Bond Shear allow-
able, along with strength allowables on the materials if you want to use the failure theory
calculations.
In general, you must list all plys in your laminate. If you are using NASTRAN, and your
laminate is symmetric, you can set the Symmetric Layers option and only enter one half of
the layers.
Volume Element Properties
Note:
This formulation does not take into account any geometric transformations required to con-
nect non-coincident nodes, so care should be taken when using this element type.
Finite Element Modeling
This dialog box is separated into Friction Values, which are pertinent for all programs, and
specific program input for ABAQUS, LS-DYNA3D, ANSYS, and MARC. The most com-
monly used options are contained on this dialog box, while more advanced, solver specific
options are available by pushing the button corresponding to your solver.
LS-DYNA3D Contact Properties
The most important option is the Type of contact you want to define. You can select many
different types of contact including Automatic, Eroding, Constraint, Tied, etc. Simply select
the appropriate option in the dialog box. If you select an option that requires additional infor-
mation beyond the standard inputs, you must push the DYNA... option to input this informa-
tion. If not, errors may result, or at minimum your analysis will run with all defaults, which
may or may not be appropriate.
The main dialog box also contains options to choose ONE_WAY contact for those types of
contact that support this (default is two-way contact between surfaces). An Offset for TIED
contact types can be toggled on and off, as well as a toggle to use a Penetration formulation,
which can also be based on the shortest diagonal.
Other Element Properties
DYNA...
... allows you to specify additional contact parameters for LS-DYNA3D. When you select
this option you will see the following dialog box
The left side of the dialog box contains information which is pertinent for all contact types.
They include Scale Factors, Thickness Overrides, Time Activation, and Output information.
If no values are input or set, the defaults will be used. The right side of the dialog box con-
tains information specific to certain contact types. If you have selected one of these types
(Rigid, Tiebreak, or Eroding), you will want to select the appropriate information. Please
refer to your LS-DYNA3D User’s Manual for more information for each of these options.
ABAQUS Contact Properties
The ABAQUS specific section allows you to specify parameters found on the *CONTACT
PAIR option, as well as the Thickness/Area for input for 1or 2-D contact.
Typically, the most important input in this section is the Criti-
cal Penetration (HCRIT in ABAQUS). This value defines the
2
0
ABAQUS...
... allows you to specify additional contact parame-
ters. Most of these parameters are related to friction
and are included on the *FRICTION card in
ABAQUS. They include Friction Type, Friction
Value (value for the type chosen, not the friction
coefficient), and the equivalent Shear Stress Limit.
The remaining option, Max Slide Distance, how-
ever, is input on the *CONTACT PAIR option and
limits-finite sliding in 3-D deformable contact.
ANSYS Contact Properties
The ANSYS specific section allows you to specify the real
constants on the TARGE169 (2-D), TARGE170 (3-D),
CONTA171 (2-D), CONTA172 (2-D with midside nodes),
CONTA173 (3-D), and CONTA174 (3-D with midside
nodes). Contact Surface Elements are associated with Tar-
get Segment Elements through a shared set of real con-
stants and ANSYS only looks for contact between surfaces
with the same real constant set. Only contact elements and
target elements of the same dimension (2-D or 3-D) can be
in contact with each other. For complete definitions of
these real constants please see the ANSYS Element Reference Guide as well as the ANSYS
Structural Analysis Guide.
ANSYS...
... allows you to specify additional contact
parameters. All of these parameters corre-
spond to KEYOPT entries on the ANSYS
contact and target elements (see above para-
graph). These are more advanced options
used to create contact models which require
additional parameters. The check boxes in
the top of the box allow the user to toggle
between two options for KEYOPTs (2), (4),
(5), (8), and (11). The pull down boxes in the
lower half of the dialog box correspond to
KEYOPTs (7), (9), and (12) which offer
additional options which can be chosen to create a more realistic contact model. Again,
please review the ANSYS Element Reference Guide as well as the ANSYS Structural Anal-
ysis Guide before beginning any type of nonlinear contact analysis.
Other Element Properties
2
0
'
(/
,1
*
Finite Element Modeling
Enter Set ID to
activate here
Click here to
or, choose an
deactivate all
existing set
sets.
from this list
Acceleration
These body loads represent constant translational and/or rotational acceleration. Input must
always be in the global directions. Translational accelerations are often used to represent
gravity loads. Watch the units however, these are not specified in “g’s”.
Velocity
This type of body load represents a constant speed rotation and the resulting loads which are
caused by centripetal acceleration.
Origin
This specifies the location of the center of rotation for the rotational body loads (rotational
velocity and rotational acceleration).
Thermal
The default temperature is the temperature of all nodes/elements which are not given a spe-
cific temperature in this Load Set by Nodal or Elemental Temperature loads. This option can
be used to quickly assign a temperature for the entire model.
Creating Nodal Loads is a two step process. First, you must select the nodes where the Load
'
will be applied. As always, this is done using the standard entity selection dialog box. After (/
you select the nodes, you will see another dialog box which defines the load. ,1
*
Finite Element Modeling
Note:
Since these loads are created on the Nodes themselves, the actual method of computing the
direction is not stored. FEMAP calculates the direction from the method, and then stores the
result in component form. This enables you to modify or remove any geometry that was cre-
ated to specify the direction without changing the load direction. If you attempt to edit or list
the load, the values listed will be in component form. Only loads attached directly to geome-
try store any information regarding the direction method.
Model Load Nodal
Hint:
When choosing the Along Curve or Normal to Surface options, be careful that the Nodes fall
within the length of the Curve or the Area bounded by the Surface. If the Curve is anything
but a line, FEMAP will attempt to project the position of the Nodes onto the curve to deter-
mine the direction of the curve at that location. A similar projection is also required for the
Normal to Surface method. If the projection falls well outside the Curve or Surface actual
bounds, unexpected values for the direction may result.
Coordinate System:
This option is only available if you select the Components method for Direction for non-
thermal load types. The components are defined relative to the selected coordinate system. If
you select a cylindrical or spherical system, the true direction of the loads also depends on
the location of the node where it is applied. For example, a positive radial force goes in a dif-
ferent direction if the node is at 0 degrees, than if it is at 180 degrees.
Choosing a Load Creation Method
There are two methods available to create loads on the nodes that you selected. The simplest,
and default method, is to assign a Constant load value to each of the nodes. As an alternative,
you can define an equation which defines the value at each node. If you choose this method,
you must select a Variable (default is i - must select Advanced under Variable to change it)
which will be updated to contain the ID of the node where loads are being defined. Then,
instead of entering a numeric value for the loads, enter an equation in Value which uses the
variable. You will find the XND(), YND() and ZND() functions very useful in defining loads
in terms of the locations of the nodes that you are loading.
If instead of entering an equation, you enter a numeric value, that value will be assigned to
every node, just as if you had specified a constant. Conversely, if you enter an equation, but
also set Constant, the equation will be evaluated prior to load definition and the constant
result will be assigned to all selected nodes.
For example, if you choose to enter an equation in Value such as:
10*(xnd(!i)-xnd(1))+50
each node will receive a load which is equal to fifty, plus ten times the length in the X direc-
tion between that node and node 1.
2
0
'
(/
Note: ,1
*
The equation is evaluated at each Node, and the actual calculated value of the load is stored
as a Nodal Load. The equation, itself is not stored. Equations are only stored for Geometric
Loads.
Time, Temperature or Frequency Dependent Loads
If the loads that you are creating are constant, simply set this option to 0.None. However, if
your loads vary with either time, temperature or frequency, you can choose the appropriate
Finite Element Modeling
function to define that dependence. Prior to creating your loads, you must use the Model
Function command to create the functions, so that they can be selected from the list. The Y
values of the function are used to multiply the constant values that you specify in this dialog
box. Do not confuse frequency dependence of the load value (specified here) with frequency
dependence of the phase (specified at the bottom of the dialog box for frequency analyses).
Creating Component Loads (Forces, Moments, Displace., etc.)
For component of non-thermal loads (Forces, Moments, Displacements, Enforced Displace-
ments, Velocities, Rotational Velocities, Accelerations, and Rotational Accelerations) you
must activate the various load components, using the option boxes, prior to setting the load
value. There is no load applied to any component which is not activated. For Forces,
Moments, Velocities, Rotational Velocities, Accelerations, and Rotational Accelerations,
this is equivalent to activating the component and then applying a zero (or blank) load. For
Displacements and Enforced Rotations, however, these two alternatives are not equivalent.
With the component deactivated, that component is free to move (displace) freely. Activat-
ing the component and then specifying a zero displacement (or a blank), prevents all move-
ment of that component. This is similar to a constraint.
As just described, FEMAP will allow you to activate load components which have a zero (or
blank) load value. You may not however, have all load values equal to zero. If you want to
use Displacement loads as pseudo-constraints, you must specify at least one small nonzero
value, like 1E-10 or smaller. You should never have to create a zero force or acceleration,
since it will have no effect.
Phase:
Non-thermal loads also allow you to specify a Phase. This value is only used for Frequency
Analyses. In addition, for frequency response analyses, you can make the phase frequency
dependent by selecting an additional function.
Note:
This command can be a convenient method of specifying nodal loads on complex models,
especially on solid models where you can use the “Adjacent Faces” (See Model Load Ele-
mental) approach. This is an alternative to creating geometric loads and can be very useful to
create loads on a portion of a surface.
Model Load Elemental...
Note:
Not all analysis programs support pressures at the corners of elements. If you translate to a
program that does not support corner pressures, FEMAP will automatically average the cor-
ner pressures and output a centroidal value.
Specifying Face IDs
For pressures, when you press OK, you will be presented with the following dialog box to
choose the face or faces where the pressure will be applied:
This provides four ways to
select the faces. The most
obvious is to simply choose
Face ID and select the ID
of a face. Face numbers for
plane and solid elements
are defined in the Element
Reference Section in the
FEMP Users Guide. Alternatively, you can simply choose the face graphically by moving
the cursor near the center of the face and clicking the left mouse button. The selected face
will be highlighted. If you chose an unexpected face, simply move the mouse and click again
until you get the face you want.
While this method is easy to understand, it has the disadvantage of applying the loads to the
same face number on all selected elements. If the elements where you need to apply loads
are oriented randomly, this method is not very effective. You will either need to use one of
the other methods, or in some cases you can reorient the elements (refer to the Modify
Update Reverse command).
Choosing Faces Near a Surface
If you have used geometry to define your elements, or if you just have surfaces in your
model, you can apply loads to element faces which are close to a selected surface. When you
choose Near Surface, you must also choose a surface and specify a tolerance. Loads will be
applied to the faces of the selected elements that are closer than your specified tolerance
from the surface. This method can only be used to apply pressure to Face 1 of planar ele-
ments (not to the edges).
Model Load Elemental...
Selected Face
Loads on
Adjacent Faces
In the picture above, loads could have been applied to all exterior faces, including those
inside the hole, by choosing a tolerance greater than 90 degrees. Loads could have been
applied just in the hole by selecting a face inside the hole and specifying a fairly low toler-
ance.
Creating Elemental Temperatures
For temperature loads, you can only specify a single temperature value. This value is
assigned to all selected elements. If you need to represent temperatures which vary within an
element, you must use nodal temperature loads. No face specification is required for temper-
atures, they apply to the entire element.
Creating Loads for Heat Transfer
2
0
All of the loads for Heat Transfer analysis are created similarly to Pressure and Temperature
'
loads, the only difference is the parameters that need to be specified. (/
,1
Heat Generation *
For Heat Generation, only a single constant is required - the generation rate.
Heat Flux
Elemental Heat Flux is applied normal to an element face. You must specify the rate of flux,
and, just like pressure, apply the flux to a specific face.
Finite Element Modeling
Alternatively, you can define a directional Heat Flux. In this case, you must also specify a
surface absorptivity and temperature for the selected face.
And, after pressing OK, you must specify a flux direction. The direction is defined either as
a constant by giving the components of a vector in the direction of the flux, or as a time vary-
ing vector, by choosing three functions which contain the components defined as a function
of time. In either case the components must be specified in Global Rectangular coordinates.
Finally, after defining the direction, you will choose the face(s) where the fluxes will be
applied. Refer to creating pressure loads earlier in this section for more information about
choosing faces.
Convection
Free convection loads require the convection coefficient and the film temperature, along
with the face where the convection is acting. As always, the face is chosen after you press
OK, in the standard fashion. Refer to Pressure loads for more information.
Forced convection loading is also supported, although only for a 1-D type analogy. In this
case you must specify the flow rate and diameter along with the temperature, so the proper
coefficients can be calculated. For this type of analysis, you will also have to specify numer-
ous fluid properties in the Create Body Loads command described earlier.
Special Case - Forced Convection Over a Plate or Surface
For MSC/NASTRAN, forced convection loads can also be used to model one or more flows
over a plate. This is a very specialized capability and requires a thorough understanding of
MSC/NASTRAN’s thermal capability before you attempt to perform this type of analysis.
To model this condition you must follow these steps:
1. Model the plate. You can use any general mesh, however a rectangular mapped mesh will
be much easier to understand, and will more accurately represent the flow.
2. Model “flow tubes”. Since MSC/NASTRAN only has forced convection along “line ele-
ments”, i.e. a 1-D case, you must define a series of tube elements that represent the flow
location and direction. These are typically placed at some location above/below the plate.
If you are going to have more than one discreet flow, place all tube elements from each
flow on a separate layer. Use the Create Layer command to create a layer, then choose that
layer when creating the elements, or use the Modify Layer command to change it later.
Unlike most general modeling techniques in FEMAP, tube elements are required for this
special capability. In most cases, where these tubes are simply a modeling convenience,
and do not represent a physical tube with thermal properties, you will not want them to be
written to your NASTRAN model. In that case, just define both the inner and outer diam-
eters of the tube property as 0.0 - this indicates that you want the tube to be skipped dur-
ing translation. If you do want the tube to be translated, just specify nonzero diameters.
If you need to use tube elements in your model that are not being used to represent flow
tubes, you MUST place them on a layer that is not used by any of the forced convections
that you will later apply to the plate elements. If you do not, FEMAP may create improper
links that do not represent the situation that you are attempting to represent.
Model Load Elemental...
3. Model the Mass Flow. The mass flow is modeled by applying forced convections to each
of the flow tube elements. For all of these loads you must check the “Disable Convection”
option. This will result in a load that simply models the mass/energy transfer down the
flow stream, and not the convection effects. You must specify a flow diameter on these
loads. Even though it is not required for the mass transfer equations, it is necessary to
properly connect the convections from the plate. Typically you will want to specify a
value that is near (or at least the same order of magnitude) the flow diameter for the plate
convections.
4. Model the Convection on the Plate. Next, apply forced convections to the plate elements
where the flow is occurring. All forced convections on plate elements are placed on Face
1, flowing from the middle of the first edge of the plate to the middle of the third edge (to
the opposite node for triangular plates). If you created your elements in a manner where
this does not really represent the direction of your flow you should use the Modify Update
Reverse command, and the “Align First Edge to Vector” option to realign your plates so
that the flow is properly represented. This is the step that can become very difficult if you
have an arbitrary (non-rectangular or non-mapped) mesh. It is very important that as they
are displayed, all of these convections on the plate point along the general flow direction.
On all of these plate convections you should check the “Disable Advection” option. This
will effectively eliminate the mass transfer, and indicate that you are trying to associate
this load with a flow tube. You must also specify the flow diameter (hydraulic diameter).
This diameter will be used in the calculation of the Reynolds number. In addition, when
you check this option you will see an additional option displayed that is titled “Area Fac-
tor”. If you do not specify anything here, FEMAP uses the plate areas to compute coeffi-
cients in the heat transfer equation. By specifying a value you can scale that computation
to allow for fins or any other area correction that you wish to apply.
If you are working with multiple discreet flows, once again you must use the FEMAP
layer capability to assign these convections to a flow number. Set the convection load
layer to the same ID as that of the associated flow tubes.
Links Created Flow Tube
by MSC/NASTRAN with Advection
Translator
2
0
'
(/
,1
*
Convection
on Plate
Finite Element Modeling
5. Specify additional Fluid/Heat Transfer Options. Go to the Create Load Body Load com-
mand and choose the Heat Transfer button. This will display a dialog box where you can
specify the fluid properties and other flow parameters. Currently only one fluid and set of
parameters can be specified.
6. Translate to MSC/NASTRAN. When you translate these loads to MSC/NASTRAN, the
translator creates Plot-Only elements to represent the CHBDY elements that are required,
and also create the links shown above. These links represent how each of the “convection
only” plates are linked to the “advection only” flow tubes. Also, during the translation
you will be asked to specify a factor that is used to disable the convection and advection.
Since MSC/NASTRAN really has no way to “disable” these portions of the problem, we
simulate this effect by scaling the appropriate components downward by the scale factor
that you specify. Make sure that you always specify a small number (<< 1), otherwise
advection and convection will not be properly disabled.
Radiation
Two forms of radiation can be defined: radiation to space, and enclosure radiation. For radi-
ation to space, you must specify the surface emissivity, absorptivity and temperature, as well
as a view factor from the surface (element face) to space.
For enclosure radiation only an emissivity is required. The absorptivity is assumed to be
equal to the emissivity, and the view factor will be automatically calculated by the analysis
program (currently only supported for MSC/NASTRAN). Optionally, you can speed up the
view factor calculations by limiting calculations to surfaces which can shade or can be
shaded by other surfaces.
Note:
Enclosure radiation problems also require a cavity/enclosure number - even if you are using
only a single cavity. Surfaces in each cavity are totally independent of other cavities. They
neither shade nor radiate to any surfaces other than the ones in their own cavity. To provide
maximum flexibility in viewing and verifying cavity definition, FEMAP uses the layer num-
ber that is defined with each radiation load (not the layer for the element), as the specifica-
tion of the cavity number. In this way, you can turn on/off as many cavities/layers as you
want to visually verify the loading that you have defined.
If you are working on a single enclosure problem, make sure that you set the same layer on
all of the radiation loads.
Negative Variable A
to Power – Scale × [ – X j(t) ] where X j(t) < 0
F i(t) =
0 where X j(t) ≥ 0
Relationship defines
the type of Nonlinear
Transient Loads to be
created. As shown in
the table, four types
are available. The
other options simply
define the arguments
to these equations. In
all cases, you must
specify a scale fac-
tor. The X(t) argu-
ments represent the
Displacement or
Velocity at Node/
DOF j (the first node) or k (the second). For Tabular Function loads, you must define and
select a Force vs. Displacement/Velocity function which will be used by the analysis pro-
gram to calculate the force. Since FEMAP does not currently contain a “vs. Force” function,
any function type can be used, but it should contain the appropriate force values. The nodal
degrees of freedom must be specified as 1 through 6. For the Positive and Negative Power
Relationships, Power is the exponent, A, of the equation shown.
2
0
'
4.3.3 Geometric Loads (/
As an alternative, and/or supplement to finite element loads, FEMAP allows you to create ,1
loads on geometry. Since analysis programs require loads directly on Nodes and Elements,
*
FEMAP will convert these loads to Nodal and Elemental upon translation. Defining loads by
geometry can greatly simplify load input, especially in complex solid models. It also pro-
vides a convenient method of load distribution, since a many times you will know the total
load on a surface. FEMAP will automatically distribute that load over the surface based
upon the area of the elements.
Finite Element Modeling
Geometric loads also offer the advantage of storing equations and methods of direction.
When you create a variable geometric load, FEMAP will store the equation and only evalu-
ate it upon translation, or when expansion to a Nodal or Elemental Load is requested.
The geometric load section contains four commands, based upon the type of load to create.
They are (1) On Point, (2) On Curve, (3) On Surface, and (4) Expand. The first three com-
mands enable you to create a load on the selected geometric entity, while the fourth com-
mand allows you to convert between FEA (Nodal/Elemental) and geometric (Point/Curve/
Surface) loads. Each of these commands are discussed in more detail below.
Load Types
There are 33 loads available for loads on Curves. Many of the
load types, such as Force, Force Per Length, and Force Per
Node are just different input methods for the same Nodal Load
type (Force). These different input methods enable FEMAP to
distribute loads along the curve.
The listing in the dialog box of the load type are separated into
4-Sections: (1) Structural Loads, (2) Temperature, (3) Heat
Transfer Loads, and (4) Fluid Loads. All structural loads except
Pressure are converted to Nodal Loads. Temperature is con-
verted to a Nodal Temperature while Elemental Temperature
obviously is an elemental load. The heat transfer loads include
loads which will be converted to Nodal loads (Heat Flux, Heat
Flux per Length, Heat Flux at Node, and Heat Genre) or Ele-
mental Nodes (Element Heat Flux, Convection, Radiation, and
Element Heat Generation). There are 10 Fluid loads that are
scalar quantities and can only be accessed through the neutral
file for use in analysis.
Load Input Values
There are also three basic types of load input values: (1) Total, (2) Per Length, and (3) Per
Node. The “Total” loads include Force, Moment, and Heat Flux. Input is a total load that is
then automatically distributed along the Nodes attached to the curve. The distribution will be
based upon the total length associated with each Node. Total loads must be input as Con-
stant. They cannot be Variable.
Loads input as Per Length loads (Force Per Length. Moment Per Length, and Heat Flux Per
Length) are very similar to “Total” loads. The load is distributed identically to a “Total”
load, except the values are then multiplied by the length along the curve associated with each
Node. The sum of all these loads is simply the input value multiplied by the total length of
the curve. These types of loads must also be input as Constant.
All other loads are input on an “Per Node” basis. These include Force Per Node, Moment
Per Node, Heat Flux Per Node, and translational and rotational displacements, velocities,
and accelerations. These values are applied directly to the Node with no distribution.This
load type is most commonly used for Displacements, as well as variable loading conditions
for Forces. If you have a load which varies along the length of the curve, this type of load 2
0
'
input will allow you to describe an equation or function to simulate that loading condition. (/
Direction ,1
*
Structural loads (i.e. Force, Force/Length, etc.) which are converted to Nodal Loads upon
expansion require input of the direction. The direction is identified identically to the specifi-
cation of Nodal Load direction (see Model Load Nodal) with two small differences. The first
is that the Direction method is saved. FEMAP does not convert the loads into components
until you expand or translate. Therefore, if you list or modify these loads, you will see the
same direction method you originally specified. Secondly, if you choose the Along Curve
Finite Element Modeling
method, you cannot specify the curve. FEMAP will automatically use the curve(s) to which
the loads are applied.
Method
The Method allows you to
choose between a Constant
or Variable load. If constant
loading is required, simply
choose Constant and input
the values. If Variable load-
ing is required (not available
for “Total” and “per Length”
loads), you must select
Advanced, which allows you
to define the type of defini-
tion for your variable load:
(1) Equation, (2) Function,
or (3) Interpolation.
Note:
A variable load is only available for elemental loads and nodal loads that are “per Node”.
Nodal loads that are total (i.e. Force, Moment, etc.) and per Length (i.e. Force per Length,
etc.) must be constant.
Equation
Equation allows you to specify a variable loading in terms of the x, y, and z positions of the
Nodes or Elements. Each of these values may be used in the equation definition, preceded by
an !. For example
4.35*!x - 2*!y
would multiply the x coordinate of each Node (or element) and then subtract the product of 2
and the y coordinate. The x, y, and z coordinates are in the coordinate system defined in the
main load dialog box. FEMAP will store the equation, and evaluate it only upon translation
or expansion. The variable i is not used for loading on geometry, therefore all functions such
as XND, and XEL are not applicable and should not be used.
Note:
The node locations are used to evaluate the equation for all loads converted to Nodal Loads.
The position of the centroid of the elemental face attached to the loaded curve is used for all
elemental face loads while the centroid of the element is used for non-face loads such as Ele-
mental Temperature and Elemental Heat Generation. The only exception is FEMAP will use
the node locations to calculate pressure if the At Corner option for Pressures is selected.
Model Load on Curve...
Function
The second type, Function, allows you to define a function to describe the loading. This
function must be created before defining the load by using the Model Load Function com-
mand. Two types of functions are acceptable for variable loads on curves: (1) vs. Curve
Length, and (2) vs. Curve Parameterization. Simply create this type of function with the load
value as Y, and the X value as either the length along the curve, or the parameter value.
By creating a Function, you can model any irregular load pattern over the curve. FEMAP
will use the position of the Node, Element Face centroid, or Element centroid and linearly
interpolate a value at that position from the function. FEMAP does not perform any extrapo-
lation of these values. Therefore, if a load occurs over the entire length of the curve, you
should take care to define the values of the curve at the beginning and end points.
Interpolation
The third type, Interpolation, is really a shortcut version of Function. When you select Inter-
polation, the Locate 1 and Locate 2 areas become accessible. You can then select Locate for
1 and 2 and the standard coordinate definition dialog box will appear. You simply define the
two locations and then define the load values associated with them. FEMAP will interpolate
between these values to obtain loads on the Nodes or Elements attached to the Curve. Once
again, FEMAP will perform no extrapolation. This is a useful method for defining loads on a
segment of a curve.
FEA Attachment
All loads on curves must be eventually expanded to Nodal or Elemental loads when trans-
lated to a finite element analysis program. When FEMAP expands these loads, it creates
loads for nodes or elements that were originally generated from that curve during a meshing
procedure (or manually attached). This procedure is relatively simple for Nodal loads.
FEMAP determines which Nodes are attached to the curve and creates the loads on these
Nodes. The only item which may alter this calculation is if you have turned on Midside
Node Adjustment (please refer to the section below on Midside Node Adjustment).
For loads converted to Elemental loads, both 2-D and 3-D elements can be attached to the
Surface. IF FEMAP finds faces of 2-D and 3-D elements that are identical, FEMAP will
expand the load on the 2-D element, and issue a warning message. The only exception to this
procedure is if the 2-D elements are Plot Only Planes.
For an element to be attached to the surface, all Nodes on a face of an element must be
attached to that surface. If a parabolic element was created on a surface, but midside nodes
2
0
have been detached from that surface for some reason, the element is not considered to be on '
the curve. (/
,1
*
Note:
Loads are not expanded on Plot Only Planar elements since these elements are not translated
as structural elements. Loads cannot be applied to these elements.
Finite Element Modeling
The listing in the dialog box of the load type are separated
into 4-Sections: (1) Structural Loads, (2) Temperature, (3)
Heat Transfer Loads, and (4) Fluid loads. All structural
loads except Pressure are converted to Nodal Loads. Tem-
perature is converted to a Nodal temperature while Elemen-
tal Temperature obviously is an elemental load. The heat
transfer loads include both Nodal (Heat Flux, Heat Flux per
Length, Heat Flux at Node, and Heat Genre) and Elemental
Nodes (Element Heat Flux, Convection, Radiation, and Ele-
ment Heat Generation). There are 10 Fluid loads that are
scalar quantities and can only be accessed through the neu-
tral file for use in analysis.
Structural loads (i.e. Force, Force/Length, etc.) which are converted to Nodal Loads upon '
expansion require input of the direction. The direction is identified identically to the specifi- (/
cation of Nodal Load direction (see Model Load Nodal) with two differences. The first is ,1
that the Direction method is stored. FEMAP does not convert loads into components until *
you expand or translate. Therefore, if you list or modify these loads, the same direction
method is shown. (2) If you choose the Normal to Surface method, you cannot specify the
surface. FEMAP will automatically use the surface(s) to which the loads are applied.
Finite Element Modeling
Method
The Method allows you to choose
between a Constant load or a Variable
load. If a constant load is required, simply
choose Constant and input the values. If a
variable load is required (not available for
“Total” and “per Length” loads), you must
select Advanced and select the Equation
method. The Function and Interpolation methods are not available for loads on surfaces.
Note:
A variable load is only available for elemental loads and nodal loads that are “per Node”.
Nodal loads that are total (i.e. Force, Moment, etc.) and per Area (i.e. Force per Area, etc.)
must be constant.
Equation
Equation allows you to specify a variable loading in terms of the x, y, and z positions of the
Nodes or Elements. Each of these values may be used in the equation definition, preceded by
an !. For example
4.35*!x - 2*!y
would multiply the x coordinate of each Node (or element) and then subtract the product of 2
and the y coordinate. The x, y, and z coordinates are in the coordinate system defined in the
main load dialog box. FEMAP will store the equation, and evaluate it only upon translation
or expansion. The variable i is not used for loading on geometry, therefore all functions such
as XND, and XEL are not applicable and should not be used. FEMAP stores the equation
and only evaluates it when the load is expanded upon translation or when the Model Load
Expand Load is used.
Note:
The location of the Nodes are used to evaluate the equation for all loads converted to Nodal
Loads. The position of the centroid of the elemental face is attached to the loaded curve is
used for all elemental face loads. The position of the centroid of the element is used for non-
face loads such as Elemental Temperature and Elemental Heat Generation. The only excep-
tion to the above is FEMAP will use the position of the Nodes to calculate pressure loads if
you select the At Corner option for Pressures.
Midside Node Adjustment
Some loads such as Force/Area and Force distribute the loads on the Nodes over the entire
area. For many parabolic elements, you cannot simply distribute the force evenly and obtain
an even displacement result. You must apply a larger value to the Midside Nodes than the
Corner Nodes, and this value is in excess of 1/2 the value of the total load on the element.
Model Load Expand...
You can specify the factor you want on the midside nodes under File Preferences, Geometry.
There are two factors available for Midside Node Adjustment, Tri-Face and Quad-Face fac-
tors. These value represent the percentage of the load on each Midside Node. The values
default to 1/3. which means for Tri-Faces, no loads are applied to the corner nodes, and a -1/
12 factor is applied to Quad-Face corner nodes. These values are standard for many pro-
grams. If your results are inappropriate for your analysis program, please consult the docu-
mentation for your program. You can also remove the option to adjust for Midside Nodes by
clicking this option off.
ric loads. This option can be useful when a load is mostly constant (or easily described as an
'
equation) over a surface, except at a few Nodes (or Elements). You can permanently expand (/
the load, and then use the Modify Update Other Scale Load command to change individual ,1
loads. *
Combined Nodal Loads
When FEMAP expands multiple geometric loads, it will attempt to combine all similar
Nodal loads into one load for each DOF. Many analysis programs require only one load on a
DOF. With loads such as Forces and Moments, FEMAP will add the components. The only
exception is if the loads contain either different vs. Time/Temp/Freq Reference Functions,
Finite Element Modeling
different Phases, or different Freq Reference Functions for the Phase. In these cases, the
loads will remain separate and a warning message will be written.
For loads such as Displacement or Acceleration, FEMAP will not add values for the same
DOF. It will keep these values separate and provide a warning message that two different
values were found for the same DOF. You will need to modify the input to obtain the desired
values at the Nodes. The option to permanently convert to Nodal Loads could be used in this
to expand and then modify the Displacements on the Nodes.
Solution Type
The solution type determines the type of solution that will be performed for the particular
load set. Available options are Static, Creep, and Transient. Only appropriate control infor-
mation in the remainder of the window will be available based upon the type of solution you
choose.
Model Load Nonlinear Analysis...
Basic
These values provide the time and iteration control information for the Nonlinear Analysis
Steps. They control the Number of Increments and the Time Increment to be used, as well as
the Maximum Iterations for each step. No time increment is used for static analysis.
Stiffness Updates
This specifies the number of iterations to be performed before the Stiffness Matrix is
updated, as well as the Update Method. A total of five different update methods are avail-
able, but not all are appropriate for all each Solution Type. If an inappropriate Method is
selected, the Translator will provide an error message and automatically choose the default
method.
Output Control
Output Control information allows you to request or eliminate output at intermediate steps
(Static and Creep) or request Output Every Nth Step (Transient).
Convergence Tolerances
The type of Convergence Tolerances (Load, Displacement, and/or Work) as well as the toler-
ance values themselves are defined in these boxes.
Solution Strategy Overrides
This area provides you with the capability to further control the strategy that will be
employed to converge toward a solution.
Defaults
When you first choose this command, all values will be zero. By pushing this button, non-
zero default values will be entered for all properties. You can then modify these defaults as
appropriate.
Copy
Copy allows you to duplicate the Nonlinear Analysis information from any other Load Set in
the current model.
Advanced
This button enables you to
access additional nonlin-
ear analysis options as well
as damping inputs for
2
0
Nonlinear Transient analyses can be input here or under Create Load Dynamic Analysis.
Solution Method
The solution method chooses the type of Dynamics Solution to be performed. Four avail-
able options exist: (1) Direct Transient, (2) Modal Transient, (3) Direct Frequency, and (4)
Modal Frequency. The inappropriate boxes for each Solution Method will be grayed auto-
matically.
Equivalent Viscous Damping
This box provides damping information for the structure. The Overall Structural Damping
Coefficient is input for all four solution methods, while the Modal Damping Table is utilized
for only the two Modal Methods. The Modal Damping table requires a function to define
damping information as a function of frequency. Three types of FEMAP functions can be
chosen: (1) Viscous Damping vs. Frequency, (2) Critical Damping vs. Frequency, and (3)
Amplification vs. Frequency.
Equivalent Viscous Damping Conversion
Information for both System Damping and Element Damping is provided in this box. These
values are only input in Direct and Modal Transient Analysis. These values provide the con-
version from the frequency domain, in which damping is usually defined, into the time
domain. The Frequency for System Damping (W3 - Hz) is divided into the overall damping
coefficient (for NASTRAN and ANSYS), or the material damping values for each material
(for ABAQUS and LS-DYNA3D) and then multiplied by the stiffness to obtain Element (or
Stiffness) Damping. The Frequency for Element Damping is used in combination with the
Model Load Dynamic Analysis...
material damping values to obtain structural damping in NASTRAN, and mass damping in
ABAQUS, ANSYS, and LS-DYNA3D.
Response Based On Modes
For the modal solution methods, these options allow you to choose the number and/or range
of modes to include in the frequency response or transient formulation.
Transient Time Step Interval
For transient analyses, these options control the number of steps, size of steps, and the output
interval. If this load is to be used in a Nonlinear Transient analysis, these options are overrid-
den by the Nonlinear Transient Time Step input.
Frequency Response
The Solutions Frequencies table is chosen in this section. This table defines the frequencies
to be analyzed for both Direct and Modal Frequency Analysis. The frequency table is just a
function with a list of frequencies in the x position. The y position is irrelevant and will be
ignored. A solution frequency table can be automatically created by pressing the Modal Freq
button. If you are using NASTRAN, you may also select the Advanced option to define the
range of solution frequencies.
Random Analysis Options
This option allows you to define a Power Spectral Density (PSD) function to be used for ran-
dom analysis. You simply use the Create Function command to define the PSD values as a
function of frequency (a vs. Frequency function type), and then select this function under
Random Analysis Options. This option is used only for Random Response Analysis.
Modal Freq
If you have previously performed a modal analysis on your model, and have the solution
information in the current model, you can automatically create a solution frequencies func-
tion/table from that output. Simply press Modal Freq, and you will see the following:
The modal frequency in each output case will be
selected for the Solution Frequency table. Addi-
tionally, frequencies in a band near each modal
frequency can be chosen by using the Additional
Solution Frequency Points. The Number of Points
per Existing Mode defines the number of frequen-
cies to be included for each modal frequency,
2
0
Enforced Motion
Pressing the enforced motion button enables you to define a base acceleration. This option
creates a base mass, links it to a set of “base nodes” in your model with rigid elements, and
applies an equivalent base force.
To begin you specify coordinates for the base mass using the standard Coordinate definition
dialog box. A node will be automatically created at this location. The next dialogue box is
the standard Entity Selection box, which asks you to choose the nodes on the base. A rigid
element is then created with the newly generated node as the independent node and the
selected nodes as the dependent nodes. Next you define the Base Acceleration using the
standard Load creation dialog box. The type of load to create will be limited to either Accel-
eration or Rotational Acceleration. You must choose a time or frequency dependent function
to associate with the acceleration.
The final required input is the mass and the acceleration scale factor. They are utilized to
generate a nodal force (force = base mass * specified acceleration) at the independent node
of the newly created rigid body. The values are automatically computed based on your cur-
rent model and the acceleration that you chose. The default for the mass value is several
orders of magnitude larger than the mass of the current model so the large mass will drive
the rest of the model.You can either simply press OK to accept them, change them here, or
edit the force later with the Modify Edit commands.
Advanced
As with Nonlinear Analysis, an
Advanced button is provided to
give experienced analysts more
control over the solution strat-
egy. The following dialog box is
provided to enable choices for
Mass Formulation and Dynamic
Data Recovery.
You can also specify addition
analysis inputs for Solution Fre-
quencies and Random Response
Analysis.
Solution Frequencies
This option provides an alternative method to the Solution Frequencies function on the main
Dynamic Analysis dialog box. This is currently only supported for NASTRAN. If you have
selected a Direct Frequency analysis, only the Default List and the Frequency Range (Min,
Max, No. of Intervals) options will be available, although logarithmic interpolation can also
be employed for the Frequency Range. If you select Modal Frequency as the analysis type,
additional types to determine the solution frequencies from the natural modes will be avail-
able. These are Cluster around Modes, which corresponds to the NASTRAN FREQ3 card,
and Spread Around Modes (MSC/NASTRAN FREQ4 card). Cluster around Modes will also
have a logarithmic interpolation option.
Model Load Heat Transfer Analysis
Random Analysis
There are currently two options supported for random analysis. 1) ANSYS PSD type:
ANSYS has the capability to input Acceleration (in g2/Hz or acc units2/Hz, Displacement,
Velocity, or Force). By simply changing this option, the type of input on the PSD Function in
the main Dynamic Analysis dialog box is modified. 2) NASTRAN PSD Interpolation: Nas-
tran has the ability to define the PSD table in the following four formats... (Log, Log), (Lin-
ear, Linear), (X Log, Y Lin), (X Lin, YLog). By simply changing this option, the type of
Interpolation used on the PSD table input (MSC/NASTRAN TABRND1) in the main
Dynamic Analysis dialog box is modified.
Copy
This selection allows you to copy a Dynamic Analysis options from any other Load Set in
the current model.
Alternate
EXPF EXPF
q = h × u CTRLND × ( T AMB )
–T
2
0
'
(/
The Convection Exponent is the value shown as EXPF in the above equations. These options ,1
are currently used for MSC/NASTRAN only. *
Forced Convection
The forced convection values specify the properties and behavior of the fluid to be analyzed.
These options correspond directly to the options on the MSC/NASTRAN PCONVM and
MAT4 commands. Refer to the NASTRAN documentation for more information about the
proper values for these options.
Finite Element Modeling
Hint:
You may want to use the Model Load Set command to modify the title of the new copy.
FEMAP will always create it with the same title as the original set that was copied.
This command works in a repetitive fashion. You essentially copy one “From Set” at a time
with a specified Scale Factor every time you press More. This is equivalent to a single term
in the above equation. For the final set that you wish to linearly combine, press Last One,
instead of More. This will combine the set, and exit the command.
Temperature Loads will not be linearly combined. FEMAP will simply copy the Nodal and
Elemental Temperatures. If conflicting temperatures exist for the same node or element in
the individual load sets, FEMAP will use the last temperature. Also, If loads exist on the
same node or element in different sets that are combined, the resulting set will simply obtain
multiple loads on that node or element, which can then be combined with Tools Check Coin-
cident Loads.
able to specify an Output Set and Output Vector which contains the temperature data. For
other types of loads, six vectors can be selected.
Data from the six vectors
will be converted to the
six loading degrees of
freedom. If you leave
any vectors blank (or
zero), no loads will be
created in that direction.
You must always spec-
ify at least one vector.
When creating elemental pressures, or many of the elemental heat transfer loads, you must
also specify a Face ID where the load will act. You cannot create output on different element
faces at the same time with this command. Also, all loads are created in Global Rectangular
coordinates, therefore the output must also be in Global Rectangular. You can choose the
Color and Layer for all new loads.
Finally, after you complete these options and press OK, the standard entity selection dialog
box will be displayed. You must select the Nodes or Elements where loads will be created.
You can either select your entire model, in which case all output will be converted, or limit
the conversion to some selected portion of your model. In either case, loads will only be cre-
ated if output exists for a particular Node or Element.
Why Create Loads from Output?
The primary reason to convert output data to load data is for use in future analyses. For
example, you may want to convert that data to temperature loads from a heat transfer run in
a structural analysis. Similarly, you might want to use displacement, force or acceleration
output from one structural analysis as a loading condition for further analyses.
Converting Between Nodal and Elemental Temperatures
Another reason to use this command is to convert nodal to elemental temperatures, or vice
versa. If you have defined temperatures and need to convert them to the opposite type, this
command can be combined with several others to accomplish that task. First, convert your
current temperatures to output data using Model Output From Load command. Then use
Model Output Convert to create an additional output vector of the opposite type. Finally, use
Model Loads From Output and select the vector created with Model Output Convert.
2
0
'
4.3.5.4 Model Load From Freebody... (/
...creates loads directly from a FreeBody display. You must have a FreeBody display active ,1
and Show Load Summation under Freebody Display must be On. The only input to this
*
command is the Nodes to apply the loads. FEMAP will automatically create loads from the
FreeBody display for the nodes you selected. If you have requested a total load calculation at
a specific location in the Freebody Display, FEMAP will ask you if it is OK to create this
load as well as the individual loads. If you say Yes to the Total Load question, FEMAP will
create a node at this location and then create the appropriate load.
Finite Element Modeling
Enter Set ID to
activate here
Click here to
or, choose an
deactivate all
existing set
sets.
from this list
... makes a new Constraint Set or activates an existing set. To create a new Constraint Set,
enter an ID which does not appear in the list of available sets. Then enter a Title and press
OK. As always, you should choose a descriptive title. The titles are displayed, along with the
IDs, whenever you are asked to select a Constraint Set. To activate a Constraint Set which
already exists, simply choose it from the list, or enter its ID, and press OK. To deactivate all
Constraint Sets, press Reset.
Note:
Be careful when you change the output coordinate system. If you have other constraints
defined on the same node, even in other Constraint Sets, you are implicitly changing their
orientation every time you change the output coordinate system. These changes can result in
modeling errors which FEMAP can not detect. Remember, you can only have one output
coordinate system per node. All Constraints, in all sets, as well as everything else that refer-
ences nodal degrees of freedom, are specified relative to that coordinate system.
Specifying Degrees of Freedom
Any combination of the six nodal degrees of freedom (TX, TY, TZ, RX, RY and RZ) can be
selected using the check boxes. In many cases however, standard combinations of degrees of
freedom will be needed. For these situations, you can quickly select the combination by
pressing the appropriate command button.
The following table shows the combinations which are available. In the table, * indicates a
constrained degree of freedom.
Nodal Constraint Degree of Freedom Buttons
Command
TX TY TZ RX RY RZ
Button
Fixed * * * * * *
Free
Pinned * * *
2
0
No Rotation * * *
'
X Symmetry * * * (/
Y Symmetry * * * ,1
Z Symmetry * * * *
X AntiSym * * *
Y AntiSym * * *
Z AntiSym * * *
Simply choose the command button you need, followed by OK, to create the constraint.
Finite Element Modeling
0 = ∑ Aj uj
where
Aj are the equation coefficients, and
uj are the nodal degrees of freedom
Equation coefficients are directly specified in the constraint equation definition dialog box:
Add, Multiple Nodes, Replace,
Delete:
Nodal degrees of freedom are identified
by selecting a node number and selecting
the degree of freedoms (see table below).
To input one Node at a time, define the
coefficient, select the degrees of freedom,
and then select/input the Node and hit
Add. This will add it to the Constraint
Equation.
You can also add multiple Nodes, if you
have multiple Nodes in the constraint
equation that have identical degrees of
freedoms and coefficient. Simply input the coefficient, select the degrees of freedom, and
then hit the Multiple Nodes button. You will then see the standard Entity Selection dialog
Geometric Constraints
box. Select the appropriate Nodes and hit OK. This will add these Nodes with the selecting
degrees of freedom and coefficient to the constraint equation.
You can also modify your selections by highlighting a selection in the dialog box. When a
selection is highlighted, you can remove it by hitting Delete, or change it to your current
pick by hitting Replace.
Nodal Degree of Freedom Numbers
Number DOF
1 TX, X Translation
2 TY, Y Translation
3 TZ, Z Translation
4 RX, X Rotation
5 RY, Y Rotation
6 RZ, Z Rotation
As always, the nodal degrees of freedom are in the X, Y and Z directions defined by the
nodal output coordinate systems.
ID, Color, Layer:
In addition to the equation terms, you must define an equation ID. This ID must be unique
within each constraint set, and is used only to identify the equation within FEMAP. The ID
will automatically increment each time that you create a new equation. You can also specify
a Color and Layer for each equation.
cally determine which Nodes are attached to these entities. The Nodal constraints will then
be applied directly to these Nodes, and their Output Coordinate Systems will be adjusted
appropriately.
The geometric constraints, similar to the geometric loads, are divided into four commands:
(1) On Point, (2) On Curve, (3) On Surface, and (4) Expand.
Input for this command is minimal. Simply specify the ID of the constraint set that you want
to create. This new set must not already exist. FEMAP will create a duplicate copy of the
active set with the ID that you specify.
After the copy has been made, FEMAP will ask whether you want to activate the new set.
Answer No, if you want to continue working with the original constraint set. Answer Yes, to
work with the new copy.
Hint:
You may want to use the Model Constraint Set command to modify the title of the new copy.
FEMAP will always create it with the same title as the original set that was copied.
Note:
The Contact Property and Contact Pair options are provided under the Model Contact menu
purely for user convenience. These options can be created through the standard Model Prop-
erty and Model Element commands.
'
(/
,1
*
Finite Element Modeling
This dialog box is partitioned into four major sections: (1) Standard Entity Information, (2)
Defined By, (3) Type, and (4) Output. Each of these sections are described more fully below.
With regard to the <<Add, Multiple, Delete, and Reset options, these items perform exactly
as their names suggest. Add includes one item, Multiple allows you to select multiple enti-
ties, Delete removes one item, and Reset removes the entire list.
Note:
An entity is not selected until it appears in the large window on the right of the dialog box.
Thus, an item contained in the entry area (shown as Surface above) will not be included if
you enter the entity and hit OK. You must select <<Add before exiting for single entity
input.
The points on the Contact Box are exported directly to LS-DYNA3D as a *DEFINE_BOX,
which is then referenced on the *CONTACT option for the referenced segment. For
ABAQUS and MARC, only elements with centroidal values in the box will be exported.
Note:
You can not limit contact in segments for ABAQUS and MARC to element faces or nodes
when using Part Contact. Only the elements will be exported. If you want to limit contact to
certain faces, or nodes, you must use Standard Contact.
Standard Contact
This contact method allows selection of both geometry (Surfaces and Curves) and finite ele-
ment entities (Nodes and Element Faces). Nodes can only be selected if the Output Nodes
option is selected. You can simply select the type of entity and then input the ID and hit
<<ADD, or you can hit Multiple... to chose multiple entities. The selection of geometric and
FEA entities are slightly different, and they are explained more fully below, however, you
can select both geometry and entities in the same contact segment.
Geometry Selection
When selecting geometry (curves and surfaces) for contact, simply select the appropriate
entities. There will also be a check box for positive side. This is currently used to determine
if the top or bottom face of plates is in contact when attached to a surface. It is not currently
implemented for curves.
The conversion from geometry to export of FEA entities is very similar to expanding geo-
metric loads. When exporting the model, FEMAP determines all nodes that are attached to
the particular geometry. If the Output is on Nodes, the Nodes will be exported. The only
exception is for MARC, where pure node sets are not supported.
With Output on Elements, FEMAP determines what element faces are attached to the geom-
etry. For an element face to be selected, all of its nodes must be attached to the curve (for
edges of planar elements) or surface (for planar and solid elements). FEMAP exports the ele-
ment faces to ABAQUS, SEGMENTS to LS-DYNA3D corresponding to the element faces,
and as elements to MARC. FEMAP will also export the CONTACT NODE option to
MARC to limit contact to the face nodes attached to the geometry.
FEA Selection
2
0
You can also select the FEA entities directly. Nodes are selected by the standard picking
'
method. For elements, element faces are actually chosen. You must pick both the element (/
and its face number. ,1
*
Finite Element Modeling
Note:
For motion, constraints, and loads of a Reference Node to be exported as Rigid Body values,
two conditions must be met: (1) Property/Part Contact must be used, and (2) the material ref-
erenced on the property must be a *MAT_RIGID type (FEMAP Other Type No. 20).
4.4.1.4 Output
You must also specify the type of output for the segment. If you select Property/Part Contact
under Define By, this option will be disabled and FEMAP will export Parts for LS-
DYNA3D and elements for ABAQUS and MARC. If you select Elements, you will not be
able to pick Nodes for the definition. FEMAP will then export the appropriate elements to
the contact entity when exporting. If you select Nodes, FEMAP will export nodal lists for
contact to both ABAQUS and LS-DYNA3D. Contact Segments defined by nodes is not sup-
ported for MARC and an error message will occur on export.
Defining a Contact Property
Hint:
It is usually best to use Property/Part Contact with LS-DYNA3D in combination with the
Box Definition, and Element Output for ABAQUS and MARC. These options will limit
contact to certain areas, decreasing analysis time. By selecting Elements for output for
ABAQUS and MARC, you limit the number of nodes checked for contact to the appropriate
faces. Also, when using Rigid Contact Segments, it is best to create a separate Node that is
not part of the structural model to be the reference Node, and to define the Output as Ele-
ments ABAQUS and Property/Part Contact for LS-DYNA3D.
You need to select both a Master and Slave Contact Segment. You can pick these graphi-
cally, or use the drop-down box to select from a list of Contact Segments. You must specify
both a Master and a Slave. If you want to specify self-contact (or Single Surface contact in
LS-DYNA3D), simply select the same Segment for both the Master and the Slave. You must
also specify a Contact Property, where you can input values such as static and dynamic fric-
tion, as well as other properties and limits on the contact.
2
0
In addition to selecting existing Contact Segments, you also have the option to Define a new '
Segment or Edit an existing Segment for use in this Contact element. Define Segment sim- (/
ply accesses the Contact Segment/Surface option to create a new Segment, while the Edit ,1
Segment access the Modify Edit Contact Segment/Surface command. *
For both ABAQUS and DYNA, you will need to specify Contact elements to have contact
occur in your model. Contact Segments are not placed into contact in these programs unless
a Contact element is created. For MARC, you only specify a Contact element when you
want to limit contact to just certain segment pairs. If no Contact elements exist in the model,
all Contact Segments will be able to contact one another.
Finite Element Modeling
4.5 Optimization
This menu option defines the Goals, Variations, and Limits for Optimization Analysis. This
capability is currently only supported for NASTRAN. The result of an optimization analysis
is values for the Design Variables which enables the structure to stay within the Design Lim-
its. These results are stored as XY Functions in FEMAP, which demonstrates the history of
the Design Variables over the requested number of cycles,.
When you select
this command, the
Design Optimiza-
tion dialog box will
appear. This dialog
box has three sec-
tions: (1) Goal, (2)
Vary (Design Vari-
ables) and (3)
Limit (Design Con-
straints). The
allowable inputs
will change based
upon your active
selection. Those
items that are
selected for either
Vary or Limit will
appear in the large
window on the left
of the dialog box when you select that option. Each of the these areas is discussed more fully
below.
With regard to the Push Buttons at the bottom left of the dialog box, the Add does exactly
that for one entity, Multiple allows you to select Multiple values, while Edit allows you to
change the selected entity. Delete will remove a single entity from the list, while Reset will
delete the entire list.
4.5.1 Goal
When this option is selected, the Goal Design Objective
portion of the dialog box is active.The only Design Objec-
tive currently supported is Minimize Weight. You will not
be able to change this selection. The only input available
input for this option is maximum number of design cycles.
'
multiply the con- (/
stant values that are ,1
defined by those *
entities.
Finite Element Modeling
ID and Title
These options simply specify a unique ID and a Title by which the function can be identi-
fied.
Type
Currently, seventeen types of functions are available. Dimensionless (0), vs. Time (1), vs.
Temperature (2), vs. Frequency (3), vs. Stress (4), Function IDs vs. Temp (5), Viscous
Damping vs. Freq. (6), Critical Damping vs. Freq (7), Amplification vs. Freq (8), Strain Rate
(9), Function IDs vs. Strain Rate (10), vs. Curve Length (11), vs. Curve Parameterization
(12), Stress vs. Strain (13), Stress vs. Plastic Strain (14), Function vs. Value (15), and Func-
tion vs. Critical Damping (16). You define functions of each of these types in an identical
manner. The type simply determines how the X values will be interpreted.
For Types 5, 9, and 15, Function IDs vs. Temp and Function IDs vs. Strain Rate, the Y val-
ues are the IDs of other functions (typically vs. Stress functions). The X values are the tem-
peratures or strain rates that will be assigned to each function.
Hint:
It is very important to identify the proper type for the function that you are trying to define -
otherwise it will not be properly used when you try to analyze your model.
Data Entry Options
These options are used to define the XY function. You can specify single values in the table
by choosing Single Value, and filling in the X and Y values. If you want to define equally
spaced points along a linear function, choose Linear Ramp. Then fill in the X, Y, To X and
To Y values, along with the Delta X value. All data points between X and To X will be lin-
early interpolated at every multiple of Delta X. For more complex relationships choose
Equation. In this case, just like the Linear Ramp, fill in the X, To X and Delta X options.
However, for Y, type in any equation (in terms of the X Variable - !x by default) that defines
the function that you want to represent. A typical example, might be setting Y to sin(!x). If
you do not want to use the !x variable, you can change it, but make sure that you use the new
variable in your equations.
If you need to replicate a portion of a func-
tion, you can choose periodic. In this case,
the input options switch to those shown.
You specify “X” and “To X” as the range
of the existing function that you want to
replicate. Specify “Inc X” as the value that
you want to add to the original X function
values for each copy that you are going to
make. Specify “Copies” as the number of
additional copies of the function range that you want to create. The Y values are unchanged
by this command. You can use the Edit Magnitude option after creating the copies to update
those values.
Modifying FEA Entities
The XY table of values will always be shown (and used) in sorted order based on ascending
values of X. You do not however need to input the values in that order - they will be auto-
matically sorted as they are defined.
If you want to define a step function, you can simply define multiple Y values with the same
X value. In this case, they will be added to the function in the order that you specify them,
and will not be reordered by the sorting.
Editing Options
The Edit Phase and Edit Magnitude options allow you to modify the data that you have
already defined. After selecting either of these choices, specify the range of data points that
you want to edit by entering the X and To X values. Then enter Scale and Add values. All
data between X and To X will be multiplied by Scale, and will then be increased by the Add
value. The Edit Phase option modifies the X values. The Edit Magnitude option modifies Y.
More, Delete and Reset
These options allow you to manage the list of data points in the function. More will add the
point or points that you are currently defining to the function. Delete removes a selected
point from the function. To use this option, first select the point from the list that you want to
remove, then press Delete. Reset simply clears all data from the function.
Copying Functions
If you have another function in the current model that is similar to the one that you are trying
to create, you can press the Copy button. This will display a list of all functions in the model.
When you choose a function from the list, all data from that function will be loaded into the
current function. You can then add or delete additional items as you choose.
Working with Function Libraries
Function libraries allow you to create standard functions that you can use in many different
models. When you press Save, the current function is added to the function library. Pressing
load displays a list of the functions from the library and lets you choose one to be loaded into
the current function. Refer to the Common Dialogs chapter for more information on Librar-
ies.
Working with Other Programs
Since functions are just general XY data, they are easy to work with in other programs like
spreadsheet and graphing applications. To move functions between programs, you can use
the Get and Put buttons. Put copies the current function to the clipboard. Get retrieves clip-
2
0
and (3) Advanced Updates (Modify Associativity and Modify Update Commands). The
movement of entities are all performed on the second partition of the Modify menu. The
remaining commands are contained on the bottom portion of the Modify Menu command.
Each of these areas are discussed more fully below.
any curve, and all of the selected Nodes will be projected onto it. Refer to the description
above (Modify Project Menu) for more information on how the projection will be done.
Original Locations Projected Locations
Original Locations
Projected Locations
'
(/
,1
*
Finite Element Modeling
the standard coordinate definition dialog box. The entities that you selected will be moved to
the location that you specify. Finally, after you choose a location, you will see the Move To
dialog box. Here, you can choose the coordinates to update (X, Y and/or Z) and the Coordi-
nate System to use for the modification. If you choose any coordinate system other than Glo-
bal Rectangular, the location you chose previously is transformed into that system, before
the entities are moved. Only those coordinates that are checked will be updated. In most
cases, you will not want to check all of the coordinates, unless you are updating a single
entity.
Modify Move To Coord Sys...
... is the most powerful Move To command.
Not only does it update the location of the
coordinate systems that you select, but it
can also move all points, nodes and other
coordinate systems that are defined relative
to those coordinate systems.
If you just want to move the coordinate sys-
tems, do not choose Move CSys, Nodes and Points... . If you did select that option, FEMAP
would move the coordinate systems you selected plus the dependent entities.
Coordinate systems that you select are updated as you requested. Other dependent entities
are moved as a rigid body based on the transformation of the definition coordinate systems.
If a coordinate system is both selected and dependent on other selected coordinate systems,
it is updated based on your request, since you selected it. Refer to the description above
(Modify Move To Menu) for more information on other options.
All of the coordi-
nate systems that
you select are
updated as you
requested. Other
dependent entities
are moved as a
rigid body based
on the transforma- y y
y y
tion of the defini- Cases 3 moves
4 3 These nodes defined z4 3 and so do nodes
tion coordinate
2
z x z x x z x
0
relative to Cases 3
systems. If a coor- '
dinate system is
(/
,1
both selected and dependent on other selected coordinate systems, it is updated based on *
your request, since you selected it. Refer to the description above (Modify Move To Menu)
for more information on other options.
If your model was built in a hierarchical manner, using multiple coordinate systems, this
command can quickly move large, related portions of your model. If you want to update the
location of a coordinate system, but leave the entities that reference it in their original posi-
tions, you can also use the Modify Update Coord Sys command.
Finite Element Modeling
Move By vector
This command
only uses two dia-
log boxes. First,
the standard entity
selection dialog
box is displayed.
You should select
the entities to be
updated. Then, the
standard vector
Select these nodes
definition dialog
box will be dis-
played. The vector you specify must contain both a direction and magnitude. All of the
selected entities, and the entities that reference them will be moved by that vector. This
essentially means that the location of the selected entity is updated by adding the compo-
nents of the vector.
Move By in NonRectangular Coordinate Systems
The move by commands always move along a vector, that is along a straight line. You can
define the vector in any convenient coordinate system, but it will always represent a straight
line. You can not use the Move By commands to rotate your model by specifying a vector in
the angular direction of a cylindrical coordinate system. Use the Rotate commands to rotate
your model.
Modify Move By Coord Sys...
...just like the Modify Move To Coord Sys command, this command will move all of the
selected coordinate systems, and any points, nodes, or other coordinate systems that refer-
ence a selected system. This can be very powerful if your model is constructed with multi-
level coordinate systems.
Again, dependent entities are moved as a rigid body. Selected coordinate systems are all
moved by the vector that you define. Refer to the Modify Move By Menu description for
more information.
Modify Move By Node...
... moves the selected nodes, and all parts of the model that reference them, by the specified
vector. Refer to the Modify Move By Menu description for more information.
Modify Move By Menu
vector), and the elements will be offset along that vector. Using the command with this '
option is equivalent to using the Modify Move By Element command. All elements are sim- (/
ply moved by a constant amount. ,1
*
Finite Element Modeling
standard coordinate definition dialog box is displayed twice. The first time, you must define
the coordinates of the starting point of the rotation. The second time, you must define the
ending point of the rotation. Using these coordinates, and the axis of rotation, FEMAP will
determine the rotation angle.
Modify Rotate To Coord Sys...
...just like the Modify Move commands, this command will rotate all of the selected coordi-
nate systems. Points, nodes, or other coordinate systems that reference a selected system are
also moved as a rigid body. Their movement is based on the motion of their definition coor-
dinate systems. This can be very powerful if your model is constructed with multi-level
coordinate systems. Refer to the Modify Rotate To Menu description above for more infor-
mation.
Modify Rotate To Node...
... rotates the selected nodes, and all parts of the model that reference them, around the spec-
ified vector. Refer to the Modify Rotate To Menu description above for more information.
Modify Rotate To Element...
... is just like the Modify Rotate To Node command, except that you choose elements.
FEMAP will automatically rotate all nodes which are connected to those elements. Refer to
the Modify Rotate To Menu description above for more information.
The Modify Rotate To Element command, unlike the other commands in this menu, will also
update the orientation nodes, orientation vectors and offsets of any line elements that you
select. This allows you to move those elements as a rigid body, and retain their original char-
acteristics.
tant. The length is not used. Finally, the Rotation and Translation dialog box will appear. You '
must specify the Rotation Angle and the Translation Distance.
(/
,1
*
Finite Element Modeling
Note:
The Modify Align Element command, unlike the other commands in this menu, will also
update the orientation nodes, orientation vectors and offsets of any line elements that you
select. This allows you to move those elements as a rigid body, and retain their original char-
acteristics.
Modify Align Coord Sys...
... is just like the Move and Rotate commands. It will align all of the coordinate systems that
you select, plus the entities that are defined relative to those systems. No option is available
to skip alignment of the referencing entities.
Modify Align Node...
... aligns the selected nodes, and all parts of the model that reference them, using the two
vectors. Refer to the Modify Align Menu description above for more information.
Modify Align Element...
... is just like the Modify Align Node command, except that you choose elements. FEMAP
will automatically align all nodes which are connected to those elements. Refer to the Mod-
ify Align Menu description above for more information.
The Modify Rotate By Element command, unlike the other commands in this menu, will
also update the orientation nodes, orientation vectors and offsets of any line elements that
you select. This allows you to move those elements as a rigid body, and retain their original
characteristics.
2
0
'
4.7.1.6 Modify Scale Menu (/
,1
These commands are used to change the size of your model. You specify a relative scaling *
factor and a point to scale around. FEMAP will adjust the selected coordinates appropriately.
Only Points and Nodes can be scaled. You can also choose to scale curves or elements, but
FEMAP will just automatically select the proper Points or Nodes for you. Like other modifi-
cation commands, entities which reference the selected Points and Nodes will also grow or
shrink with them. Coordinate Systems cannot be scaled.
Finite Element Modeling
The first dialog box used by these commands is the standard entity selection dialog. You
must select all of the entities that you wish to scale. After you press OK, FEMAP will dis-
play the standard coordinate definition dialog box. FEMAP will scale your model relative to
these base coordinates. The equation used for the scaling is:
4.7.2 Edit/Parameters
The first four commands in the third section of the Modify Menu (Modify Edit, Modify
Color, Modify Layer, and Modify Renumber) enable you to change specific items for the
FEA information. Each of these commands are described below.
type of gross changes to the model, please see the other Modify commands in this section of
the Modify Menu (Modify Color, Modify Layer, Modify Update Elements and Modify
Update Other commands).
Each command first asks you to select the entities you wish to edit. As always, the standard
entity selection dialog box is used. Following your selections, FEMAP simply displays the
same dialog box (or boxes) used by the related command in the Model menu which you used
to originally create the entities. In this case however, all of the data fields default to the cur-
rent values for the selected entities.
For example, if you choose Edit Node and then select Nodes 1, 3 and 5, three additional dia-
log boxes will be displayed, one at a time. The first dialog box will display the coordinates
of Node 1. You can change these values or just press OK to accept the current values. Then
dialog boxes for Nodes 3 and 5 will be displayed. If you press Cancel at any time, you will
immediately return to the FEMAP menu. Any entities that you had previously changed (and
pressed OK) will still be changed.
selecting from the Color Palette, FEMAP will prompt you to choose a new layer number
'
from the list of available layers. All of the selected entities will be modified to the specified (/
layer. ,1
*
Again, Modify Edit can be used to change layers, but this command is faster for multiple
entities.
Finite Element Modeling
being sorted for renumbering. By defining and choosing different coordinate systems, you '
can implement many different renumbering sequences. For example, if you choose a cylin- (/
drical coordinate system, and renumber by X (or R) you can renumber entities based on their ,1
radial distance from the origin of the coordinate system.
*
When renumbering by coordinates, you can also check Absolute Value if you want FEMAP
to ignore the sign (positive or negative) of the coordinate value. If this option is not checked,
negative values will be different, and numerically less than positive values.
Finite Element Modeling
Hint:
You will typically want to use this command with nodes only. Attach/detach of elements will
only affect certain picking options. Expansion of geometric loads onto finite elements is
always performed on a nodal basis. An element is consider on a surface for geometric loads
if all nodes from an element’s face are attached to the surface. Therefore, you can effectively
remove an element from a surface by simply detaching one of its nodes.
When you select this command, you will see the Geometry
Associativity dialog box. You must choose between Detach
From or Attach To. You must also choose the type of geom-
etry from which you wish to detach. If you select Any, you
can remove all attachments. If you select a specific type of
geometry, you must also input (or graphically select) the ID
of the geometric entity.
Interior Nodes Only
The Interior Nodes Only option is available when you are
removing geometry from Curves, Surfaces, or Solid/Vol-
umes. FEMAP uses a hierarchal system of attachment.
Nodes on a surface, for example, include nodes attached
directly to the surface, nodes attached to the curves which
define the surface, and nodes on the points which define the curves. If you select the Interior
Nodes Only option, the attachments directly to the surface will be removed, but the curve
and point attachments will remain. You will still be able to load or constrain the curves. If
you do not select Interior Nodes Only, all attachments will be removed.
Note:
When attaching nodes, they must not have any other attachments to geometry. You also will
not be able to develop the hierarchy that FEMAP creates automatically when meshing.
can however use this command to change between various Line Element types or between '
the Plane Element types. (/
,1
Before you choose this command, you must first use Model Property, or any other available *
method, to make a Property of the type you want to use for the Elements. After you make the
Property, choose this command. You will be asked to select the Elements to be updated using
the standard entity selection dialog box. Then you will be presented with a list of available
Properties.
Finite Element Modeling
Choose a Property of the type that you want for the selected Elements. When you press OK,
all of the Element types will be changed along with the Properties that the Elements refer-
ence. You will receive messages if any of the Elements are incompatible with the Property
you selected.
If you are changing from a Line element type that does not require an orientation to a type
that does, FEMAP will automatically call the Modify Update Orientation command. This
allows you to properly orient the elements that you just modified. You should always specify
the orientation that you want. If you do not however, FEMAP will automatically assign an
orientation to each of the updated elements. Review any of these automatic assignments very
carefully.
You have four basic choices for setting the orientation. You can choose None, which will
turn off the material orientation. This will typically result in material axes that are oriented
along the default elemental axes. If you choose “Vector Direction” and press OK, FEMAP
will display the standard vector definition dialog box. You then assign a vector direction.
FEMAP will automatically calculate the material angle values for each element which will
align the primary (X) material direction with the vector you specified.
Choosing “Coordinate Direction” is very similar to choosing “Vector Direction”. The vector
and resulting angle are simply defined along a coordinate direction at the first node of each
element. This method is especially useful if you want to align the material axes to the radial
or tangential direction in a cylindrical or spherical coordinate system. In most other cases,
“Vector Direction” is preferred. The final option, “Angle Value” allows you to directly
define the orientation angle value. FEMAP does no further calculations with this angle
value.
Before choosing any of these methods, be sure to refer to your analysis program documenta-
tion and the translator section of this manual to see how material orientation angles are used
and to find any limitations.
When to Set a Material Angle
Most analysis programs have two basic uses for this type of orientation angle. The first is to
align the principal directions of a nonisotropic material. Whenever you are using orthotropic
or anisotropic materials, you should probably be defining a material angle for all of your pla-
nar elements. If you do not, the default orientation, along the vector between the first two
nodes of the element is used. This will typically produce a different alignment for each ele-
ment and can give meaningless analysis results.
The second use for material angles can be equally important. If you are going to recover and
postprocess elemental normal stresses (i.e., X Stress, Y Stress, XY Shear, etc.), they are usu-
ally reported relative to the elemental coordinate system. That coordinate system is aligned
by the material angle. Again, if you do not align all of your elemental axes, the “X Normal
Stress” for one element may not be in the same direction as the “X Normal Stress” for the
next element. Refer to your analysis program documentation to see how your stresses are
reported. You may not have to set angles if stress output is reported relative to some other
coordinate reference.
Note: 2
0
'
Not all programs will report analysis results automatically in the material angle coordinate (/
system. You should check the documentation of your analysis program to determine whether ,1
you can force the analysis program to output results in the material angle coordinate system, *
and what commands are required to do this.
Finite Element Modeling
Hint:
You may define a Material Angle after you have analyzed a model to transform the normal
stresses to a different coordinate system. Simply set the material angle using the Modify
Update Elements Material Angle, and then use the Model Output Transform command to
convert the stresses.
Viewing Material Angles
You can see the material angles that you have defined for your planar elements by using the
View Options command. Choose the “Element - Orientation/Shape” option and turn on
“Show Orientation”. This will display a small vector at the center of each element where an
angle has been defined. The orientation of the vector shows the angle that you chose. Gener-
ally, you will want to see that all of the vectors are parallel - then your elements will be
aligned.
Radial Offsets
If you want to offset beams in a radial pattern, from the center of a sphere, choose the Radial
Offset option. You must then enter a distance to offset the element endpoints from the node.
When you press OK, you will be asked for the coordinates of the center of a sphere. The off-
set directions lie along the lines connecting this center location and the individual nodes. All
offsets, at both ends of the elements are set to the same size, only the directions change.
more complete shell (like the outside of a solid model) all normals can be automatically
adjusted to the direction you chose. If there are interior features/panels (like internal bulk-
heads) FEMAP will make the directions consistent, but the concept of inward/outward may
not be maintained. You will also receive a warning if the elements you select do not form a
complete shell (i.e. they have free edges). FEMAP can still usually align the normals.
side nodes are moved. If you select non-parabolic elements, they will simply be ignored.
Input for this command is minimal. You just select the elements to be updated using the stan-
dard entity selection dialog box. When you press OK, the position of all midside nodes will
be checked and moved to the midside of their respective element edges.
Method
These options control the calculation of the thickness/offset values. You can choose to calcu-
late variable values based upon nodal position (Vary Between Nodes option), an Equation or
a Constant value.
For the Vary Between Nodes option, you must input the first node, last node, and values at
each of these nodes. FEMAP will then compute values for all other nodes attached to the
selected elements based upon their relative distance between the From and To Nodes. This
option provides an easy way to gradually vary the thickness/offsets of plates which are in a
patterned series.
The other option, Equation or Constant, simply allows you to input an equation or constant
value for the thickness/offsets. If an Equation is chosen, the “i” variable will represent ele-
ments for offsets, and nodes for thickness values.
The final option in this area, Average for each Element, will average the Nodal Thickness for
each plate, and assign this constant thickness to all corner nodes on the plate. Otherwise,
each corner of the plate will most likely have a different value. This option has no effect
when modifying plate offsets because these offsets are already calculated on an elemental
basis, not on a nodal basis.
Limits
This section enables you to define the Tolerance, Maximum, and Minimum values to be used
in the update. You can limit the number of significant digits to be retained as a unique thick-
ness or offset by specifying a tolerance value. This is especially convenient if you want to
limit thicknesses or offsets to an increment of a specific value (like 0.001, for example) You
may also limit the minimum and maximum allowable values, which is especially useful
when defining equations.
'
Only Loads from the active Load Set will be updated by this command. If there are multiple (/
loads on an entity in the active Load Set, they will all be updated. ,1
*
Note:
If you use this command to update heat transfer loads with multiple inputs (i.e. Radiation
with absorptivity, emissivity, view factor, and temperature), FEMAP will ask whether you
want to update each input. Simply say Yes to those you want to update.
Finite Element Modeling
it has a load attached to it. To delete these nondeletable entities, first delete all entities which
reference them. The following table lists entities that can cause an entity to be nondeletable.
Nondeletable Entities
Hint:
You can use this feature to great advantage in “cleaning up” a model. For example, if you
want to get rid of all of the unused Nodes, simply choose Delete Node, and select all Nodes.
This may seem a little scary, but in fact only those Nodes which are not referenced by any
Elements, Loads or Constraints will be deleted.
Deleting From a Set
The Delete Load Nodal, Load Elemental, Constraint Nodal and Constraint Equation all
delete entities out of the active Load or Constraint Set. You do not select the set, just the
Node or Element IDs you want. When deleting nodal or elemental loads, the normal confir-
mation “Ok to Delete Loads” only applies to the temperature loads. You will then also be
asked to confirm whether to delete the Temperatures. If you have multiple temperature loads
defined on the same node or element, in the same load set, they will all be deleted.
Deleting Body Loads also works with the active Load Set. In this case there is nothing to
select, you are just asked to confirm the deletion.
After you Delete 2
0
'
When entities are deleted from a FEMAP model, the space that they occupied is marked as (/
empty and available for reuse. The model file does not decrease in size. Normally, this is not ,1
a problem because new entities will reuse this space. In some cases however, when you *
delete a lot of data (output, for example), you may want to immediately remove empty space
from your model and reduce model file size. The File Rebuild command does just that.
Choose the File Rebuild command, and press Yes to perform a full rebuild and Yes again to
allow FEMAP to compact the model. Blocks of empty space are removed and your model
decreases in size. You should only use this option after you delete large blocks of data.
Finite Element Modeling
FEMAP cannot usually compact space if you have only deleted one or two scattered entities,
and the savings will not be worth the time it takes to try the command.
Another way to compact your model is to use the File Export FEMAP Neutral command to
write a FEMAP Neutral file. Start a new model and then use File Import FEMAP Neutral to
read that file. The new model will contain all of the old data, but no unnecessary space.
5Meshing
This chapter provides descriptions for the many automatic meshing tools available in FEMAP.
The Model Element command can be used to generate one element at a time, but most often,
you will be using the commands under the Mesh Menu to automatically generate a finite ele-
ment mesh.
The commands on the Mesh menu are partitioned into five categories based upon the type of
meshing. They are:
1. Meshing on Geometry
2. Non-Geometry Meshing
3. Modifying a Mesh
4. Duplicating a Mesh
5. Extrude/Revolve
Most often, especially if you are surface/solid modeling, you will be using the commands for
meshing on Geometry. The Non-Geometry Meshing section provides specific tools which can
be very helpful in certain situations, but are not as widely applicable to most FEA models.
The “Modifying a Mesh” section allows you to smooth or refine a mesh, while the “Duplicat-
ing a Mesh” section enables you to copy an existing mesh and rotate, reflect, scale, or simply
copy it. The final section “Extrude/Revolve” is most often used to convert a 2-D mesh, which
has a consistent third dimension, into a 3-D mesh.
Each of these areas and their associated commands will be discussed below.
Note:
The first four categories above all pertain to setting the size of mesh that you will generate.
In all of these commands there are three basic ways that mesh sizing is specified - along a
curve, at a point or globally. If you set the size along a curve, the other two methods are
ignored, even if you specify them. If you do not set sizes along a curve, then point mesh
sizes are used wherever they are defined. Global mesh sizes are only used when neither
curve nor point mesh sizes apply.
closest size that will fit evenly into each curve length. If you are using this method, there are
several additional options that will allow you to further control the mesh sizing.
Y.ou can set the
“Min Elem on
(6
0
Lines” to insure
that each straight +
,1
line in your model *
will have at least a
specified number
of elements. Simi-
larly, “Min Elem
on Closed Edges”
sets the minimum
number of ele-
ments that will be placed along any closed edge, like an arc or circle. “Min Elem on Other
Edges” applies to curves that are neither straight lines or closed edges - like splines. These
options are not typically used if you are setting the mesh size on a single curve. What they
allow you to do however, is to select many curves (possibly your entire model), specify a
fairly large mesh size, and still obtain some mesh refinement around desired curves - all in a
single command.
Node Spacing
The Node Spacing sec-
Edge 3 - 4 elements set,
tion of the dialog box 5 elements created, bias=2.0
allows you to bias the
mesh along a curve. You
can chose no biasing
Edge 4 - 3 elements set,
(Equal), linear biasing 6 elements created, bias = 2.0 Edge 2 - 6 elements, bias=2.0
Small Elements at End
(Biased), or logarithmic Small Elements at Start
biasing (Geometric
Bias). If you select a
bias, you must also spec- Edge 1 - 5 elements, no bias
ify the Bias Factor and
where the small ele-
ments will be located (i.e. which location to bias towards). The Bias Factor controls the
spacing of Nodes. Setting it to a value of 2.0 with linear bias, will make the last element
twice as big as the first if you select “Small Elements at Start”. The first element refers to the
element at the first endpoint of the curve. The diagram below shows a sample surface mesh
using different biases on the curves. By using biases appropriately, you can create a fine
mesh in the regions of most interest, as well as provide a smooth transition to regions of less
importance.
Parametric vs. Length Spacing
In addition to the biasing methods, you can also choose whether mesh locations will be
located in parametric or length coordinates along the curve. For lines, arcs and circles, these
Meshing
options make no difference since the parametric and length coordinates are equivalent. For
spline curves however, the parametric coordinates are typically much different.
In most cases, choosing parametric spacing is the preferred method. It results in a finer mesh
in areas of high curvature, which is often desirable. However, if you have two spline curves
side by side, which happen to have different parametric coordinates, “Equal Length” spacing
will allow you to match the meshes on those two curves (this can also be accomplished using
a matched custom mesh size on one of the curves - see Custom Size Along Curve).
Note:
“Equal Length” based spacing is slower for display and meshing than parametric spacing.
Parametric spacing should therefore be used whenever possible.
0
sent geometry that has high curvature. +
With this option enabled, a nominal
Vector to next mesh location
,1
size, based on the input nominal size,
*
is determined. The curve tangent vec-
tor is then compared to the vector that connects adjacent mesh locations. If the angle
between those vectors is larger than the angle that you specified, the elements are added to
the curve until it meets the requirement that you specified.
Small Feature Adjustments
Instead of increasing the number of elements, these options limit the number of elements
placed around “small” features to the “Max Elem on Small Feature” input. It prevents a large
concentration of elements along small features that may not be needed in your model. A
“small” feature is determined by the size you specify.
This number is not a curve length. It is compared to the length of the perimeter around any
closed loop of curves divided by PI (the effective diameter of the loop). If the effective diam-
eter of the loop of curves is less than the size you specified, then the number of elements
around that loop will be limited to the maximum number you choose.
Vertex Aspect Ratio
Turn this option on to optimize mesh spacing on geometry that has both short and long
curves that join at common vertices. This is especially useful if you are specifying a mesh
size that is large compared to the length of your shorter curves. In this case, without this
option, you may find that at points where long curves join short curves, the long curves will
have a fairly large mesh size right beside a short mesh size on the short curve. By turning on
this option, the longer mesh sizes will be biased and shortened at the ends where they join
small mesh sizes. The aspect ratio that you specify controls the maximum variation between
adjacent mesh sizes.
Mapped Meshing Refinement
This option provides final adjustments to be made to the mesh sizes that favor mapped
meshing. It only applies to surfaces that are 3 or 4 sided (mapped-meshable). If curves on
opposite sides of these surfaces have different lengths, they will often get different numbers
of elements, preventing them from being mapped meshed. If you use this option, the sizes on
opposite sides will be adjusted so that they match, if the adjustment will not change the mesh
size too much (factor of 2 from nominal, unless you defined a mapped meshing approach, in
which case the sizes will be matched regardless of size).
Meshing
Note:
When using the Surface Interior Mesh Growth option the surface MUST be free meshed.
Free meshing will be the default on any non regular surface ( more than 4 edges). If the sur-
face is mapped or 4 sided then you must specify a Parametric Free mesh using the Mesh-
Mesh Control-Approach on Surface command.
Curvature-Based Mesh Refinement
Curvature Based Mesh Refinement will reduce the size of elements in areas of a surface with
a high amount of curvature. When Curvature Based Mesh Refinement is selected FEMAP
first meshes the surface at the initial element size. It then calculates the ratio of Chord Height
to Chord Length for each element. If this ratio is larger than the value specified then FEMAP
will automatically reduce the element size and remesh the surface with the new sizing. This
will continue until all the elements on that surface do not exceed the ratio.
Chord Height
Original mesh locations
Chord Length
Mesh Mesh Control Size On Solid...
0
viously, and also has addi-
tional options that pertain +
primarily to multi-solid and ,1
*
hexahedral meshing. Refer to
the previous section, Mesh
Mesh Control Size on Surface
for information about the con-
trols that you can specify in the
Initial Sizing, Surface Interior
Mesh Growth, and Curvature
Based Mesh Refinement sections.
Tet vs. Hex Meshing
Choosing these options is fairly easy. Simply choose the option that is appropriate to the type
of meshing that you want to do. Depending on your choice however, the mesh sizing that is
generated can be significantly different. If you choose Tet meshing, the resulting sizes are
similar to those created if you had simply set mesh sizes on the individual surfaces. Tet
meshing does not require any additional adjustments to the mesh sizing. Preparing for hex
meshing however, requires very specific mesh sizing. Many surfaces must be mapped
meshed so that the hex mesh can be generated. In addition, surfaces across multiple solids
must be consistently sized and meshed so that the resulting hex mesh will be compatible.
Due to this extra checking that must be done, hex mesh sizing takes much more time than tet
mesh sizing. Refer to the Mesh Geometry Hex Mesh Solids command later in this section for
more information about Hex Mesh Sizing.
Hint:
If you are preparing for Hex Meshing, you MUST select all solids that you plan to mesh in a
single command. If you try to select them one at a time, there is no way to guarantee that the
meshes will be compatible across different solids.
Meshing
Color Description
You must be displaying your model in solid, shaded render mode for the best effect of these
colors. After sizing, you can graphically see which surfaces were detected and slaved as
adjacent, to make sure that all of the surfaces that you expected were found. You can also
easily see which solids need to be further simplified to allow hex meshing.
Mesh Mesh Control Interactive
0
more curves.
+
This command can be ,1
used in three different modes, as follows: *
Mode Result
Add The current curve mesh size is increased by the number of elements specified
Subtract The current curve mesh size is decreased by the number of elements speci-
fied. It is not reduced below 1.
Set To The curve mesh size is set equal to the number of elements specified
Always choose the mode and numbers before beginning. Then, simply click on the curve
you want to change, and the mesh size is adjusted. As you keep clicking on curves they are
changed appropriately. Switch modes at any time to make a different type of modification.
0, 0.333, 0.667 and 1.0 (Nodes are always placed at the beginning and end of curves). A total
of three elements will be created in a uniform fashion (Bias of 1).
The four buttons at the bottom of the Mesh Definition section provide capability to make
changes to the mesh Definition Window (as compared to the options on the right side of the
dialog box which work on one location at a time).
Equal
This option asks for the number of elements that you want along the curve, then computes
the mesh locations so that there will be that number of equal length segments along the
curve. It does not matter whether you specify parametric or length spacing for this approach,
you always get equal length divisions. Each division is created with 1 element and no bias.
Fill
Fill is used to “fill” between mesh points. You would typically select this option after defin-
ing one or more mesh points. When you select this option you will be prompted for the mesh
size. This mesh size will be used to fill intermittent points between the current mesh points.
This command does not change the number of points in the Window. It simply updates the
number of elements between each point to as closely as possible match the size you specify.
Expand
This command simply takes all locations that have more than one element assigned, and
expands it to each individual location. This is again a quick method to set an overall mesh
size (using Fill and/or Equal), expand to each individual location, and edit certain points if
they are not at the exact location you require.
Match
This option simply allows you to match the mesh locations of one or more other curves. This
command is very useful when you have similar curves, such as a symmetric configuration.
You can define the mesh size on one curve, and then use Match on each additional curve to
copy the mesh locations. The only input required for this option is to select the curves you
wish to match. Each of the mesh locations on the original curves is projected onto the target
curve.
Mesh Point Data
This section of the dialog box contains the definition of the actual location, as well as any
biasing. The Bias and Spacing portions of the dialog box are identical to those found in the
Mesh Mesh Control Size on Curve dialog box. Please see this section for more information
on biasing. The bias itself cannot be used with the automatic methods (Fill and Equal).
Location, Num Elements
This option allows you to input the location along the curve (1e-08 to 1.0) at which you want
a mesh location (node). You must also specify the number of elements required between this
location and the previous location on the curve (if no previous location is specified, it is the
beginning of the curve). These options must be used when you need to specify a biased
mesh. The automatic methods (Fill and Equal) are not available.
Mesh Mesh Control Mapped Divisions on Surface...
0
Often you will not know the percentage distance along a curve for a mesh point, but you will
+
know the coordinate location. In this case, simply use the Locate button. The Standard Coor- ,1
dinate Definition dialog box will appear, and you can input the coordinates with any of the *
standard methods. Be careful when inputting the location, however. It must be along the
curve, or at least be able to be projected onto the curve.
Once you select the location, it will automatically be converted to the location on the curve,
and the value will be added to the mesh points in the Mesh Definition Window.
Move
The Move option is identical to the Locate option, except it replaces the highlighted entity in
the Mesh Definition Window instead of creating a new entity.
Add/Edit
This button simply adds the location and number of elements contained in the Location and
Num Elements boxes to the list of mesh locations. If the value under Locations is already
contained in the list, FEMAP will edit the list, otherwise it will simply add it to the list.
Delete
This option removes the highlighted entry in the Mesh Definition Window from the list.
When you have finished defining the mesh points, simply hit OK to set the mesh size, or hit
Cancel to abort the mesh sizing.
Note:
This command is used for placing mesh locations in the interior of a surface. It is not
intended, nor does it work, to place locations along or very near the bounding curves. To do
that, use the Mesh Mesh Control Custom Size Along Curve command.
Note:
For most surface types, the points that you specify do not really need to be “on” the surface.
FEMAP will project the points onto the surface and use the projected location. For multi-
surface boundaries however you must locate the points on the surface, they will not be pro-
jected.
Mesh Mesh Control Attributes At Point
Hint:
When FEMAP meshes a surface, it creates the original mesh without the “Hard” mesh
(6
0
points. It then moves the Node closest to each hard point to the hard point location. FEMAP
then resmooths the mesh. This techniques works very well when there is a significant num- +
ber of Nodes in the mesh (and a reasonably fine mesh) in comparison to the number of hard ,1
points. If there are not many more Nodes than hard points, this technique will not produce
*
good meshes. For this type of mesh, it is best to imprint a Curve or Surface on the surface
(see Geometry Curves from Surfaces menu), and then define the mesh size on it. This will
use a different technique in the FEMAP surface mesher, and a better mesh will result.
when you press the “Releases” button. Releases specified on attributes apply to connections
at the first end of the curve (End A Releases) and the last (End B Releases). Element connec-
tions to internal nodes along the curve are not released.
Offsets
Like Orientations and Releases, offsets closely follow the Create Element counterparts. The
main differences here are in the three methods used to define the offset.
The Vector method is identical to the Create Element method. You define a vector at each
end, and the offsets correspond to those vectors. Just like releases, the ends here refer to the
start and end of the curve (not the start and end of each element). Using the vector method,
offsets vary linearly along the curve from the End A vector to the End B vector.
The Location method uses the “Reference Point” that you can choose when creating a prop-
erty from a standard or general shape. If you choose this method, offsets are defined in the
YZ plane of the cross section, not in global coordinates. In this case a zero offset locates the
shape so that the reference point lies on the curve at every location. Even if you want to
specify a zero offset, you must still specify the End A and End B offsets or the reference
point will not be used.
The Radial method allows you to choose a center location and offset distance. All of the off-
sets will be created as radial vectors pointing away from the center (assuming a positive off-
set distance) along the line connecting the center to the nodal location.
If you are editing the attributes on a curve that already has offsets defined, you will not be
able to change the definition method. You must first press “No Offsets” to delete the existing
offsets, then redefine them using the new method.
Note:
To use any of these options, first choose the method, then you MUST press “End A Offset”
(or one or more of the other offset buttons) to define actual offsets. Simply choosing the
method does not define an offset. Similarly, if you define the End A Offset, but do not
choose either the “End B Offset”, or “End B = End A”, then the End B offset is zero.
0
Once attributes have been defined, volumes can be meshed and properties (primarily mate-
+
rial information) will be automatically assigned. ,1
*
5.1.1.14 Mesh Mesh Control Attributes On Solid
... is used to assign meshing attributes to one or more solids. This command is identical to
Mesh Mesh Control Attributes On Volume, described above, except that it applies to solids.
0
be an all quadrilateral mesh on +
the three cornered surface. ,1
Depending on the geometry
*
however, the resulting mesh
can be severely warped.
Mapped - Three Corner Fan
Again this method is similar to Three Corner, but the resulting mesh has triangles at the first
corner location. This is the only point that must be specified in a particular order. Just as in
the four corner methods, the points in these three corner methods do not need to lie on the
selected surfaces.
Matched - Linked to Surface
This final approach does not directly define a new type of mesh, rather it simply instructs
FEMAP to make the mesh on the selected surface match the one on the surface that you link
it to. This approach is primarily used to insure compatible meshing in a single solid for hex
meshing, and to insure compatible meshes between adjacent surfaces of multiple solids. You
can use it for certain other situations, but care must be taken:
1. Surfaces to be linked must either be on the same solid, or must be adjacent/coincident in
space, or must at least be closely aligned.
If surfaces are on the same solid, they can be anywhere in space, they do not have to be
parallel or aligned in any particular fashion, but they can only be linked if the other curves
on the solid directly connect the two surfaces. In this mode, linking surfaces is intended to
be used with hex-meshable solids only. That is, solids that are essentially extrudable. If
you have more complicated geometry, you will still be able to link the surfaces, but mesh-
ing the linked surface will fail.
If surfaces are not on solids, or are on different solids, then they are meshed by matching
the closest points on the surfaces. For this reason, to mesh properly, the surfaces must be
positioned and aligned so that the points on the curves that are closest to each other result
in the proper mapping between the surfaces. Surfaces that are rotated arbitrarily in space
relative to each other will usually not meet this criteria. Again, this mode is primarily
intended for matching adjacent surfaces between multiple solids.
2. Surfaces to linked must also have the same mesh sizing, or they will not mesh properly. In
order for a linked surface to be meshed, it must have the same mesh sizing as the master
surface.
3. You can not to define circular references. You can only slave surfaces in one direction,
that is if A is linked to B, then B must be independently meshable, it can not be linked to
A.
Meshing
of complex solids. The menu is partitioned into several segments based upon the type of
geometry you are meshing.
Manual
By switching to Manual operation, you can specify individual features in your model to
(6
0
remove. This command has both a Remove and Restore option. You can remove/restore
+
three types of entities, (1) Edges, (2) Loops, and (3) Faces. When you choose the Edges and ,1
Loops command, you will be asked to input Curves via the Standard Entity Selection box. *
Faces will require input of surfaces. The same warnings for Automatic removal of Edges and
Faces (see Automatic above) apply to manual removal. Removal of key areas may result in
loss of integrity of the solid.
Edges
This button allows you to remove specific edges from the model. This option is most useful
when you may have many small edges, but you only want to remove a few of them.
Loops
You can also select the Loops to remove features from your model. Simply select a curve on
the loop, and the entire loop will be removed. This can be very useful for removing small
holes which run through the model.
Faces
This button allows you to remove specific faces from the model. This option is most useful
when you may have many small faces, but you only want to remove a few of them.
Set Color To
This section allows you to define colors for your suppressed and restored curves and sur-
faces. The default colors to restore will be the current colors of curves and surfaces. The
default for removal is typically a dark color, which makes it easy to distinguish these curves
and surfaces from the rest of the model. You should always use a distinguishing color to
remind yourself which features have been suppressed.
Restore All Features...
... provides an easy method to restore all features in the model.
0
vector definition +
dialog box will be ,1
used to define an
Curves *
orientation vector.
You cannot orient
using a third node, but you can modify the orientation later. The single vector that you define
is used for all elements that are generated, so it must be specified carefully.
nition coordinate system of each node. The property is most important. You must choose a
property which corresponds to a planar element.
Using Meshing Attributes
If the surfaces that you are meshing have mesh attributes defined, you will see an additional
property (0..Use Meshing Attributes) in the list. If you choose that property, FEMAP will
use the attributes to define the property and type of the elements that will be created. If you
wish to ignore the attributes, simply pick or create a different property.
Mesh Control
These options control the size and shape of the mesh inside the boundary. The elements
along the boundary edges are defined by the mesh sizes that you choose and are unaffected
by these settings. Those mesh sizes also have substantial impact on the interior of the mesh,
but these options give you additional control.
Min Elements Between Boundaries
As a boundary is being meshed, groups of elements are often generated between two oppo-
site edges of a boundary. Sometimes, the mesh sizes that you have defined are large enough
that a single element will span the distance between surfaces. Since this may not be enough
refinement for the model that you are creating, you can control this behavior by setting a
minimum number of elements that must be created between any boundary edges.
Setting this parameter does not guarantee that you will get that number of elements between
every edge. But wherever possible (based on compatibility with your surface mesh sizes)
that number of elements or greater will be created.
It is usually best to leave this parameter set to one initially, then if the results are undesirable,
undo the mesh and try it again with the number increased. Setting this number greater than
one can greatly increase the number of elements that are generated.
You will usually only
Min Elements = 1
have to set this option if
you are meshing a sur-
face that is long and thin
Min Elements = 3 (or 2) relative to the mesh size,
or one that has long, thin
“appendages”, as this
example demonstrates.
Max Element Aspect Ratio
Like the Min Elements setting described above, this option controls the elements inside the
mesh. In this case however, control over the number of elements is only a secondary effect
of this option. Primarily, this number is used as a guideline for how “long” elements can be
relative to their “width”. You must always specify a value that is greater than or equal to 1.0.
Smaller numbers usually create slightly more uniform meshes with elements that are better
shaped. Large numbers can lead to severely distorted elements. If you make a mesh that con-
tains long, thin or distorted elements, try again with a smaller aspect ratio.
Mesh Geometry On Surface...
Quick-Cut
Meshing large non-uniform surfaces can often take some time. Turning this option on short-
ens the time required while usually having minimal impact on the overall mesh quality. If
you want the best possible mesh, and are willing to wait, turn this option off. You can also
control the threshold by setting the number of nodes to a smaller or larger number. Do not (6
0
reduce the number of nodes too much, or mesh quality will substantially decrease. +
,1
Element Shape *
These options control the creation of triangular elements in your mesh. If you want to create
all triangles, you have the choice of All Triangles with or without the Fast Tri Mesh option.
The Fast Tri Mesh option uses a different method to create triangles that generally produces
less triangles with better aspect ratios. This technique works particularly well if you have a
long thin surface with holes. There is no “all quads” setting, but the default will generate
quadrilateral elements whenever possible. (Note: You must always get at least one triangle if
you specify an odd number of nodes on the surface.) Triangles are created wherever quadri-
laterals cannot meet the specified boundary mesh sizes, and wherever a quadrilateral would
be severely distorted. You can override the default 60 degree allowable distortion with any
value that you want. Lower distortion values will result in more triangles.
Mesh Smoothing
These options are the same as those described in the Mesh Smooth command. After an initial
mesh is generated, it is automatically smoothed to reduce element distortions. You will usu-
ally just want to accept the default values for these options. If you want to change them, refer
to the Mesh Smooth command for more information.
Examples
The following pictures show sample boundary meshes created using this command.
Hint:
The following suggestions can help you use the free meshing commands more effectively:
m Specify mesh sizes that transition gradually along the edges. Do not have large changes
in size from one curve to the next.
m Use default generation settings first, then undo and try again with modified settings if
you do not like the results. If that does not work, consider changing some mesh sizes.
m Map a boundary to a surface (Modify Update Others Boundary on Surface) whenever it
is nonplanar.
m If most of a mesh looks good, but there are a few distorted areas, use the remesh option
in the Mesh Refine command to “clean-up” the distorted elements.
Meshing
Outer boundary
with circular hole
Inner, circular
boundary
Surface and
shrunken elements
0
number of divi- +
sions along oppo- ,1
site edges of the *
surfaces, a mapped
mesh can be auto-
matically gener-
ated. If not,
FEMAP will cre-
ate a boundary
mesh. You can fur-
ther control this process by specifying a mesh approach using the Mesh Mesh Control
Approach on Surface command, described earlier in this chapter.
Surface Elements
Meshing
Surface Elements
Multi-Surface Meshing
When you mesh surfaces, the shape of the mesh is strongly controlled by the shape of the
underlying surfaces. All of the surface boundaries become boundaries in the mesh. In many
cases however, surfaces may be split at places that you really do not need, or even want, to
split the mesh. Multi-surface boundaries address this problem. You can use the Geometry
Boundary Surface From Surfaces on Solid command to create boundary surfaces that span
multiple underlying surfaces. In this case, the mesh will only conform to the outer boundary
of the surfaces that you combine, inner surface boundaries and features will be lost. For
Mesh Geometry On Surface...
(6
0
+
,1
*
Geometry
If you create a multi-surface boundary, you can still use the other features, such as Mesh
Approaches, and Mesh Points on Surface to customize the mesh on the boundary. If you
want to create Mesh Points on a multi-surface boundary, they must be “on” the surface.
Other surfaces will work with the projected mesh location, however for multi-surface
boundaries, the Mesh locations must be on the surface.
.
more complex than simple, straight extrusions. To give you some ideas of the types of solids
that FEMAP can and can not mesh, look at the following pictures:
0
+
,1
*
The preceding pictures represent some general solids that can be meshed. FEMAP can mesh
solids where it can identify a “base” and “top” surface that are connected by all four-sided,
mapped meshable surfaces. The base and top surface can be any shape, including surfaces
with holes, and do not even have to be geometrically similar (although the mesh quality may
suffer depending upon how different they are). The base and top surfaces do have to have
similar connectivity, that is, the same number of edges.
During the process of hex meshing sizing, FEMAP identifies the base and top surfaces and
automatically matches (slaves) the mesh on the two surfaces. This is required for successful
hex meshing. The base and top surfaces must produce the same surface mesh, not necessar-
ily the same shape, but the same number of nodes and elements with the same connectivity.
The lateral or side surfaces (everything but base and top) control the mesh “along the length”
of the extrusion. In the simplest case, all are four sided surfaces with one edge on the base
and the opposite edge on the top surface. Often more complicated connections exist but
many can still be meshed. In general, the requirement is that all lateral surfaces must be four-
sided. There must also be a single “path” through the lateral surfaces from each edge of the
base surface, to a corresponding edge on the top surface. If you combine all “paths”, they
Meshing
must cross the lateral surfaces once and only once, and there cannot be any surfaces that are
missed. Some examples of solids that do not meet these requirements are:
Cannot mesh solids with holes in faces other than
The corner of this solid creates three five-sided faces. base and top.
You can split this solid into three six-sided solids
The split on the top faces, combined with the five sided face
prevents identifying a top and bottom surface. To mesh this
part, simply split it into two solids along the line.
The other main problem that leads to non-meshable solids is “sliver” surfaces. These are
small surfaces that are usually generated by inaccuracies in the solid modeling process. If
you have “sliver” surfaces, you will have to remove them before proceeding. The Geometry
Solid Cleanup, or Explode and Stitch commands can often be used to remove these surfaces.
Commands for Subdividing Solids
Most real solids will have to be subdivided before they can be hex meshed. The various
Geometry Solid Slicing and Embedding commands are the primary tools that you have for
cutting your solid. Refer to those commands for more information.
In addition, another approach that is often helpful, especially with complicated solids, is to
use the Geometry Solid Explode command to “explode” the solid into a set of disconnected
surfaces. You can then use the surface modeling tools to add internal surfaces to divide the
region, and use Geometry Solid Stitch to reassemble the pieces. This technique can also be
used to remove undesirable portions of your part.
Mesh Geometry HexMesh Solids
0
those surfaces must have the same number of element divisions. Similarly, this consistent +
sizing must propagate through the model, across the multiple solids that you have created. ,1
*
Once you have properly subdivided your part, the “Size on Solid” command handles all siz-
ing automatically. Simply specify a nominal size. If you need further mesh grading or want
to modify the sizes that “Size on Solid” has created - you must use great care. If you manu-
ally change the mesh size along a curve, you must also manually change the mesh sizes (to
the same settings) on all of the other curves in your solids that must match the first curve to
maintain mapped meshable surfaces. If you do not, FEMAP will not be able to hex mesh
your solids. While you are doing this process, you must make sure that you pick ALL of the
curves. In particular, at the common boundaries where you have sliced solids, there will be
duplicate curves - one on each solid. All of these curves must get the same mesh size.
Hex Meshing
When you choose
this command, you
will first be asked to
define a material for
the mesh (if you have
not defined meshing
attributes on your
solids). This will use
the standard material
creation dialog boxes (refer to Model Material). You will then see the Hex Mesh Solids dia-
log box.
Node and Element Options
Most Node and Element Options were explained in the Mesh Geometry Curve section
above. For this meshing procedure, select a Solid Property, or create a Solid Property with
the New Prop... button. If you do not have any properties defined in your model, FEMAP
automatically creates a solid property which references the active material. The Options but-
ton controls more advanced meshing options. The Options dialog box is identical to that
described below for the Mesh Geometry Solids (for Tet Meshing) command. Most of the
options are unimportant for Hex Meshing, other than the Midside Nodes on Surface options,
which are important if you are meshing with elements that have midside nodes.
Mesh Generation
The options in this section of the dialog box control the actual meshing procedure. If you
choose Surface Mesh Only, only surface elements will be created, not solid elements on the
interior. Choose Midside Nodes if you want to create solids that have midside nodes.
Meshing
If you choose “Merge Nodes on Slaved Surfaces” all nodes on the surfaces that lie between
sliced solids will be merged. This should result in a single fully connected mesh. You should
always use the free face and free edge display, and examine them carefully for any discon-
nections. In some cases, if surfaces are too far apart, nodes will fall outside of the automatic
merge tolerances and you could have gaps in your model. If this happens, use the Tools com-
mands to merge your nodes with a larger tolerance.
If you are not meshing all of your solids at once, you will have to manually merge the nodes.
FEMAP only merges nodes on the solids you are meshing. You can choose to turn off
“Merge Nodes on Slaved Surfaces” if you want to connect surfaces using other means (like
Mesh Connection commands), or to simulate contact conditions.
In most cases FEMAP automatically chooses a mesh smoothing method that produces a
good mesh. If the solid that you are meshing has a high degree of curvature (especially with
a small number of elements) and you want a more evenly spaced mesh, or if you are getting
messages that FEMAP can not produce a valid hex mesh, you might want to try turning on
“Alternate Smoothing”. This method also requires the meshes on the base and top surfaces
be mapped meshes - so you might have to divide your solid further before trying it. Finally,
be aware that the alternate smoothing method is significantly slower than the normal
smoothing approach - but it can solve problems that are otherwise not possible.
Hint:
Take advantage of any symmetry in your geometry when you are slicing. First divide your
(6
0
solid along the lines of symmetry. Then you only need to further subdivide one of the sym-
metric pieces. When you are done subdividing, you can either reflect the solids to recreate +
the entire part, or reflect the resulting mesh. ,1
*
5.1.2.5 HexMesh from Elements...
HexMesh From Elements provides two ways to create a hex mesh out of mapped surface
quads. A hexahedral mesh can be created from a fully enclosed outer bound of mapped sur-
face quads or between a bottom and top mapped region that is connected with straight lines.
Top and Bottom:
To mesh Hexahedral elements between two mapped surfaces, you will be asked to select the
elements on the base of the mesh and then the elements that form the top of the mesh. After
the bottom and top of the mesh have been defined FEMAP will ask you if you would like to
automatically match the top and bottom meshes. In most cases FEMAP will be able to auto-
matically match the top and bottom mesh, by saying No you will be able to choose a node on
the bottom set of elements and a matching node on the top set of elements. This will insure
the extrusion matches the top region of elements. The last question defines how many layers
of elements should be created between the top and bottom regions.
Top Region
Bottom Region
In this case you will first select the elements that form the mapped base region and then you
will be prompted to select all of the elements that form the remainder of the enclosing vol-
ume.
Base Region
Hint:
It is helpful to place the solids that must be manually hex meshed into their own group in
order to simplify the selection of surface elements use, Group Operations Generate Solids.
The only options not described in this section is the Element Shape options. You can specify
between Bricks, Wedges, and Tetra elements, and the type of bias for Wedges and Tetras.
The Bias options are explained in more detail in the Mesh between command section.
(6
0
Hint: +
,1
Volume meshing is typically only used if you have a very regular part and require a mapped *
mesh of Bricks and Wedges. For all other solid parts, it is best to use Mesh Geometry Solids,
Mesh Geometry Solids from Surfaces, or Mesh Geometry Solids from Elements. The solid
tetra mesher provides much more flexibility and robustness than the volume mesher.
Examples
Volume Elements
Simply review and modify the surface mesh as appropriate, and then use the Mesh Geometry
Solids from Elements command to create a solid mesh from this modified surface mesh.
Midside Nodes:
The Midside Nodes option controls whether or not midside nodes are generated in the tetra-
(6
0
hedral mesh. Turn this option on to create midside nodes. You can further control their place-
+
ment (at the exact midside, or on the surfaces of your solid model) by choosing Options ,1
(explained below). *
Hint:
You should almost always leave this option On. 4-Noded Tetrahedral elements can give
inaccurate results. Therefore, unless your analysis program does not support 10-Noded Tet-
rahedral elements, this option should always be checked.
Tet Growth Ratio:
The Tet Growth Ratio allows you to modify the size of the tetrahedral elements based upon
the size of elements in the surface mesh. If the Tet Growth factor is set to one, the size of tet-
rahedral elements formed will be approximately the same as the surface mesh elements. If
this value is set below 1 (minimum of 0.5), the length of the tetrahedral elements formed by
the solid mesher will be smaller than the surface mesh elements. If this value is above 1
(maximum of 100), the tetrahedral elements will be larger than the surface elements. If you
need to form larger or smaller tetrahedral elements than this ratio will allow, simply remesh
the surfaces of the solid with a finer or coarser mesh.
Options
This button allows you to access some advanced mesh-
ing options for the solid mesher. When you select this
button, you will see the Solid Automeshing Options
dialog box. Details of the solid tetrahedral mesher are
controlled here. In general however, you should use the
default settings. They have been chosen based on expe-
riences in developing the solid mesher.
These options are segregated into two major sections:
(1) Solid meshing options, and (2) Status Options. The
functionality associated with each of these options is
described in the following sections.
Solid Meshing Options
These options control the actual meshing procedure.
Check Surface Elements:
This option checks the surface elements that are input
to the solid mesher. Several checks are performed
including (1) element normal directions face in the
same direction, inward or outward (2) no free edges and
Meshing
(3) that there are no interior walls/bulkheads in the model. It is not possible for the volume
mesher to fill a volume that is not completely closed.
Delete Surface Elements:
This option controls whether or not the surface elements that have been generated are
deleted after completion of the solid mesh. If you leave this option off, the surface mesh will
be retained, and you will have both planar and solid elements in your part.
Smooth Solid Elements/Smooth Tolerance:
These options will automatically smooth the tetrahedral elements generated in a solid mesh
to the tolerance specified. Smoothing is more fully described under the Mesh Smooth com-
mand. Basically, smoothing will move the interior nodes of a solid mesh to try to maximize
the smoothness of the elements. This command does not have to be invoked here in the auto-
matic meshing process, but can be executed from FEMAP at any time after automatic mesh-
ing.
Hint:
In general, the solid mesher produces nicely shaped tetrahedral elements so there is no need
for smoothing. This option should almost always be turned off. You can invoke this com-
mand later if required simply by using the Mesh Smooth command.
Midside Nodes on Surface/Limit Distortion/Max Angle:
This option controls whether or not the midside nodes of parabolic tetrahedral elements are
moved onto the edges and surfaces of your solid model, or simply created at the geometric
center of the two adjacent corners of the element. It is best demonstrated with a simple
example.
At Midside
In the case on the left, midside nodes were projected onto the surfaces and edge curves.
Notice the accurate representation of the cylindrical portion of this model since the midside
nodes are actually on the radius of the cylinder. Without midside node projection, the cylin-
drical portion is more faceted, as shown on the right.
(6
0
You can also specify an angular limit to the midside node projection to limit distortion. If the
limit distortion option is On, you must specify an angular limit to the distortion. FEMAP +
,1
will calculate the position of the midside Node on the surface, and then compare the result- *
ing angles with the two corner nodes. If either of these angles is above the specified limit,
FEMAP will recompute a new position for the node on the line between the exact midside
position and the position on the surface, which creates an angle equal to the limit angle. The
following diagram shows an example of this.
Position on Surface
Angle Exceeds
Angular Limit
Final Position
Note:
Please consult with the documentation for your particular analysis program regarding the
placement of midside nodes on parabolic tetrahedral elements. Some codes have limits on
the included angle between the two node to node segments of each edge of the element. An
angle that is too severe can cause significant discrepancies in calculated stresses for that ele-
ment. It is up to you to ensure that the limit angle is within the tolerance imposed by your
solver.
Max Elem
This option controls the allocation of memory for the solid mesher. Larger meshes will
require more memory. If you set this value to 0 (the default), FEMAP will automatically esti-
mate the amount of memory required. If the estimate is not large enough, FEMAP will retry
two more times, each time doubling the memory. The minimum amount of memory allo-
cated for any mesh is equivalent to 50,000 elements. Therefore, most meshes will proceed
without any difficulty.
Meshing
If you specify a number of elements (minimum of 5000), FEMAP will use this number to
allocate memory. If this amount of memory is insufficient, FEMAP will ask you to increase
the number or cancel. You can continue in this loop until you obtain a mesh.
FEMAP will also check the available physical memory to prevent large allocations of
unavailable memory. If the memory allocation exceeds the amount available, FEMAP will
ask you if you want to reduce memory allocation (which will reduce the number of elements
you can create), or go with the current value (which will require swapping to disk and may
significantly slow the process).
Note:
The FEMAP default calculations will work for almost all meshes. When overriding the
defaults, you should be careful to specify a large enough number of elements to finish the
mesh. If you want to limit the mesh to a specific number of elements but FEMAP cannot fin-
ish the mesh simply change the Tet Growth Ratio, or remesh the surfaces with a coarser
mesh.
Status Options
Both of the options in this section control the output of messages and files that can be used in
the rare event that there is a problem generating a particular automatic mesh.
Detailed Status Messages:
Controls output of additional status messages from the tetrahedral meshing engine to the
FEMAP Messages and Lists Window. These messages can help pinpoint exactly where in
the automatic meshing process that a problem has arisen.
Completing the Mesh
Once you have set the desired options, simply hit OK and the solid mesher will produce a
tetrahedral mesh of your part. FEMAP will produce status messages while the tetrahedral
meshing is occurring and provide feedback on element numbers and quality. The following
is a sample list of a typical status message list.
Mesh Geometry Solids
Material 1 Created.
Merging...
Loading Elements...
Loading Tetrahedral Mesher...
Meshing Volume...
-- LOADING SURFACE MESH
NUMBER OF SURFACE NODES 2402
NUMBER OF SURFACE TRIANGLES 4800
-- SURFACE MESH QUALITY
WORST ELEMENT QUALITY 1.393847
BEST ELEMENT QUALITY 1.193572
WORST ELEMENT 2608 2243 2244
ELEMENT QUALITY TABLE
1 < Q < 2 100% 4800 ELEMENTS
Mesh Geometry Solids from Surfaces...
0
WORST ELEMENT QUALITY 4.749431
+
BEST ELEMENT QUALITY 1.000000
,1
ELEMENT QUALITY TABLE *
1 < Q < 2 93% 21552 ELEMENTS
2 < Q < 3 6% 1429 ELEMENTS
3 < Q < 4 0% 4 ELEMENTS
4 < Q < 5 0% 2 ELEMENTS
-- STORING MESH
TOTAL NUMBER OF NODES 5085
NUMBER OF TETRAHEDRA 22987
Finishing Mesh...
Adding Midside Nodes...
Loading Elements...
-- PERFORMANCE
OVERALL : 99654 ELEMENTS/MIN.
MESHING ONLY : 310635 ELEMENTS/MIN.
If you have an assembly of parts, or one part with different materials, you can mesh the dif-
ferent sections as different solids, and then merge the meshes to obtain one mesh. The solid
tetrahedral mesher maintains the original meshes on the surface. Therefore, if you use the
same surface meshes to generate solid meshes on different sides of a surface, the two meshes
will be coincident at that location. You may also use this feature if you have difficulty
obtaining a mesh on one large solid. You can slice this solid into two or more sections, mesh
the sections separately, and then merge the meshes when you have completed the solid mesh.
0
cylindrical coordinates, you can generate between four corners to create a cylinder instead of +
a rectangle. The Gen Clockwise option is only used when you are working in a cylindrical or ,1
spherical coordinate system. It controls whether generation will be done in a clockwise (neg-
*
ative theta) or counter-clockwise (positive theta) direction. Examples of using these options
are given later in this section.
Property and New Prop
The property that you choose is extremely important when you use this command. First, it is
the property that will be assigned to any elements you create. More importantly however, the
type of property that you select controls the type of elements that will be generated. If you
choose a plate property, plate elements will be generated. Choosing a solid property will
generate solid elements. Furthermore, if you chose a parabolic element/property type when
you created the property, this command will generate parabolic elements with midside
nodes. If you did not, linear elements will be created. If you do not have any properties, or if
you do not have the correct property, just press the New Prop button to create a new prop-
erty.
Hint:
If the default property shown is not the one you want, you should always change (or create)
the property first. It controls the activation of many of the other options in this dialog box.
Node and Elem Param
These buttons allow you to set additional parameters for the nodes and elements that you
will create. They access the same dialog boxes as the Parameter buttons found in the Model
Node and Model Element commands. Refer to those commands for more information.
Generate Options
For any generation, you can choose one of the three available options - Nodes, Elements, or
both. When you choose Nodes or Both, you will specify the corner locations that you want
to generate. When you choose Elem, you do not choose corner locations. Instead, you will
choose a starting Node ID, and the Node Increments. Elements will simply be created based
on the ID numbers of the existing nodes. This approach can be used if you had previously
created nodes with this command, or if you have other nodes that follow the same ID pat-
tern. It is usually easiest to use the default option, Both.
Corners
Use this option to choose the type of generation pattern that you want. The available options
will be based on the type of property that you have selected. The following table shows the
available patterns:
Meshing
Property Available
Shape and Corners
Type Corners
Line 2 line
2
Planar 3 triangle,
4 quadrilateral 3 2 4 3
1 1 2
Solid 4T tetra,
5 pyramid, 4 5
6 wedge, 3 2 4 3
8 brick
1 2
1
6 5
8 7
4 5 6
3 2 4 3
1 1 2
be active. For 3 or 4 corners, the first two (Dir 1 and Dir 2) will be active. The solid genera-
tion patterns require all three numbers. Remember, this is the number of nodes, not the num-
ber of elements. The numbers must include the nodes at the corners. For linear elements, the
number of elements in each direction will be one less than the number of nodes that you
choose. If you are going to create parabolic elements, you must always specify an odd num- (6
0
ber of nodes. The number of parabolic elements will be half the number of linear elements. +
,1
Here are some examples: *
4 Corners 3 Corners
4 3 3
1 2 1 2
Dir 1 (5 nodes, 0.5 bias) Dir 1 (6 nodes)
Bias
If you want your nodes and elements to be equally spaced between the corners, just leave the
bias options blank, or specify a bias of 1.0. To control the spacing such that elements at one
end of a pattern are smaller than at the other end, use these options. If you specify a bias of
0.5, the last element along that direction will be one half the size of the first element. Use a
bias of 2 if you want the last element to be twice the size of the first element. In the figure
above, the effect of biasing on a four cornered, quad mesh is shown. If you want to use an
alternate logarithmic bias, check the geometric bias option (provides a smoother transition).
Node Increment
These options are only available when generating planar or solid elements on existing nodes,
by choosing the “Elems” button. In this case, the generation logic will looks for existing
nodes that start with an ID that you specify. The ID increment in the first direction is equal to
the nodal creation increment. This value is normally one, but you can change it by pressing
the “Node Param” button. If you do not specify additional increments, the direction incre-
ment is used to calculate required node IDs in other directions. If your node numbering does
not follow the required pattern, simply specify a different increment in each direction.
For example, if 41 42 43 44 45
you wanted to gen-
erate plate ele- 31 32 33 34 35
ments on this
pattern, you would 21 22 23 24 25
have to specify
that you had a pat- 11 12 13 14 15
tern of 5 nodes by
5 nodes, the start- 1 2 3 4 5
Meshing
ing node was 1, the regular node increment was 1, and the Node Increment in the second
direction was 10. This last entry accounts for the vertical numbering pattern in the picture
(1,11,21,31,41 - an increment of 10).
Element Shape
This group of options controls the shape of the elements that you will create. Only those
shapes that correspond to the type of elements that you are creating will be available. You
can refer to the Model Element command for more information on the available shapes for
each element type.
If you choose to generate quad or brick elements, you will still create some triangles, wedges
or tetras unless you are generating between 4 corners for the quads or between 8 corners for
the bricks. These other elements are required to “fill the tips” of the triangular generation
patterns.
Hint:
Since the Between Corners dialog box is rather large, it is often best to leave the corner
(6
0
nodes blank, even if you are going to select an existing node. The coordinate definition dia-
log boxes will not occupy as much of the screen and it may be easier to select the nodes +
graphically using that approach. ,1
*
First Corner Node
When you are generating elements on existing nodes, the lower portion of the dialog box
will change to allow you to specify the starting node ID in the pattern, rather than the corner
nodes. You can either enter the ID, or select it graphically, but you cannot leave it blank - the
coordinate dialog boxes cannot be used for this method.
“All-Quad” Meshing Option
Normally when you choose the 3, 4T (tetra), 5 or 6 cornered options and a quadrilateral or
brick element shape, mapped meshing requires that you add some triangular (or wedge/tetra)
elements to finish the pattern. That is the case with this command also, unless you meet the
following conditions:
m You must have an odd number of nodes along each parametric direction. All “#Nodes”
entries must be odd numbers. The only exception to this is along the third direction of a
mesh between 6 corners. In that direction, you can have either an odd or even number of
nodes.
m Biasing is not allowed. All entries must be blank or 1.0.
m Generation must be done in a rectangular coordinate system.
m You must generate nodes and elements simultaneously. You cannot use this approach
unless you select the “Both” option.
3
9 by 9 mesh between
3 corners using
All-Quad meshing
1 2
If you follow these guidelines, a final question will be displayed (after you have pressed OK
for the final corner) that asks if you want to use mesh with all quadrilateral elements. If you
answer No, the normal mixed quad/tri, or brick/wedge/tetra mesh will be created. If you
answer Yes however, you will get a mesh that contains only quadrilateral or only brick ele-
ments. For planar elements, the mesh will resemble the picture shown above. The mesh for
solid elements is similar, it just extends into three dimensions.
Meshing
Some Examples
The following pictures show some examples of meshes created with this command.
In Rectangular Coordinates
5
Brick Elements
4 between 6 corners
using All-Quad meshing
3
3
1 2
In Cylindrical Coordinates
Generating between cor-
8 Corners ners in cylindrical coordi-
(1,0,0), (1,180,0), nates works just like
8 Corners (0.6,180,0), (0.6,0,0),
(1,0,2), (1,180,2), rectangular except the pri-
same as other
side, just set (0.6,180,2), (0.6,0,2) mary coordinate directions
Gen Clockwise are not X, Y and Z, but R,
theta and Z. The typical
reason for generating in
cylindrical coordinates is to
create a cylindrical mesh.
As shown in the this exam-
ple, this usually involves
specifying corners that vary in the angular (theta) direction. It is often helpful to visualize
these cylindrical sections as an “unwrapped” or “flat-pattern”.
In Spherical Coordinates
Working in spheri-
Corner 3 at the pole
3 Corners cal coordinates is
(1,90,0), (1,90,360), (1,0,0) the same as cylin-
drical, you just
4 Corners have to remember
(1,120,0), (1,120,60),
(1,60,60), (1,60,0) the orientation of
the coordinate
directions. Proba-
bly the only time
that you will want
to use spherical
coordinates is to
First and Second corners
are coincident, automatically
mesh a spherical
implies full 360 degree rotation dome.
Mesh Region...
0
types. You cannot generate these elements referencing a third node, but you can always
change the orientation with the Modify Update Elements Orientation command. +
,1
5.2.2 Mesh Region... *
... creates a ruled region of nodes and/or elements between patterns of existing nodes. These
patterns can take any shape, but must be compatible with the type of elements you are
attempting to generate between the patterns.
The standard entity selection dialog box is displayed twice to select the nodes in each pat-
tern. Although these are the standard dialog boxes, you must use them in a slightly different
manner. In addition to selecting the nodes, you must follow these guidelines:
m Both patterns must contain the same number of nodes, therefore you must select the
same number of nodes for each dialog box.
m Nodes must be selected in order. This command simply generates nodes and elements
from nodes in the first pattern to nodes in the second. Node IDs do not matter, but selec-
tion order does. The first node is connected to the first, the last to the last. This restriction
makes it practically impossible to use area graphical selections, unless both patterns are
in the same ID order. Individual graphical selections, however can easily be used.
After you select the
node patterns, you
will see the dialog
box shown here. The
top of this dialog box
is identical to the
generation options
used for the Mesh
Between command.
Refer to that section
for more information. Just remember that the property should always be chosen first as it
sets up many of the other options in the dialog box. Also, the GenClockwise option controls
the direction of the generation between the two end patterns selected.
Generate
These options allow you to choose whether to generate Nodes or both Nodes and Elements
between the selected node patterns. Usually you will want to generate both nodes and ele-
ments, but if you choose Nodes, the node IDs that are generated are compatible with the
requirements of the Mesh Between command for generating just elements on existing nodes.
You can use that command to add elements to the nodes at a later time.
This command always generates a coincident set of nodes on top of the original nodes in
your patterns so node numbering will be consistent with the Generate Between command.
Meshing
Between Ends
The #Nodes option specifies how many nodes will be generated in the direction between the
selected node patterns. This number includes the nodes already in the selected patterns, not
just the nodes between the patterns. For example, if you specify #Nodes as 3, this means the
two nodes in the patterns and one additional node between the patterns. Bias controls the
spacing of the generated nodes between the patterns. As in Mesh Between, a 1.0 (or 0.0) bias
chooses equal spacing. Values less than one mean that the last element (closest to the second
pattern) will be smaller than the first. Values greater than one reverse that spacing.
Element Shape
These options are just like those for the Mesh Between command. Refer to that section for
more information. You will note however that you cannot choose a line shape since line ele-
ments cannot be generated with this command.
End Nodes
By default, this
Start Pattern
12
command is setup
9
to generate planar
End Pattern
11 elements. By choos-
6
8 ing a solid element
10 5 3
7 property, you can
4 2
also use this com-
1
mand to create solid
Numbers show
selection order, Choose Solid property elements, if the
not node IDs Set #Nodes = 5, original nodes
Dir 2 = 3 and Dir 3 = 4
formed four-cor-
nered patterns. In
this case however, you must specify additional information about the patterns of selected
nodes. The Dir 2 and Dir 3 options define the “layout” of those patterns. Specify the number
of nodes along the first edge of the pattern as Dir 2 and number of nodes along the other pat-
tern direction as Dir 3. Dir 2 times Dir 3 must equal the total number of nodes in the pattern.
Other Example
7 When generating planar ele-
Start Pattern 5 6
4 4 nodes along ments using this command,
3
2
generation direction follow the conventions
shown here.
1
Note that the patterns can be
Numbers show
any shape, but are chosen “in
6 7
selection order, 5 order” along an edge. If you
not node IDs 4
3
choose them in random
2 End Pattern order, this command will not
1 work.
Mesh Connection
0
method of loads transfer from one section of the model to the next. The major difference in
each command is how the sets of nodes are created, and what type of entities can be created. +
,1
The specifics for each command will be provided under the individual descriptions below, *
but first we will examine the commonalities among these commands.
All four commands use the iden-
tical dialog box shown here,
although the Connection Type
may change based upon the
command. The Node and Ele-
ment Options contain the stan-
dard information for any
meshing procedure.
If you select Constraint Equa-
tions or Rigid Elements, you
must select the DOFs to con-
nect. One constraint equation
will be created for each DOF checked with a coefficient values of 1 and -1 for the primary
and secondary node, respectively. For Rigid Elements, only one rigid element will be created
for each node pair since this one element can reference any combination of DOFs. The effect
of either of these options is the same, therefore you should check your analysis program to
see if rigid elements and/or constraint equations are supported to select the type.
The Line Element selection does not require DOFs to be chosen (in fact they will be grayed),
but you must select a Line Element under Property. If you do not have a line property in your
model, simply hit New Prop... to create one. When exiting this command via OK, FEMAP
will create line elements between the nodes by using the property that you select. The type of
element created is based upon the line property.
As mentioned above, the major difference between the commands on the Mesh Connection
menu is the method to obtain the nodes to generate the connections. Each of these four com-
mands, Closest Link, Multiple, Unzip, and Coincident are explained below.
To Nodes
You will notice, however, that if you are limited in the type of line element to specify for the
connection. Since the nodes are coincident, you must select an element that can be zero
length, such as a DOF spring or GAP element. If you choose either of these options, you
must also pick a corresponding property. If you select Gap Elements, you will also need to
define an Orientation Vector. (6
0
+
5.2.3.4 Mesh Connection Coincident Link... ,1
... is very similar to the Mesh Connection Unzip command described above, except it is used *
on meshes that have not been merged, or have been previously “unzipped”. The user simply
selects a group of nodes and a Coincident Tolerance value below which nodes are considered
coincident and FEMAP will create the requested entities at any coincident nodes.
The choices for the type of connection are identical to the Unzip command above (except for
the None option) since this command again forms connections that are zero length.
Alternately, if the missing nodes lie along a straight line between other nodes, you can use
the “Elements Along Edge” options to generate one or more additional nodes between the
From and To nodes. This is most helpful if you are using this command to generate a sepa-
rate mesh that does not connect to existing nodes. You can then just choose the corner nodes
and create additional nodes along the edges without specifying each one individually.
These options work just like the Mesh Mesh Control commands. You can either specify a
number of elements between the corners or an element size. The size will not be used unless
the number is zero or blank. The distance between the corners is used with the size to com-
pute the required number of elements. Biasing works just like all other generation com-
mands. A bias of 1.0 implies uniform spacing. A bias less than one puts the smallest
elements at the “To” node. A bias greater than one puts the smallest elements at the “From”
node. If you specify both a bias and a size, the size will be adjusted slightly to keep the cor-
rect number of elements with the desired bias.
Generation Options
After you choose “Close Boundary” you will see the same options dialog used for the Mesh
Geometry Surface command described above. All options are exactly the same for this com-
mand. As before, you probably will just want to use the default options and press OK
Examples
These figures show some typical uses of this command. While you could conceivably use
this command to generate very complex areas, it is intended to handle these simpler tasks. If
you need very complicated boundaries, it is usually simpler to define geometry.
Transition elements
Hint:
If you are selecting nodes for the boundary graphically, just point and double-click them
(6
0
(instead of single-clicking). This will select the node and automatically press “More” so you
can go on and select additional nodes. +
,1
*
5.3 Modifying a Mesh
Previous commands on the Mesh menu contained commands for creating a mesh. This sec-
tion of the menu contains command for modifying a mesh, whether it be to refine, unrefine,
smooth, or remesh particular elements. These tools can be very useful to smooth or remesh
small areas of meshes, especially if the original mesh was produced over a large area. In gen-
eral, smoother meshes will be obtained, and remeshing will produce excellent results when
small areas of the mesh are connected.
Hint:
You can still use this command on elements that are nonplanar, especially over small areas.
After you have remeshed, the new locations will most likely not be on the surface. Simply
use Modify Project Node Onto Surface to move these nodes back to the surface. If you have
remeshed a small region, the mesh should contain little or no distortion from this projection.
After picking the
elements to refine,
you will see the
dialog box shown
here. The com-
mand originally
chosen will be the
default, but you could change your mind at this point and select one of the other options.
Refining a Mesh
If you choose the “Refine elements” option, additional nodes are added between nodes you
choose later. The Refinement Ratio determines how many nodes are added. The default of 2
means one new node is created between each node you select for refinement. This doubles
the number of elements. Choosing 3 will add two nodes, and switch from 1 to 3 elements.
Original Refined
After you choose
OK, you will see the
Original nodes and
Refine 4 elements elements were deleted
standard entity selec-
tion dialog box so
you can choose the
nodes on the edges to
refine. Additional
nodes will only be
added between
selected nodes. Typi-
Choose these nodes
for 2 to 1 refinement cally, you will want
to choose nodes on a
free boundary since the refined mesh will not join with any adjacent mesh.
Note:
When you refine an edge, the new nodes are placed along a straight line between the original
edge nodes. If you are trying to refine a curved edge, you must use the Modify Project Node
commands to adjust the position of the new nodes after they are created.
Update/Remesh
The remeshing option is used in the same way as the refine option, except that you do not
specify any nodes for refinement. All nodes on the original boundary will be matched “1 to
Mesh Remesh Refine, Update, Unrefine...
1” by the nodes in the updated mesh. The only time that you will want to use this option is
when attempting to “clean-up” an existing mesh.
Unrefining a Mesh
The Unrefine option allows you to automatically coarsen an existing mesh. For this option,
(6
0
you must specify both the Refinement Ratio and the Break Angle. For example, a refinement
+
ratio of 2, means that the mesh will be halved (i.e. times 2) in refinement. A refinement ratio ,1
of 3 will remove every third node. During the unrefinement process, FEMAP will remove *
every other node around the periphery of the elements selected. To insure that no important
features, like corners, are removed in this process the Break Angle must be set.
FEMAP will automatically retain any nodes on the boundary where the angle between the
edges of the adjacent element edges exceeds the Break Angle. As a simple example, a square
would exhibit an edge angle of 90 degrees at the corners, and zero everywhere along the
sides. If you set the break angle less than 90 degrees FEMAP would automatically find and
keep all of the corner nodes during the remeshing.
Finally, you will be asked to select
the nodes where unrefinement Initial Mesh
you push the button, you will see the standard entity selection dialog box. Here you can
choose nodes that you want to remove from the boundary. By default, all nodes that are on
the free edges of the element you chose are considered to be on the boundary. The nodes you
select here are then removed. Great care must be used in selecting these nodes or you could
cause a portion of the existing mesh to be skipped when you are remeshing.
Generation Options
After you choose the refinement options and nodes you will see the same options dialog that
is used for the Generate Boundary Mesh command, as described above. All options are
exactly the same for this command. As before, you probably will just want to use the default
options and press OK. If you want more information about changing these options refer back
to the Mesh Geometry Surface command.
For this command, you may want to adjust these options to reduce the allowable aspect ratio
and turn off “Quick-Cut”. Even when you are remeshing, you can change these options.
Remeshing just maintains the same mesh density along the boundaries, not necessarily
between the boundaries.
of stereolithography files, future surface and solid meshes that will be generated). Consider
the sample Stereolithography file above.
You will notice several facets of the STL mesh that contain extremely short edges. Unless
you intend to mesh the overall part to this level of refinement, they must be removed. The
(6
0
Mesh Remesh Edge Removal command can be used to remove the short edge at the tip of
our sample model, +
,1
The AutoRemesh Delete Edges Dialog Box prompts *
you for two nodes. Select the node that you want to
keep first (as the From Node), and then select the
node to be deleted (as the To Node). FEMAP will
delete the second node, the two elements that were attached to that edge, and close the gap,
updating all affected elements to reference the first node.
The results of removing the edge at the tip of this model is:
By deleting more of the short edges the model can quickly be transformed to:
While this process is not difficult, it can still be very time consuming in a model with many
short edges. This process, however, is automated by the Mesh Remesh Cleanup Slivers com-
mand where you simply specify an edge length and angle value and all edges below those
values are automatically deleted.
even let you directly specify the angle tolerance used in creating the STL facets. If the angle
tolerance you specify is too high, the curved areas of your model will lose geometric accu-
racy during remeshing. Again consider our example problem. By specifying a high angle tol-
erance for region construction, facets in the curved area of the model are grouped together
too coarsely:
Region of Interest
In the region identified in the figure at the top left above, a high angle tolerance has grouped
together four facets of the original mesh in the region of interest. Subsequent remeshing of
these regions results in elements that deviate significantly from the original surfaces. By
using a smaller angle tolerance, this region will be split in the middle, and the resulting sur-
face mesh will more closely approximate the original faceted surface definition (as shown to
the right).
The Build Regions command will automatically place elements of each region in their own
layer. Once Build Regions has been completed, FEMAP will also change the display to a full
hidden line plot with element fill turned on, and with the elements colored by their respec-
tive layer. This brightly colored, segmented representation of your model may not be pretty,
but it does enable you to quickly identify how the individual regions are being grouped. You
can further explore the grouping by turning on Layer Numbers (View Options, Element
Number by Layer ID) or by selectively displaying only certain layers using the Layer Man-
agement capabilities.
Mesh Remesh Edit Remeshing Regions...
0
sible regions for remeshing, but occasionally you might want to adjust these regions manu-
ally. +
,1
The best example for wanting to use Edit Remeshing Regions is when a region contains only *
a single triangular face from the original mesh. In this case, during remeshing, the FEMAP
Boundary Mesher will be presented with a triangular area to remesh. Triangular regions with
a fairly steep aspect ratio will remesh with poorly shaped elements. Another example
(although less frequently encountered), is when a relatively large, rectangular region has a
single sliver face protruding from, or into one of its edges. In this case, it is usually helpful to
move the sliver into the adjacent region.
When you choose this command, you will see the AutoRemesh Edit Regions dialog box.
First, you should choose the element that you want to move to a new region (Move Elem),
then select any element that is in the region that you want to move into (To Region with
Elem). You can only select regions that are already adjacent to the element that you are try-
ing to update. This prevents accidentally creating regions that are not connected.
Hint:
The discrete regions of your original mesh will be displayed in different colors, but it is often
difficult to pick the exact elements you wish to modify with the Edit Remeshing Regions
command. To make this easier, Use View Options, and change the following options to make
element picking and visualization easier:
1. Labels, Entities, Colors Category: Select the Label Parameters Option, and change the
Color Mode to option 2, Entity, Erase Background.
2. Again from the Labels, Entities, Color Category: Select the Element Option, and change
the Label Mode to Option 1, ID. Press OK in the View Options Dialog Box to return to
STL Remesh.
All elements will now be drawn with their ID readily visible. When picking elements in the
Edit Regions command, aim for the element number. Just like all FEMAP picking com-
mands, the centroid is the deciding factor in selection, and the label is drawn at the centroid
of the element.
mesh density that will be used to split any long edges of regions. The top face of our exam-
ple STL file serves as an excellent demonstration of this command.
Both Build Remeshing Regions and Mesh Remeshing Regions will create and keep elements
associated with each region on their own unique level in FEMAP. This makes it possible to
use the View Layers Command to isolate discrete regions of your model if you wish to
manipulate the face mesh manually before moving on the meshing the interior with solid
elements.
If you chose to create elements that require an orientation, FEMAP will display the standard
vector definition dialog box so you can define an orientation vector. It is usually best to ori-
ent the vector normal to the plane of the elements that you are framing. Using this approach
will eliminate the possibility of placing orientation vectors along the length of the elements.
(6
0
If you want to specify a
nodal orientation, off- +
,1
sets, releases, or other *
element options, use the
appropriate Modify
Update Element com-
Original Plate Elements
mands after you create
the line elements.
Finally, you will see the
standard entity selection
box again. This time, Beam Edge Members
however, you must select Offsets have been added
for clarity in this picture
the nodes where you
want the edge members
to be generated.
If you want edge mem-
bers around all of the ele- Plate Edge Members
ments that you selected, along the top surface of
solid elements. Element
select all nodes and press Shrink used for clarity.
OK. If instead you just
want edge members in
one area, just select the
nodes in that area. This is
especially important if
you are generating planar
elements on free faces of
solids. You should select
all of the nodes on the
surface where you want
to generate the planar elements. Box picking is often very convenient for doing these selec-
tions.
Note:
If you only want to create 2-D plates on one side of a set of solids, select interior nodes (i.e.
no corners on the free edges). If you select these nodes, FEMAP will create faces on the cor-
responding free faces along that boundary. In the example above, only the 9 interior face
nodes where selected, not all 25 nodes.
Meshing
Fixing Nodes
If you are smoothing a mesh that contains some interior nodes that must stay in the present
location, press “Fix Nodes”. You can then add those nodes to the list of nodes on the bound-
ary, using the standard entity selection dialog box. You can also remove boundary nodes
(6
0
from the list to allow them to move from their current position.
+
If you fix the positions of some nodes in this manner, the mesh will not be fully smoothed. ,1
The elements around those nodes may still have substantial distortions. *
Meshing
When you are copying nodes, only the “Parameters”, “Update Every Repetition”, and “Rep-
etitions” controls are active. The other controls are used by the Generate Copy Elements
Mesh Copy Node...
command. Finally, after you set the options, and press OK, you will see the standard vector
definition dialog box. This vector defines both the direction and distance from the selected
nodes to the first copy. If you specify multiple repetitions, each additional copy will be
located along the same vector, at the same distance from the previous copy. Optionally, you
can specify a new vector for each repetition by selecting the “Update Every Repetition” (6
0
option. +
,1
Specifying Generation Options *
The generation options control how many copies FEMAP will make, and choose parameters
for the resulting nodes. You have the following choices:
Parameters:
These two choices select the parameters that will be assigned to the nodes that are generated.
These include the definition coordinate system, output coordinate system, permanent con-
straints, color and layer. If you select Use Current Settings, the node parameters will match
the active node parameters. This is the same as if you had created new nodes using the Cre-
ate Node command. If instead, you choose Match Original Entities, each new node will
exactly match the parameters of the node that was copied to create it.
Repetitions:
By default this option is one. One repetition will create one copy of each selected node. If
you want multiple copies, just set this option to the number you want.
Update Every Repetition:
When this option is off, FEMAP will only ask you for one vector that will be used to posi-
tion the copies. In this mode, FEMAP will always offset the position of the current repetition
from the position of the previous repetition, based on the direction and length of the vector
that you define. If you select the Update Every Repetition option however, FEMAP will ask
you for a new vector before every repetition. This new vector will be used to offset from the
original nodes that you selected, not from the previous repetition. You will want to check
this option whenever you want to create multiple copies that do not lie along a single vector.
5 10 15 20
Original Nodes
4 9 14 19
3 8 13 18
2 7 12 17
1 6 11 16
Make 3 copies
along this vector
to create a copy in a rotated location by choosing the angular direction in a cylindrical coor-
dinate system. You must use the rotation commands to create rotated copies.
5 10 15 20
Make 2 copies
Original Elements 4 8 12
onto existing nodes
4 9 14 19
with the Node Increment
3 7 11
set to 5.
3 8 13 18
2 6 10
2 7 12 17
1 5 9
1 6 11 16
If you do not check Use Existing Nodes, FEMAP will copy the elements that you selected,
along with all nodes that they reference. FEMAP will display the standard vector definition
dialog box, just like in Mesh Copy Node to let you define the direction and distance that you
want to offset each copy. You do not have to create any nodes before using this option. Fur-
ther, unlike copying to existing nodes, it is independent of node or element numbering.
You probably will want to use this technique most of the time. When you do copy elements
using this technique however, each repetition gets its own set of nodes. This can result in
Mesh Radial Copy Menu
duplicate, but coincident nodes, and a model that is disconnected. You can connect the ele-
ments and eliminate the duplicate nodes with the Tools Check Coincident Nodes command.
5 10 33 38 43 48
(6
4 16 20
Original Elements
0
4 9 32 37 42 47
+
3 15 19 ,1
3
2
8 31
14
36 41
18
46
*
2 7 30 35 40 45
1 13 17
1 6 29 34 39 44
Make 2 copies
along vector
Parameters:
These options work just as they do in the Mesh Copy Node command. If you choose Use
Current Settings, the nodes and elements that are created will match the currently active
parameters. For elements, this includes the property ID, element type, color and layer. The
one exception to this is if the active element type or active property is incompatible with the
elements that you are copying. In this case, the element type or property will still match the
original elements.
For example, if the active element type is a beam, and you are copying plates, FEMAP can-
not make the plates into beams and therefore makes the copies as plates - even though you
specified Use Current Settings. If you choose Match Original Entities, the copied element
parameters will match the elements that were used to create them.
Repetitions:
By default this option is one. One repetition will create one copy of each selected element. If
you want multiple copies, just set this option to the number you want.
Update Every Repetition:
Refer to Mesh Copy Node for more information. This option is not available when you
check “Use Existing Nodes”.
Copy
FEMAP will compute a direction vector for each
entity which runs from the center that you chose, to
the entity, as shown here.
Original
In a three dimensional case, these commands are
actually a spherical copy, since the copy vector is
computed from the “center of the sphere”.
When you choose the Mesh Radial Copy Elements
Center
Radial Vectors Offset command, the radial vectors are computed to each of
the defining nodes. The copied nodes are then simply
reconnected to create the copied entities.
For more information regarding the specifics of using the various generation options refer
back to the similar Mesh Copy command.
For more information regarding the specifics of using the various generation options refer
back to the similar Mesh Copy command. Refer to the Modify Scale commands for more
information on specifying scaling factors.
(6
0
Note: +
,1
If you use a scale factor of 1.0, the resulting copy will be located at the same location as the *
original in that coordinate direction. Scale Factors of (1.0, 1.0, 1.0) will result in a com-
pletely coincident copy of the originals.
3 copies rotated
90 degrees each
around the normal
to this view
Original Elements
0
however, you will select
elements to be reflected +
across a plane. You must ,1
*
select the elements to be
reflected, the reflection
options, and the reflec-
tion plane.
Original Elements Reflected Elements
You can Reflect onto
existing nodes rather than across a plane by choosing the Use Existing Nodes option. This
option is somewhat misnamed however, since the generated copy is really not a reflection
since its position is based purely on the position of the nodes that you “reflect” onto - not on
any position of the original elements. The only difference between using this command and
Mesh Copy Elements with existing nodes is that elements will have their normals reversed
just as if you had reflected the elements and nodes.
If you choose to reflect elements and nodes (by not turning on Use Existing Nodes), you can
set the Trap Width to a nonzero value to automatically join the new elements to the old. This
will only work if some nodes from the original elements lie within the Trap Width from the
reflection plane.
5.5 Extrude/Revolve
The commands on the Mesh Extrude and Mesh Revolve menu allow you to convert a 2-D
model (curves or elements) into a 3-D model of planar or solid elements. They are very use-
ful for 3-D solid parts which have a consistent third dimension (whether it be an axis of rota-
tion or a length). The functionality of these commands are explained below.
the original curves were connected. Therefore, if you are trying to generate a connected
group of elements (with no coincident nodes) it is always best to select a connected bound-
ary in an ordered sequence around the boundary.
After you select the
curves, you will
see the Generation
Options dialog
box.This dialog
box provides two
methods of creat-
ing your elements:
(1) Standard, which
simply uses this
dialog box, and (2) Advanced, which is accessed by pressing the Advanced>> button. Each
of these methods are discussed below.
Standard Extrusion
Standard extrusions are used to simply extrude the curves a constant distance along a vector.
You must choose the property to be used for the planar elements and the total number of Ele-
ments along Length as shown in the above dialog box. The type of elements that are created
is based on the type of property that you select. For example, choose a plate property to cre-
ate plate elements, a laminate property to create laminate elements, and so on. If you do not
have any planar element properties, choose New Property to create one. Specify the number
of elements that you want along the extrusion vector in the “Elements along Length” box
before you press OK.
Once you press OK, FEMAP will prompt you to specify the extrusion vector using the stan-
dard vector dialog boxes. The vector can be located anywhere but must have the direction
and magnitude that you want for the extrusion. The length of this vector will be the total
length of the extruded elements. Also remember, the same vector will be used for all selected
curves so in general it should be relatively normal to the “plane” of the curves (although the
curves do not have to be planar).
The following picture shows one example of extruding a connected set of curves.
Original Curves
Extruded Elements
Mesh Extrude Curve...
Advanced Extrusion
The Advanced>> button provides access to the Generation Options dialog box for advanced
extrusions. This dialog box controls the different methods of extrusion. Each area of the dia-
log box will be explained more fully below, but first a quick explanation of the overall pro-
(6
0
cedure is necessary.
+
,1
*
Operation
The Advanced option can be used to extrude along one or more vectors or curves. You can
specify mesh biasing for the extrusion, as well as offsets from the original curves. The Offset
and Along areas next to OK and Cancel provide status information on their current settings.
If no method (Along or Follow Curve) has been specified, the OK option will be grayed and
Along will show Must Specify, as seen above.
The sample below shows a rectangle which was extruded into plate elements by extruding
along a spline. You will notice that the mesh both follows the spline, as well as gets finer in
the area of curvature due to the specified mesh sizing on the spline.
You can even do multi-level extrusions with different properties. The dialog box will con-
tinue to repeat each time you hit OK. Once the first extrusion is created, FEMAP will auto-
matically update the offset so that it corresponds to the location of the end of the previous
extrusion. If you need to make several levels of extrusions with different properties, simply
input the appropriate parameters for each extrusion and pick a different property.
Meshing
Note:
FEMAP does not automatically merge coincident nodes of multi-level extrusions. There are
times when you may want to keep coincident nodes to simulate contact or other interface
conditions. If you do want to merge all coincident nodes, simply use the Tools Check Coin-
cident Nodes command after the extrusion is complete to merge the extrusions together.
Property
For each extrusion, you must choose a planar property. If you do not have a planar property
in your model, you can hit New Property to select one. You can create a multi-level extru-
sion of different properties simply by picking a different property for each extrusion pass.
Extrusion Vectors
The four options in this section of the dialog box allow you to specify the vector for extru-
sion. There are two modes of extrusion: Along a vector and Follow Curve. If you choose
Along a vector, you must specify the vector through the standard Vector Definition dialog
box. The Follow Curve option requires selection of a curve.
The vector option provides access to the Extrusion Distance and Elements section of the dia-
log box to define the length and mesh sizing. When you extrude along a curve, however,
these options are grayed. The distance and mesh sizing for the extrusion is obtained from the
curve you selected to follow and its mesh spacing. Therefore, it is very important to define
the mesh size on the selected curve before performing the extrusion to guarantee that you get
the desired mesh.
The Offset option allows you to specify an offset via the standard Vector Definition dialog
box. This offset defines the vector from the original curves to the start of the extrusion. Nor-
mally you will not specify offsets manually, unless your curves are not located where you
want to start the extrusion. If you are creating a multi-level extrusion, the offsets will be
automatically updated at the end of each individual extrusion, so that the next one starts
where the last one ended. If you want to create a discontinuous mesh, you can update the off-
sets manually before extruding again. If you want to remove any offset, simply hit Reset
Offset.
Extrusion Distance and Elements
If the extrusion is to take place along a vector, the Extrusion Distance and Elements area of
the dialog box must be specified. This section determines the overall length and mesh sizing
of the extrusion. The mesh sizing is defined similar to any mesh sizing on a curve. Simply
specify the total number of elements and a bias factor. There are three options available to
define the total length of the extrusion:
1. Use Vector Length - uses the length of the vector that you defined for the total extrusion
length.
2. Locate - The extrusion length is calculated from start of the extrusion to a defined loca-
tion. If you choose this method, you will be asked to define the location (with the standard
coordinate dialog) when you press OK to create the extrusion. If the location that you
specify is not along the extrusion vector, it is projected onto that vector, before the length
Mesh Extrude Element...
is computed. This method is a good one to use if you are trying to match another existing
mesh, or geometry. You can simply pick nodes or points for the location to extrude to,
without worrying about the actual dimensions.
3. Distance - this method requires direct specification of the extrusion length. The vector
(6
0
length is ignored, in favor of the distance you specify here. This method is a good one if
you have a series of extrusions, along the same vector, and you know the distances or +
,1
“stations” where you want the extrusions to end. You never need to redefine the vector, *
just keep specifying new distances.
Note:
This command always creates linear elements, you cannot create parabolic elements simply
by selecting a parabolic property. You can however convert the linear elements to parabolics
after they are created by using the Modify Update Elements Order command.
if you want to automatically delete the original elements that are being extruded. Finally,
press OK and then define the extrusion vector using the standard Vector Definition dialog
box. The selected elements will be extruded along this vector direction. The magnitude of
the vector will be the extrusion length.
These pictures
Extrude as Solids show two extru-
Extrusion vector sions, one of line
Extrude as Plates 4 elements
along length
elements, the other
of planar ele-
ments. Both used
the same extrusion
vector. All ele-
5 elements ments are shown
along length
with “element
Original Line Elements
shrink” turned on,
Original Plate Elements
so that you can see
both the original and generated elements.
Alternate Extrusion Methods
When you are
Original Planar Elements extruding planar
Extruded with
Thickness Correction
elements, you will
have two addi-
tional methods
available: extrud-
ing along the ele-
ment normal
directions, and
extruding along
the element nor-
mal directions
with thickness
corrections. Both
of these methods use the normal vectors at each node to determine the extrusion direction.
As shown here, this can be used to quickly take a surface model and turn it into a solid ele-
ment model.
The Element normal method simply extrudes along the element normals by the extrusion
length that you specify. This method will result in the distance between all inner and outer
nodes being equal to the extrusion length. In areas where the planar elements are not “copla-
nar” however, the resulting element thicknesses will not be constant, and in general will be
Mesh Extrude Element...
less than the extrusion length. For this reason, it is usually best to choose the final method
that includes thickness corrections.
(6
0
+
,1
*
with thickness correction
Extrude
By choosing the Normals with Thickness Correction method, FEMAP attempts to adjust the
extrusion length at each node to make the resulting element thicknesses at that node equal to
the extrusion length. This will typically result in the distance between the inner and outer
nodes being greater than the distance you specified.
If your plates are at the midplane of where you want the solids, you will have to use this
command twice. One time, you will specify a positive extrusion length (along the positive
element normal). Then use a negative extrusion length (along the negative element normal).
Note:
It is up to you to prepare your plate elements with all of their normals pointing in a consis-
tent direction prior to using this command. FEMAP assumes you want to use the normal
direction that you defined. You can use Modify Update Reverse or Tools Check Normals to
adjust element normals. The View Options command can be used to display normal vectors.
Meshing
Advanced Extrusion
The Advanced>> option provides access to the Generation Options dialog box for advanced
extrusions which controls the different methods of extrusion. Each area of the dialog box is
explained more fully below, but the overall procedure is explained first.
Operation
The Advanced option can be used to extrude along a vector or curve. You can also specify
mesh biasing for the extrusion, as well as offsets from the original curves. The Offset and
Along areas next to OK and Cancel provide status information on their current settings. If no
method (Along or Follow Curve) has been specified, the OK option will be grayed and
Along will show Must Specify, as seen above.
The sample below shows a rectangular plate mesh which was extruded into solid elements
by extruding along a spline. You will notice that the mesh both follows the spline, as well as
gets finer in the area of curvature due to the specified mesh sizing on the spline.
Solid Extruded Elements
Planar Elements
You can even do multi-level extrusions with different properties. The dialog box will con-
tinue to repeat each time you hit OK. Once the first extrusion is created, FEMAP will auto-
matically update the offset so that it corresponds to the location at the end of the previous
extrusion. If you need to make several levels of extrusions with different properties, simply
input the appropriate parameters for each extrusion and pick the selected property.
Mesh Extrude Element...
Note:
FEMAP does not automatically merge coincident nodes of multilevel extrusions since there
are times when you want to keep coincident nodes to simulate contact or other interface con- (6
0
ditions. If you do want to merge all coincident nodes, simply use the Tools Check Coincident +
Nodes command after the extrusion is complete to sew the extrusions together. ,1
*
Parameters
You can select whether the new entities will use current settings or match the values for the
original entities. For each extrusion, you must also choose a property. This must be either a
planar property if extruding line elements, or a solid property if extruding plate elements. If
you do not have an appropriate property in your model, you can hit New Property to select
one. You can create a multi-level extrusion of different properties simply by picking a differ-
ent property for each extrusion pass.
Extrusion Vectors
The four options in this section of the dialog box allow you to specify the vector for extru-
sion. There are two modes of extrusion: Along a vector and Follow Curve. If you choose
Along a vector, you must specify the vector through the standard Vector Definition dialog
box. The Follow Curve option requires selection of a curve.
The vector option provides access to the Extrusion Distance and Elements section of the dia-
log box to define the length and mesh sizing. When you extrude along a curve, however,
these options are grayed. The distance and mesh sizing for the extrusion is obtained from the
curve you selected to follow and its mesh spacing. Therefore, it is very important to define
the mesh size on the selected curve before performing the extrusion to guarantee that you get
the desired mesh.
The Offset option allows you to specify an offset via the standard Vector Definition dialog
box. This offset defines the vector from the original curves to the start of the extrusion. Nor-
mally you will not specify offsets manually, unless your curves are not located where you
want to start the extrusion. If you are creating a multi-level extrusion, the offsets will be
automatically updated at the end of each individual extrusion, so that the next one starts
where the last one ended. If you want to create a discontinuous mesh, you can update the off-
sets manually before extruding again. If you want to remove any offset, simply hit Reset
Offset.
Hint:
You can tell the current offset value and extru-
sion method by examining values of Offset and
Along. These values are dynamically updated
every time you or FEMAP changes the informa-
tion. The Offset will either be No Offset, or the
Meshing
offset vector (x, y, z Global). The Along option will be Must Specify, the extrusion vector (x,
y, z Global), or the Curve ID. If Must Specify is the Along option, the OK button will be
grayed until you choose Along or Follow Curve to specify the extrusion method.
Extrusion Distance and Elements
If the extrusion is to take place along a vector, the Extrusion Distance and Elements area of
the dialog box must be specified. This section determines the overall length and mesh sizing
of the extrusion. The mesh sizing is defined similar to any mesh sizing on a curve. Simply
specify the total number of elements and a bias factor. There are three options available to
define the total length of the extrusion:
1. Use Vector Length - uses the length of the vector that you defined for the total extrusion
length.
2. Locate - The extrusion length is calculated from start of the extrusion to a defined loca-
tion. If you choose this method, you will be asked to define the location (with the standard
coordinate dialog) when you press OK to create the extrusion. If the location that you
specify is not along the extrusion vector, it is projected onto that vector, before the length
is computed. This method is a good one to use if you are trying to match another existing
mesh, or geometry. You can simply pick nodes or points for the location to extrude to,
without worrying about the actual dimensions.
3. Distance - this method requires direct specification of the extrusion length. The vector
length is ignored, in favor of the distance you specify here. This method is a good one if
you have a series of extrusions, along the same vector, and you know the distances or
“stations” where you want the extrusions to end. You never need to redefine the vector,
just keep specifying new distances.
You should not select any curves that cross the vector that you plan to revolve around. If you
do, those curves will generate twisted elements since each end of the curve would revolve in
a different direction. This command makes no allowance for generating triangular elements
in the middle of a curve to eliminate this restriction. You can, on the other hand, choose
curves that have endpoints on the axis of revolution. These curves will automatically create (6
0
triangular elements (instead of quadrilaterals) at those endpoints. +
,1
After you have selected the curves to revolve, you must specify the generation options. This *
is identical to the Mesh Extrude Curves command, and you should refer back to that section
for more information. Next, the standard vector dialog box is used to define the axis of revo-
lution. Unlike the extrude commands, the magnitude of this vector is not important, but its
location and direction are important. The relationship between the location of the vector and
the curves you selected determines how the elements will be created.
Finally, you must specify the angle of rotation and the distance to translate along the axis of
revolution. These values are just like those specified for the Mesh Rotate commands, except
you specify the total angle and total distance, not the values per iteration. The following pic-
ture shows the result of revolving a series of curves (no translation distance was specified).
Quadrilateral
Mesh Size controls Elements
elements along curves
Axis of Revolution
Triangular
Elements
Finally, set the total rotation angle, and the translation distance (along the axis of revolu-
tion). Both of these quantities are input as the total values for the entire revolution.
Axis of
Revolution
Axis of
Revolution
move a Node or Point. FEMAP will not update or destroy the hidden line or free edge dis-
play lists since rebuilding them involves significant computations. It is up to you to choose
the View Regenerate command whenever you want FEMAP to calculate a new hidden line
or free edge display. Conversely, for many modifications (zoom, pan, color, layer, small
position changes...) you can still choose View Redraw and save a large portion of the time
required for these displays.
Regenerating Multiple Windows Ctrl+Shift+G
If you have multiple graphics windows on your screen, and “All Views” is set, they will all
be regenerated. In addition, no matter how “All Views” is set, you can regenerate all active
windows by pressing Ctrl+Shift+G.
Hint:
If you are redrawing your model and something does not look correct, always try to do a
regenerate before looking for other problems. ,(
9
:
6.1.1.3 View Show. . . Shift+F12
. . . provides a way to graphically query your model. Although there are many possible uses
for this command, there are two primary reasons you might want to choose it:
What is the ID of this element (or node . . .)?
The first potential use occurs if you have a model displayed on the screen with no labels
(because the picture is too complicated with them). You can choose View Show and graphi-
cally pick one or more entities. With the labelling option turned on, FEMAP will display the
IDs of the entities that you choose.
Where is element (or node . . .) number 10?
The second use involves finding certain entities in a complicated model. If you need to find
a certain entity, you can just type its ID, rather than selecting it graphically. FEMAP will
highlight the entities that you have chosen and optionally add labels. If you autoscale your
model before using this command, the entity will be visible on your screen.
Selecting Options
The View Show command requires input of the type of entity to show. You can only select
one type of entity each time you use this command.
Style
If you select “Erase Background First”, the window will be erased before the selected enti-
ties are shown, otherwise the entities will just be added to the current picture.
The “Label with ID” option controls whether IDs will be added to the selected entities. If
entity labels are already on, they will be drawn even if this option is off. If they are normally
off however, turning this option on insures that the entities that you show will be labelled
with their ID.
Viewing Your Model
By default, “Show Color” is selected. This will cause all selected entities to be drawn in the
color listed to the right. You can change this color by typing a different ID, or by pressing
Palette to choose a color from the palette dialog. The default show color has been chosen to
highlight the entities that you choose. If you just want to add IDs to the selected entities, you
may want to switch to entity colors. This will display the entities in their normal colors.
Selecting the Entities to Show
After you choose the desired options, and press OK, you will see the standard entity selec-
tion dialog box. The type of entities that are selected by this box depends on the entity type
option that you chose. Just like other commands, you can use any combination of keyboard
and graphical input to select the entities that you want to show. Press OK to show the entities
that you have selected.
Hint:
The View Show command is also very useful to show connections between FEA entities and
geometry. For example, to see what nodes are attached to a surface, select Node as the
option, and when the standard entity selection dialog box appears, change the method to On
Surface, and select the desired surface. FEMAP will then highlight all nodes that are
attached to that surface.
9
:
To activate a view, select it from the list on the left, and press the “Activate->” button. This
will create a new on-screen window and activate the view. To close a single view, select it
from the list on the right, and press “<-Close”. The on-screen window will be closed, but the
view will still remain in your database. It can be reactivated at any time using the “Acti-
vate->” button. Pressing “<-Close All” will close all of the active graphics windows.
You can have as many views defined in your model as you want, but FEMAP will only allow
you to have 20 graphics windows active at one time. If you need additional windows, you
must start a second copy of FEMAP.
You can also close graphics windows by using the Close command on the window system
menu, or by double-clicking the window system menu. If you want to delete a view from
your database, use the Delete View command. To activate one or more views which have not
yet been defined, use the View New command.
Hint:
You can also Activate/Close a view simply by double-clicking on the name in one of the
lists.
Viewing Your Model
The ID and Title are used to set the ID and View Title for the window represented by the
black rectangle. View titles are displayed in the title bar of the window. Titles are automati-
cally assigned to the other views in any multi-view layout that you create. These automatic
titles describe the view orientation.
The Close All command button will close all graphics windows and deactivate the associ-
ated views. You should press this button, before you press OK, if you want the new views to
be the only ones which are active. You can also accomplish this with the View Activate com-
mand. Choosing the option during this command however, will save you time.
9
available rectangular area which is inside the Main Window and which is not obscured by :
the Messages and Lists window or the toolbox. If you do not change either of these, and only
have one graphics window, Tile will restore it to the size and position of the default graphics
window.
If you reposition or resize/reshape the Messages and Lists window, you can use Tile to auto-
matically make your graphics windows as large as possible without having any overlapping
windows. In general, overlapping windows are not desirable since they can cause additional
redrawing to reveal obscured information.
Title Window
Visual Impact Functions Disabled
Bar Border
On Thick Standard Graphics None, you can move and
Window resize the window using the
borders, title bar, and system
menu.
On None, Thick border Can not resize window.
Thin around window
becomes a thin line
Off Thick No Title bar Can not move window by
grabbing title bar, can not
minimize or maximize win-
dow, can not use system
menu.
Off None, Thick border Can not change window in
Thin around window any way.
becomes thin or
invisible. Maxi-
mizes graphics
area.
No matter what settings you choose for your graphics windows, you can always resize and
reposition them with the View Tile and View Cascade commands, and you can always close
them with View Activate.
View Layers...
Note:
Due to limitations in Windows, you should never make changes to graphics windows which
are maximized to full screen. If you do, the changes may be ignored.
You can also set the Background Color for your graphics windows using this command. If
you choose Transparent, FEMAP will simply not draw the background. If you use overlap-
ping windows, you can see graphics in one window, even though they are “behind” another
window with a transparent background. This option should only be chosen for final images
and special effects. If you move or resize a window that has a transparent background, the
resulting image can be very strange since FEMAP does not “properly” erase the background.
The normal setting is to choose a Solid Background Color. In this case, the color that you
select fills the entire window background prior to drawing your model. You should normally
pick a color for your background which is a solid (non-dithered) color. You can pick any
color, but dithered colors can make it difficult to see your model.
,(
9
With your mouse, you can quickly toggle the window title bar on or off. Press the Shift key, :
then click the right mouse button inside the graphics window. If a title bar was visible, it will
disappear. Repeating the process will restore the title bar. This technique does not affect the
border or background colors. It can also be used to toggle the title bar of the Messages and
Lists Window.
You can also press Shift and click the right mouse button in the title bar or border (not the
drawing area) of any graphics window to display the View Window dialog box.
The default settings are to “Show All Layers”. If you want to only show selected layers,
change to Show Visible Layers Only, and then move the layers that you want to the Visible
Viewing Your Model
Layers list. The Show, Show All, Hide and Hide All buttons simply move the layers between
the Hidden and Visible lists. To move a single layer, select it in the appropriate box, then
press Show or Hide. Alternatively, just double-click the layer and it will move to the other
list.
In addition to controlling your display, visible layers also control entity selection. Only enti-
ties on visible layers and which are not on the NoPick Layer can be selected graphically.
With the Active Layer option, you can also select the layer that will be used for entity cre-
ation. You may also use the View Layer option to create a new layer. The View Layers com-
mand can also be accessed from the Toolbar.
Note:
Entities used for solid geometry construction (such as a Boundary Surface for an Extrusion)
are automatically moved onto the Construction Layer, which is the default for the NoPick
Layer. FEMAP moves construction geometry onto this layer to prevent it from being
selected for load or constraint application. If you need to access this geometry, change the
NoPick Layer and you will be able to graphically select these entities. Be careful when doing
this however, since this geometry may occupy the identical space as a solid face or edge.
The View Select dialog box is divided into several sections. The Model Style and XY Style
option buttons comprise the first section. These options choose the method for display. You
can choose any one option from these two groups of styles. If you choose a model style, your
model will be displayed in the view, using all of the other options you choose. If instead you
choose an XY Style, the view will contain a 2D, XY plot of the selected output data or func-
tion. XY Styles are only available when you have output data available for postprocessing
(or functions).
The second section of the dialog box consists of the Deformed Style and Contour Style
option buttons. Here you can choose one option from each category to define the type of
postprocessing display that you want to have. The default settings (None-Model Only) are
used to create a normal model display which does not use any output data for postprocess-
ing. The settings of these options are ignored if you choose an XY style.
The final section of the dialog box, located under the previous sections, consists of the XY
Data, Model Data, and Deformed and Contour Data command buttons. Each of these buttons
displays an additional dialog box which allows you to select the model or output data which
,(
9
will be used in the view. You can select data using any of these buttons, but it will not be :
used until you also select the appropriate styles, as described above.
Although the hidden line removal options do require substantial calculations, and are there-
fore somewhat slower, they can often be the best approach to understanding a complex
model. This is especially true for 3D models. After you make the first hidden line display,
FEMAP retains a display list of the sorted information. This dramatically speeds up redraw-
ing hidden line views. Refer to the View Redraw and View Regenerate commands for more
information.
For Solid Element Models, you can also use the Free Face option
to simulate a hidden line view. In fact, you can even use this
mode to show hidden lines in a different line style (like dashed),
instead of removing them. To remove backfaces, use the Fill,
Backfaces and Hidden Option, in the View Options command,
and chose one of the “Skip” methods. Choose the “Show All
Faces” method to show hidden lines as a different color/style,
Choosing a Model Style
then go to the Free Edge and Face option and set the Free Edge Color to “Use View Color”.
Finally, choose the color and line style you want to use.
Render
The Render selection box is applicable to all Model Styles. The Render option implements
the FEMAP OpenGL capability for more rapid drawing and rotating of large models. Render
mode enables you to dynamically rotate a model by simply holding the left mouse button
and without switching to wireframe (including rotation of models with contours on them). It
is most often used for complex solid models in both hidden line mode as well as for postpro-
cessing.
Selecting Data for a Model Style
You can control what portions
of your model are displayed
by any of the model styles by
pressing the Model Data com-
mand button. The Select ,(
9
Model Data for View dialog :
box will then be displayed.
Here you can choose the Load
Set, Constraint Set and Group
which will be displayed in the
view. By default, whatever
load and constraint set you
activate will be displayed. You
can however eliminate loads
and/or constraints by choos-
ing the None options, or you can Select a particular set for display whether or not it is active.
If you choose the Select option, you must specify an existing set in the appropriate drop-
down list.
By default, your entire model will always be displayed. Since the Group option is set to
None, activating a Group will not change the display. This enables you to activate a Group
and then graphically select entities, from your entire model, into the Group. If you want to
display only a portion of your model, switch this option to either Active or Select. Then only
the entities which are in the appropriate Group will be displayed.
The final section of this dialog box, Function, is used to select the function that will be dis-
played when you choose the XY of Function display style. Even though this is obviously an
XY plot, you must choose the function to be displayed from this dialog because it is a dis-
play of model information, not postprocessing information like other XY plotting styles.
Quickly Choosing Model Data
In addition to using the View Select command, you can also access the Model Data dialog
box directly from the Quick Access menu. Just press the right mouse button while you are
pointing inside any graphics window, and choose Model Data. You can also get to this dialog
box by pressing Ctrl+F5.
Viewing Your Model
Choose category
to change between
option lists
Choose option
to display or
change settings
All of these different options are controlled from the View Options dialog box. There are
three basic parts to this dialog box. The Category option buttons choose the type of view
options that you want to update. When you choose a category, the Options list is automati-
cally updated. This list displays all View options that you can update for each Category. You
may have to scroll through the list, using the scroll bar, to see all of available options.
View Options. . .
To modify an option, simply select it from the list. You can do this either by pointing at it
with the cursor and clicking the left mouse button, or by pressing the direction keys. As you
select an option, the right side of the dialog box is updated. It displays various controls
which allow you to set the option. The current option settings are loaded as the defaults.
The Standard View Option Settings
There are eight standard controls which appear in the right side of the View Option dialog
box. If the option you select does not need a particular control, that control will not be visi-
ble. In fact, none of the options use all eight controls, and most only use a few.
The titles of the controls change depending on the option being updated. Each control how-
ever, has a similar function for all view options. We will therefore describe them in terms of
overall titles. You can refer to the table at the end of this section for more detailed informa-
tion on the settings that can be chosen for each option. That table also shows the titles for
any controls that do not control the standard functions that are described here.
In order, from top to bottom, down the right side of the dialog box, the controls are:
,(
9
Draw Check Box: :
If this control is checked, the related entities will be drawn, otherwise they will be skipped.
Some view options use this control to turn something else on or off. For example, Label Pre-
fixes, Line Elements in a Free Edge Check, Element Shrinking, Filling, and many more.
Hint:
Double clicking the associated item in the Options list will toggle this control on and off.
Label List:
This list box is usually used to choose the labelling mode for entities. You can choose to turn
all labels off, to label by ID, and many other settings. For certain view options, this list is
used for other label-related options. Examples include: font selections, label or legend posi-
tioning, and symbol sizing.
Color Mode List:
This list box controls how an entity color will be chosen. If you pick Entity Colors, the col-
ors that you assigned to each entity will be displayed. If you pick Use View Color, the single
color that you specify in the View Color control will be used. Choosing Use Layer Color will
result in each entity being displayed with the color of the layer that it references. Depending
on the view option you are updating, other settings are also available. Still other view
options use this list to control settings like the legend style, XY curve style, or light source
position for shading.
View Color and Palette:
Typically, this text box defines a single color for the selected entity option. To use this color,
you must also choose the Use View Color setting from the Color Mode List. You can either
type a color ID in the text box, or press Palette to select the color graphically.
Viewing Your Model
Labels, Entities, and Color category. The following table describes the functions performed
by each of the quick options command buttons:
,(
9
Note: :
The following buttons change the entire view (selections, alignment, magnifi-
cation, etc.), not just the view options.
Reset View Resets the entire View to FEMAP defaults.
Load View Updates the current view by restoring from the View library.
Save View Store the current view in the View library
Quick Access to Quick Options- Ctrl+Q or Shift+F6
You can also access the Quick Options dialog box without using the View Options command
by pressing Ctrl+Q or Shift+F6. Changes made in this manner however cannot be cancelled.
Viewing Your Model
The Labels, Entities, and Color category contains all of the options that control the display
of model entities. With these options, you choose whether entities will be drawn, if and how
they will be labeled, and what colors will be used. Entity label sizes and styles are further
controlled by the Label Parameter option that is also in this category. Other entity-related
view options can also be found here. For example, you can control the display of element
direction arrows, offsets, and orientation vectors, among others.
The Tools and View Style category contains the options that control whether tools, like the
workplane and snap grid, will be displayed. This category also contains options that control
the style of the view. For example, you can choose, free edge settings, element filling, shad-
ing, perspective, and stereo options. Each of these will change the overall style of the view.
Finally, you will find options in this category to control view-related items, such as the leg-
end, origin, and view axes.
The final category, PostProcessing, controls all of the graphical postprocessing options.
These include all of the options for Deformed, Animated, Vector, Contour, Criteria, and XY
View Options. . .
plots. None, of these options, has any impact, unless you have selected one of the postpro-
cessing options, through the View Select command.
Additional Comments on View Options
Options which are not self-explanatory are described in the following paragraphs for the
Labels, Entities and Colors as well as Tools and View Style categories. Postprocessing
related items will be further explained in the Postprocessing section of this manual.
Labels, Entities and Color Options
Label Parameters
This option controls the format of all labels in your view. If you turn the prefix on, entity
labels will be preceded by a single letter prefix which will identify the entity type. For exam-
ple, Node 1 will be labeled N1, Element 23 will be labelled E23. With the prefix turned off
only the number will be used. You can choose any of the listed fonts. Larger fonts can be
easier to read for simple models, but often obliterate each other on complex models. The
font must be available to Windows before you can use it.
,(
9
:
Note:
If the labels appear fine on the screen but are not printed properly, it is probably because
your Windows Printer Driver does not support that Font. Simply change the Font and
reprint.
The first two color mode options, Entity Colors and Use View Color, just draw the label.
Label colors either match the entities that they are labelling, or else all labels are drawn
using the single View Color. The final two options, “Entity, Erase Back” and “View, Erase
Back”, choose the label color, in the same way as the first two options. If you pick one of
these options however, FEMAP will erase the area where the label will be drawn, prior to
drawing the label. If you are labelling filled areas, it is often good to choose one of these
final options - they are easier to read. In fact if you do not, you will not be able to see any
labels that use the same color as the filled area.
Coordinate System...
. . . controls the display of user defined coordinate systems only. This is not used for the glo-
bal (or view) axes. Use the View Axes display option to update those axes.
Point, Curve, Surface, Boundary, Volume,...
... controls the display of these entities. You can choose a color mode, label mode (typically
ID), and whether to draw the entity.
Points can be labelled with their defined Mesh Size. In this case, any point that has a size
defined will be labelled with the size value. Points which have no size defined will not be
labelled. Points can be drawn as “+” symbols or dots - refer to the Symbols options.
You can also label all of these entities with their Mesh Attributes instead of and ID
Viewing Your Model
9
element offsets Centerline of Beam :
will be displayed. Released Degrees
If this option is on, of Freedom
FEMAP will draw
lines from the
nodes to the offset 456 Offsets
locations, and then
draw the element
connecting the off-
set locations. FEMAP always draws offsets to their actual lengths. If you have very small
offsets, you might not see them, even though they are displayed.
You can use the Release Labels option to display the degrees of freedom that are released.
When this option is set, FEMAP will label each released degree of freedom at the appropri-
ate end of the beam. FEMAP uses the numbers one to six to represent the six elemental
degrees of freedom.
Element - Orientation/Shape
If this option is on,
Orientation On Offset Beams with FEMAP will draw
Orientation Vectors
a vector in the
direction of the
element orienta-
tion. For Beams
and other line ele-
Plates with Material ments, this vector
Orientation Vectors will either point
toward the third
node, or in the direction of the vector orientation that you specified. For Plane Elements, that
Viewing Your Model
have rotated material axes, FEMAP will draw the vector in the direction of the material axes.
“Element - Beam Y-Axis” is very similar to this option.
The second list box, “Element Shape” allows you to change how line and plane elements
will be displayed. In the default setting, Line/Plane Only, these elements will simply be
drawn connecting the nodes. Line elements will just be a single line, plane elements will be
a triangle or quadrilateral. Switching to either of the other options lets you see more informa-
tion for these elements.
Element Shape On
Line elements can
Offset Beams be shown with a
rectangular cross
section, the actual
Plates
input cross section,
or a box denoting
the Stress recov-
ery Location.
These options only
affect line ele-
ments. There is no
difference for solid or plate elements between Show Fiber Thickness, Show Inertia Ratio,
Show Cross Section or Show Stress Recovery Locations. The Show Fiber Thickness and
Show Inertia Ratio settings display the cross section as a rectangle. For Bar and Beam ele-
ments, if you choose Show Fiber Thickness, the size of the rectangle is based on the stress
recovery locations. If you choose Show Inertia Ratios, the rectangular cross section is based
on the area and cross-sectional inertias (I1 and I2). Since the cross section may not really be
a rectangle, the height and width of the rectangle shown may not be correct, but it will be
representative of a rectangular cross section with the same inertia ratio (I1/I2). The area, I1
and I2 values must all be nonzero or no cross section will be shown.
Show Cross Section draws
the cross-section of the
beams based upon the input
to the FEMAP cross section
property generator. This can
be an arbitrary surface
shape or a standard shape.
This sample shows the dif-
ference between drawing
the beam cross section and
just line representations.
The beam cross section pic-
ture provides a much better
physical representation of
the actual model.
View Options. . .
Show Stress Recovery Locations will be identical to Show Cross Section, except it will draw
a rectangular cross section based upon the stress recovery locations for all beams that do not
have a defined cross section.
As stated above, for all other element types, these four options produce identical results. For
Tubes and Rods the cross-section is based on the radius. Other line elements can not display
a cross section. Planar elements will be expanded to show their thicknesses. If you have
specified top and bottom fiber distances, these will be used. If you have not, or the element
type does not support fiber distances, the element thickness will be used and will be centered
about the nodal plane.
There are many benefits to using this option. It allows you to graphically see your property
data, find errors, and it provides a more realistic display. For beam/bar elements, it also helps
you to determine if you have properly specified the beam orientations. Since the rectangular
cross section rotates with the orientation vector, you can see how your beam is oriented. By
choosing these different options, you can graphically check beam cross sections.
,(
9
:
Note:
Although possible, you should not display element thicknesses when you are doing contour
plots. FEMAP does not adjust the contour data to the surfaces of the “thickened” elements
and the resulting picture can be confusing.
Element - Beam Y-Axis...
... is similar to Element - Orientation. Instead of drawing the vector toward the third node, or
vector orientation that you specify, this option will draw a vector in the true element Y-Axis.
FEMAP will calculate cross products, using the element X axis and the element orientation
to determine the Y-Axis. If the orientation that you specified is perpendicular to the element
X-Axis, it will always be equivalent to the Y-axis. This option is only used for line elements.
Load Vector...
...controls the length of the displayed vectors on the screen. You can choose a Uniform style
or Scale by Magnitude, which scales the vector length based upon the magnitude. You may
also specify the magnitude which controls the length of the largest load. All other loads are
scaled accordingly. Each load type is scaled separately. To prevent visual loss of small loads
in a large model, you may also specify a Minimum Scale. All loads which would fall below
this minimum are then scaled to the minimum.
Load - Force, Moment, Thermal, Distributed Loads, Pressure, Acceleration,
Velocity, Enforced Displacement, Nonlinear Force, Heat Generation, Heat
Flux, Convection and Radiation...
... independently control the display of each load type. For Forces, Moments, Accelerations,
Velocities, and Enforced Displacements, you can choose to display either the resultant load
vectors or the load components. If you choose either Color/Component Mode option 0 or 1,
FEMAP will display one vector for each load in the direction of the resultant load. If you
choose option 2 or 3, FEMAP will display the components of the load. This will draw up to
three vectors which are aligned with the global rectangular directions. It does not matter
Viewing Your Model
what coordinate system you used to define the load, the components are always drawn in
global rectangular. In either case, the vectors will be colored based on the entity or view
color, as is typical for all of the other view options.
When displayed, the various nodal forces are drawn as shown as in the accompanying dia-
gram.
Enforced Enforced Rotational
Force Moment Displacement Rotation Acceleration Acceleration
Heat Heat
Temperature Generation Flux
Elemental loads are drawn very much like nodal loads, but are located at the center (or
along) the element face where they are applied. Directional elemental loads (like direction
heat flux and distributed loads) also represent the direction in which the load will be applied.
Distributed Load
Radiation
Convection
Heat
Heat Flux
Temperature Generation
Pressure
Function dependent loads can be labelled with both the load value and the function ID that
has been selected. The function ID is shown in parenthesis.
2.(1)
2. Load Dependent on
Constant Load Function 1
View Options. . .
9
Contact Segment...
:
... controls whether Contact Segments are visible, the color mode, and whether the label ID
is plotted.
Tools and View Style Options
Free Edge and Face...
. . . is only used for free edge and free face displays. If All Elements is selected, line ele-
ments will be considered in the search for free edges, and plane elements will be considered
in the search for free faces. Otherwise, only plane and volume elements are used in free edge
calculations, and only volume elements are used in free face calculations. With All Elements
active, a plate made of planar elements and framed with beams would have no free edges. If
All Elements were off, the beams would not be considered. The same framed plate would
have all of its outer edges free.
The Parabolic Edges options are similar. If you skip midnodes, FEMAP only checks the cor-
ner nodes of parabolic elements. In this case, edges of linear elements that connect to para-
bolic elements will not be considered free edges. Similarly, only the corners of element faces
are used in the free face calculations. If you use midnodes, FEMAP requires that all nodes
on an edge or face must match. Otherwise, the edge or face is free. In general, you should
always use the midnodes. This insures that you do not miss a true disconnection at the midn-
odes between two parabolic elements.
The Free Edge/Backface Color options are primarily for Free Edge displays, however, if you
choose Use View Color, backfaces in Free Face displays will use the Free Edge View Color.
By adjusting this color, you can often get a better understanding of the front and back por-
tions of your model. You can even create a pseudo Hidden Line plot with dashed lines by
changing the View Color to a dashed line style.
If you would like to display the free edges along with the remainder of your model, so that it
is easier to locate them, choose the View, Draw Model option. The default Free Edge View
color has been chosen so that they will still be visible with most element displays.
Viewing Your Model
Shrink Elements
If this option is on,
Shrink Off
all elements will
be reduced in size,
by the percentage
Shrink On that you specify. A
size of 100%
means that the ele-
ments will not be
Reveals Line Elements reduced. A size of
that were hidden with 0% reduces the
Shrink Off
elements to a point
at their centroid.
Fill, Backfaces and Hidden
If Fill is on, ele-
Element Fill On ments in your
model will be
filled with color.
Whenever it is off,
just the bound-
aries of the enti-
ties will be drawn.
Refer to the Filled
Edges option for additional information.
Fill can be used to fill elements with color for line contour and line criteria displays. If you
choose filled contours or filled criteria, that will override this switch, since each element can
only be filled once.
The Backfaces option allows you to automatically remove some element faces from the dis-
play. FEMAP calculates the normal (based on the right hand rule around the face) of each
element face. If it faces forward, out of the screen, that face is not drawn when backfaces are
being skipped. Since this removes information, and takes some additional computations, this
option is normally off, i.e. Show All Faces.
When you define solid elements, they are automatically constructed so that the faces on the
“back” of each element, will be properly defined backfaces. Therefore, you can safely turn
on the first level, Skip Solid Backfaces, and be reasonably sure that you will not lose any
meaningful information. On the other hand, the final two options must be used very care-
fully. Since you determine the orientation of normal to planar elements by the way you con-
nect them, the backface option may discard faces of planar elements which lie on the “front”
of your model. It all depends on how you define their normals. If you do want to use these
options, you must build your model so that all planar elements are defined with their normals
pointing either “inward” or “outward” from the center of the model. Then choose the appro-
priate option to remove the elements that you want.
View Options. . .
The Hidden Line Option selections control how hidden line calculations will be done for
solid elements. By default, FEMAP will calculate the free faces of all solids, and just display
them in a hidden line view, along with faces from all planar and line elements. If you just
want to see the solid elements, choose Free Faces Only, or if you want to see all faces being
drawn - including interior ones - choose Draw All Faces. Be aware however that Draw All
Faces is substantially slower, and will result in the same final picture unless you have ele-
ment shrink turned on.
You can combine the Free Face plot style and Skip Solid Backfaces to do a fairly quick, and
accurate hidden line plot of complex solid element models.
Filled Edges
When elements, or other entities are filled, the normal entity color fills the interior. If this
option is on, the boundaries will also be drawn. The color of those boundaries is determined
by the color mode set for this option. If you choose entity colors, you may not be able to see
the border, since it will probably match the filled area. Contrasting colors are also based on
the entity color, but FEMAP automatically chooses a color which does not match that color. ,(
9
If you want to draw just the filled areas, with no edges, turn this option off. :
The Filled Edges on/off switch is used any time you turn on the Fill Element option, or for
contour and criteria displays. The only exception is line criteria displays where the switch is
ignored since turning off the edges would eliminate the criteria information.
The Filled Edges color is only used when you set Fill Element on. It is not automatically
used for contour and criteria displays. Instead, the colors currently chosen by the Element
option are used.
The Section Cut Edges options determine whether element edges will be draw on section
cutting planes. If displayed, these edges are drawn with the Filled Edge view color.
Render Options...
...controls the viewing of surfaces and curves on solid models, as well as midside nodes for
parabolic elements. These options have no effect unless you are in Render Mode (see View
Select above). The Curve Transparency controls whether Curves are viewed even when hid-
den in Hidden Line Mode. This option is typically Off. Turning it On will enable you to view
all curves even in Hidden Line Mode.
You may use the Hatch Surfaces option to show parametric (or hatch) lines on the surface.
This option is available for Draw Model and Hidden Line Modes when in Render Mode. The
default is to show surfaces only (no hatching).
The Parabolic Edge/Face allows you to view or skip midside nodes while in Render Mode. If
you use midside nodes for viewing purposes, it can increase drawing times while in Render
Mode. If drawing time is significantly increased, you may want to Skip Midnodes when
viewing and orienting your model, and Use Midnodes only when examining deformed plots.
The skipping of midside node information on deformed plots may lead to misinterpretation
of results.
Viewing Your Model
Shading
When this option is on, FEMAP will modify the entity colors based on its orientation to the
light source. You can perform shading both in normal mode and Render Mode. When the
entity normal is perpendicular to the light source, the shaded color is equal to the original,
unshaded color. Ambient light is considered to be directionless. All surfaces are equally lit.
The remainder of the light comes from a single point source that you can position with the
Color Mode option.
If you choose Light at Viewer for the Color Mode option, the light is actually located along
the vector that is normal to the screen at an infinite distance from your model. If you choose
Position Light, you must also press the Light command button. This will display the stan-
dard coordinate dialog box and you can specify a location for the light source. The third
option, Spotlight at Viewer, is applicable only to Render Mode and works in conjunction
with the distance value input. By providing a distance for the spotlight, you can create a
specular pattern for the light. The specularity decreases with increasing distance. If you
specify a very large distance, it will have the same result as the Position Light at Viewer
option.
For plane elements, FEMAP does not consider the direction of the face normal when calcu-
lating the angle to the light source. Co-planar elements which have face normals pointing
toward and away from the light source will be shaded identically. This will result in bright
areas on the “back-side” of a plate model. It is necessary however, since FEMAP does not
restrict the direction of plate normals. For solid elements in normal mode, where FEMAP
controls the face normals, backfaces will receive only ambient light. Render Mode will high-
light backfaces, but Hidden Line mode will hide them.
For normal mode,
Shaded Tube
you can use the
Shading Mode
options to shade
either filled areas,
lines or both. This
option has no
affect when in
Render Mode.
Render mode can
only shade filled
areas.,
Note:
Because Windows cannot dither lines, many graphics boards will be unable to properly
shade the lines in your view. You should therefore turn on the appropriate fill options along
with shading. FEMAP and Windows will properly shade the resulting filled areas. If your
graphics board supports a large number (>256) of colors, you will still be able to shade lines.
If you try to shade lines on graphics boards with less colors, Windows will map the shaded
View Options. . .
color to one of its available colors. This can look strange on the screen. If you make a hard-
copy on a color printer that can print a large number of colors, the lines will be properly
shaded, even though they might look strange on your screen.
Perspective
When this option is on, FEMAP will display a perspective projection of your model, other-
wise axonometric (parallel) projections are drawn. You can control the distortion in the per-
spective projection by modifying the Distance. Smaller values result in more distortion.
Perspective draw- Perspective Off Perspective On
ings can result in
more realistic
images, but take
longer to draw. Addi-
tionally, because of
the non-parallel
transformations ,(
9
involved, FEMAP :
must fully rebuild the
display lists when-
ever you zoom, pan,
center, or magnify a perspective view. This is not required for non-perspective views.
Finally, although it may work, perspective views are not usually the best to use for graphical
selection. Graphical selection is inherently two-dimensional. Since perspective projections
distort any two dimensional object which is not perpendicular to the projection, you may be
surprised at what is selected. If you do make graphical selections from perspective views,
you should review what was really selected before you proceed.
The Left Stereo Color is not a part of perspective. Refer to Stereo for more information.
Stereo
When this option is on, FEMAP will display a stereo image of your model. The stereo image
is actually two images, slightly rotated from each other, each displayed in a different color. If
you view the stereo image through 3D or stereo glasses, it will appear three dimensional.
When you first look at a stereo image, it can take some time to properly focus your eyes to
see the 3D image. Keep trying! You may find it helpful to vary the Eye Separation. This set-
ting changes the separation between the left and right image. Most 3D stereo glasses have
one red and one blue lens. You can adjust the Left Stereo Color (in the Perspective option)
and the Right Stereo Color if they do not properly match your glasses.
You should always turn perspective on for stereo views, and turn fill off. Similarly, you must
just draw your model - do not choose a hidden line view. The method that FEMAP uses to
produce hidden line views is not compatible with stereo.
Viewing Your Model
View Legend
V: Default XY View The view legend
L: 100 psi Pressure Loading
C: Fixed Edges and Symmetry identifies the load
G: Plate Elements
View Legend (prefixed by L)
with Titles and constraint (C)
sets, the group (G),
and the view (V)
that are displayed
View Axes in a window. You
Z can choose to dis-
Y
X play either the IDs
or titles of these
items. You can also
move the legend to any of the eight positions.
View Axes
The view axes represent the orientation of the global axes. They are normally displayed in
the lower left corner of the view, but you can specify a new position by pressing Position.
Here you can simply enter the location in percentages of the graphics window (from top left)
where you want the axes to appear. You can also select the position graphically by pointing
with the mouse and clicking the left button.
Origin
The origin of Global coordinates is indicated by a circular symbol. This option can be used
to turn this symbol on or off.
Workplane and Rulers
When this option
Workplane
Rulers
12.
is on, the work-
Y
8.
9.
10.
11.
plane will be visi-
4.
5.
6.
7.
ble. The workplane
1.
2.
3.
is always present
1.
and active - even if
2.
Workplane Grid 3.
4.
it is not visible.
5.
6.
For rulers to be
7.
8.
Z 9.
you will not be able to see it, even though you turn this option on. You do not have to be
snapping to the grid for it to be visible.
Clipping Planes
If you turn this option on, and you are displaying a group which uses one or more clipping
planes, the clipping planes will be drawn.
Symbols...
. . . controls the size and color of symbols. This includes the symbols drawn for Points,
Nodes, Constraints, Loads and many more. Choosing a larger size makes the symbols larger.
The Preview Color is used for the symbols (dots, vectors, planes. . .) which are drawn when
you press the Preview command buttons that can be found on many dialog boxes.
You can also choose whether Nodes and Points will be drawn as their normal “x” and “+”
symbols, or as single dots. If you choose the dot option, a single pixel is drawn - if you go to
a printer or metafile they will still be a single dot in the device resolution.
The Load Len and Other Vec options allow you to customize the length of vectors that are ,(
9
displayed. If you want to display shorter vectors, reduce the numbers below the 100% :
default value. Larger numbers result in longer vectors. Load Len is used for all loads. Other
Vec is used for everything else.
Note:
If may also use the View Options, Labels, Entities and Colors, Load Vectors option to scale
the load lengths as well as use a Uniform or scaled distribution.
View Aspect Ratio...
... controls how FEMAP will distort your model as it is drawn on the screen. With
AutoAspect on, FEMAP will gather information about your display from Windows and will
calculate an internal aspect ratio. This automatic calculation will attempt to correct for dif-
ferences between graphics boards. It adjusts the aspect ratio, so that the true shape of your
model is shown. For example, circles are drawn as circles, not ellipses.
If you turn AutoAspect off, you can specify an Aspect Ratio that you can use to eliminate
any remaining distortions, or to intentionally distort a view of your model. Aspect ratios that
are larger than 1.0 will make your model appear taller than normal. Aspect ratios less than
1.0 will make it appear wider. You should never specify very large aspect ratios - the severe
distortion introduces other display problems for coordinate system triads and other symbols.
The default Aspect Ratio can be set using the File Preferences command.
Note:
FEMAP and Windows adjust the aspect ratio based on the normal aspect ratio of pixels for
your graphics board. There is no way to determine the effect of the horizontal and vertical
size settings on your monitor. For this reason, AutoAspect may not result in a true correc-
tion. You can either adjust your monitor sizes, or specify an Aspect Ratio manually.
Viewing Your Model
9
View Rotate Model... Ctrl+R or F8 :
... rotates the current view. Unlike most of the other view commands, this command ignores
the All Views option. It will only update one view at a time.
This command displays the View Rotate dialog box. This dialog box is very interactive. The
current view orientation will be loaded as the default orientation. As soon as you make a
change though, FEMAP will begin redrawing your current view. This gives you instanta-
neous feedback on whether you have made the correct choice. If the new orientation is not
what you want, you can immediately make a new selection. Since FEMAP lets you abort
any redraw by simply pressing a key, or the left mouse button, that selection will abort the
previous redraw, update the orientation, and begin redrawing again. You decide how much
of the redraw you want or need to see before you make your next selection.
If you turn off the Redraw check box, FEMAP will only redraw the global axes (instead of
the entire model), when you press the scroll bars, or type rotation angles. FEMAP always
draws the entire model when you choose one of the standard orientation push buttons.
FEMAP also draws the entire model if the global axes are not visible in the active view. Turn
off Redraw for the fastest possible rotations.
Using the Scroll Bars
The three scroll bars, located near the left side of the dialog box, are used to rotate your view
from its present position.
Viewing Your Model
As you click the scroll bar arrows, the view will rotate by the number of degrees currently
defined in the Delta text box. The axis of rotation is based on the scroll bar you selected, and
the selected rotation axes. If Model Axes are selected, the rotation will be around the global
coordinate directions. When Screen Axes are selected, rotations will be around the screen
axes. The screen X axis is always horizontal to the right, Y is always upward and Z is always
“out of the screen”.
Clicking the left scroll arrow rotates around the negative axis direction. The right scroll
arrow rotates around the positive axis direction.
Clicking in the gray scroll bar area is very similar to clicking the scroll arrow. The axis and
direction of rotation are identical. When you click here however, FEMAP will ignore the
Delta angle, and always rotate by 45 degrees. This is a good coarse adjustment for the orien-
tation. Then, after you get close to the orientation you want, use the arrows for smaller rota-
tions.
You can accomplish the same rotations using the keyboard. First, you must select the desired
scroll bar. Hit the TAB key until the scroll bar is highlighted. Then press Left Arrow, to
rotate by Delta around the negative axis direction, or Right Arrow to rotate around the posi-
tive direction. PageUp and PageDown rotate by 45 degrees.
Hint:
When using the scroll bars, remember:
m If you want the rotation to go faster, specify a larger Delta.
m The standard orientation buttons that are described later in this section automatically
update Delta. The first six buttons change it to 10 degrees, the last three change it to 90
degrees. These automatic changes allow you to quickly select a starting point using these
buttons, and then use the scroll bars to update that orientation.
m If you want to quickly rotate your model around one axis multiple times, you must
repeatedly press and release the left mouse button. FEMAP does not abort redraws if you
just hold the button down. Unless your model is small, the redraw time will significantly
slow down your rotations.
m For small models, you can dynamically rotate the model on screen by pointing at one of
the scroll arrows, pressing the left mouse button, and holding it down. FEMAP will com-
pletely redraw your model, rotate the view, and draw again. Let go of the button when-
ever you want to stop.
m Don't worry about the position of the scroll bar “thumb buttons”. When you rotate your
view, they tend to jump around. Because of the way FEMAP defines the rotation angles,
rotation about one model or screen axis can actually result in changes to all three rotation
angles. For the same reason, it is very difficult to orient your view by dragging the
“thumb buttons”.
View Rotate Menu
9
Preferences Views command to redefine the names and orientations of all three buttons. :
Mag, Zoom, and Pan
These command buttons are shortcuts to the View Magnify, Zoom, and Pan commands. If
you are updating a view, it is often more convenient to use these buttons, than to press OK
and then choose the command from the menu. Pressing any of these buttons automatically
accepts any changes you have made - just as if you had pressed OK.
View Rotate Dynamic . . .
...allows you to dynamically rotate, pan and zoom your model curves and elements. When
you choose this command, you will see the following dialog box:
If you are not in Render mode (under View Select menu), your model will automatically
switch to a wireframe, single color display of the curves and elements. All other entities will
temporarily disappear. If you are in Render mode, the model will look the same. Whether
you are in render mode or not, the operations for the View Align By Dynamic operate the
same.
Hint:
These dynamic rotation commands can also be accessed at any time in Render mode simply
by holding the left mouse button in the graphics window. You will then be able to Rotate
around XY. If you hold the Alt, Ctrl, or Shift keys down when first pressing the left mouse
button, you can Rotate About Z, Pan, or Zoom, respectively. Holding down Alt+Ctrl and
pressing the left mouse button allows you to rotate around another axis that you define. No
Viewing Your Model
dialog box will appear. Also, if you have previously selected one of the buttons for Rotate Z,
Rotate Axis, Pan, or Zoom, FEMAP will automatically default to this mode when you next
access dynamic rotation.
All operations (rotate, pan or zoom) are done by pressing and holding the left mouse button
in the active graphics window, and then dragging the mouse either horizontally or vertically.
For example, to rotate around the screen Y axis:
Drag Mouse
Z Z
Y Y
X X
The following mouse actions are recognized, with the left button down:
Rotate XY Mode Rotate Z Mode
Rotate Around -X
Rotate Around -Z
Rotate Around -Y Rotate Around +Y
Rotate Around +Z
Rotate Around +X
For the Rotate axis mode, moving the mouse to the right rotates counter-clockwise about the
axis (right-hand rule), and moving left rotates clockwise.
The dynamic mode can be chosen in several ways. The most obvious is to select one of the
available buttons. Alternatively however, you can simply hold down the Alt key as you press
the left button down to Rotate around the Z axis. Press Ctrl to Pan, or press Shift to Zoom.
Press Alt and Ctrl to rotate around the predefined axis. You do not have to hold the key as
you drag the mouse, just make sure it is down before you press the mouse button.
View Rotate Menu
When you let go of the left mouse button, your model will begin to redraw in whatever mode
that you have selected. That is with all entities and postprocessing options. If you are not sat-
isfied with the view, or need to do more transformations, simply press the button down again
and drag it further.
Options...
If you choose the Options button, you will see a menu that pro-
vides further control over the dynamic alignment command
Single Axis
Controls how model XY rotations will be done. If you refer back
to the previous diagram, dragging horizontally rotates around Y,
dragging vertically rotates around Z. Normally, it is easiest to
accomplish compound rotations by dragging along one axis for a
while, then dragging along the other. Since it is very difficult to
drag the mouse along a precisely horizontal or vertical axis however, the Single Axis option
limits rotations to the single direction in which you are moving the greatest distance. Small ,(
9
deviations from horizontal or vertical will be ignored. If you turn this option off however, :
moving the mouse diagonally will perform a rotation about a diagonal vector.
Model Axes
Controls whether rotations will be around the default screen axes or around the model axes.
If you are rotating around model axes, mouse movements are the same, they just apply to the
corresponding model axes instead of the screen axes.
AutoCenter
In a three dimensional model, you will occasionally find that your model is rotating off of
the screen as you move it with this command. You can either choose pan to bring it back, or
press AutoCenter. AutoCenter is just like the View Autoscale command, in that it calculates
a new model center, but it does not change the scale at which the model is displayed.
Use Rotation Center
This menu item is simply a toggle that turns on and off every time you choose it. When it is
checked, all rotations will be about the center of rotation that you specify with the Rotation
Center command. If it is off, rotations will be around the View Center.
Rotation Center...
Allows you to specify a center of rotation to be used for future rotations. This does not
change the location of the model on the screen like View Center does, it simply allows rota-
tion around another location. When you choose this command, “Use Rotation Center” is
automatically turned on.
Rotation Axis...
Allows you to specify a vector that will be used as the rotation axis, if you are in the Rotate
Axis mode (Alt+Ctrl keys). When you specify a rotation vector, the base of the vector is
automatically used to update the Rotation Center, so all rotations will be about that point.
Like Rotation Center, this command also turns on “Use Rotation Center”.
Viewing Your Model
Note:
This command does not account for any Perspective that you have specified. It is usually
best therefore to turn off Perspective before using this command.
Note:
All rotations are performed around the View Center (or the rotation center, if you have
turned on this option). If you only move the mouse slightly and a large rotation occurs, it is
because that portion of the model you are rotating is well away from the center of rotation -
possibly in the direction that is perpendicular to the screen. To avoid this, position the View
Center (or Rotation Center) on the geometry/mesh you are trying to rotate.
Limitations
While the dynamic display capability will work with any graphics adapter (you do not need
any special acceleration or 3D hardware), render mode can provide significantly increased
dynamic rotation speed and drawing with an OpenGL accelerator board. There are very few
limitations to Dynamic Rotations performed in Render mode. The first two limitations apply
to both modes, while limitations 3-5 apply only when you are not in Render mode.
1. The model is drawn in various styles depending on the View Style that is active and the
type of elements in your model. For example, if you rotate a free-edge view, the free
edges will be rotated. Solid elements do not display interior faces (like a free-face plot).
2. Only element edges and curves are drawn. No labels or other symbols are displayed.
3. The display is limited to a single color - either black or white depending on the color you
choose for the window background.
4. There are limitations on the total number of nodes, and faces that can be displayed.
Depending upon your model, and available memory you should be able to display models
of around 3000-4000 faces. If your model is larger, you will still be able to use this func-
tion, but only the first 3000-4000 faces will be displayed - still probably more than
enough to orient your model. If you are working with very large models, consider either
activating a group to reduce the number, and choose the elements that will be displayed.
Alternatively you can switch to a free edge display.
5. Hidden line removal can not be done during dynamic display.
Improving Performance of Dynamic Display
FEMAP provides three different methods to redisplay your model during this command.
Again, these methods are only applicable when you are not in Render mode. Depending on
your computer, graphics adapter and graphics drivers, any one of these three methods may
result in best performance. You should always experiment with these methods to find the one
View Align By Menu
that works best on your system. The methods are selected using the Dynamic option of the
File Preferences command.
Method Description
Fast Redraw Usually fastest for small models, but not good for large models unless
your graphics adapter can draw vectors very rapidly. Some screen
flicker.
Reduced Bitmap Fast on most systems. Little or no flicker.
Full Bitmap Basically the same as Reduced Bitmap. Will usually be slower - but not
always.
Experiment with both small and large models to see which works best for you. In some cases
the performance differences will be dramatic, depending upon the capabilities of your graph-
ics adapter. When you have found the method that you like, remember to choose the Perma-
nent button in File Preferences to save your selection for future models.
View Rotate Use Rotation Center. . . ,(
9
This menu item is simply a toggle that turns on and off every time you choose it. When it is :
checked, all dynamic rotations will be about the center of rotation that you specify with the
Rotation Center command. If it is off, rotations will be around the View Center. This com-
mand can also be accessed from the Options menu on the Dynamic Rotations dialog box.
View Rotate Rotation Center. . .
...allows you to specify a center of rotation to be used for future dynamic rotations. This does
not change the location of the model on the screen like View Center does, it simply allows
rotation around another location. When you choose this command, “Use Rotation Center” is
automatically turned on. This command can also be accessed from the Options menu on the
Dynamic Rotations dialog box.
View Rotate Rotation Axis. . .
...allows you to specify a vector that will be used as the rotation axis for dynamic rotation, if
you are also in the Rotate Axis mode (Alt+Ctrl keys). When you specify a rotation vector,
the base of the vector is automatically used to update the Rotation Center, so all rotations
will be about that point. Like Rotation Center, this command also turns on “Use Rotation
Center”. This command can also be accessed from the Options menu on the Dynamic Rota-
tions dialog box.
so that the coordinate system axes are aligned with the screen axes. That is, X horizontally to
the right, Y up, and Z “out of the screen”.
View Align By Along Vector. . . Ctrl+F8
. . . aligns the view to a specified vector. The standard vector definition dialog box defines
the alignment vector. When you specify the vector, the view will be aligned so the vector
you selected will be pointing into the screen. In the resulting view, your model will be ori-
ented so that you are looking from the base of the vector, toward the tip.
Since a vector really only defines one of the orientation axes, the rotation of your model
about the orientation vector is undefined. This is the rotation about the screen Z axis (“out of
the screen”). In general, FEMAP will align one of the global coordinate axes with the screen
X (horizontal) axis. If you want to update this orientation, just switch to the View Rotate
command, and rotate the view about the Z Screen Axis. This will retain the vector orienta-
tion, but will rotate about that vector.
Hint:
You can choose any of the available vector definition methods. This will enable you to easily
orient your view relative to different entities in your model. You can also use the various
snap modes to select the vector.
View Align By Workplane...
. . . immediately aligns the view to the current workplane. No additional input is required.
The workplane axes are aligned with the screen axes. The X axis is horizontal (to the right),
Y is up, and Z is out of the screen.
Hint:
If you want to align your view normal to a plane in your model, you can use View Align By
Along Vector, or this command. To use this command, you must first use the Tools Work-
plane command to align the workplane to the desired orientation. This approach allows you
to use all of the standard plane definition methods for selecting the orientation plane.
Depending on the real shape of your model, the shape of the window, and the orientation you
have currently chosen, you may feel that the autoscaled magnification is too small. This can
be especially true for long, thin models in non-square windows. If you need to enlarge the
model use either the View Zoom or View Magnify command.
Since no dialog box is displayed, you cannot choose between autoscaling one, or multiple
views, during this command. Before you choose View Autoscale, you must use the All
Views command to select the views that you want to modify.
View Autoscale Regenerate All Ctrl+Shift+A
If AutoScale All does not work then...
FEMAP maintains overall size information about your model in your database. This infor-
mation is used to properly autoscale your model into the active window. If you have created
some entities which were positioned at a large distance from your model, and then deleted or
moved those entities, the autoscale calculations may still be based on the larger overall
model size. This will result in scaling which is too small, and typically not centered, relative
,(
9
to your window. If you see this behavior, you can force FEMAP to recalculate all of the
autoscaling information by choosing this command, or pressing Shift+Ctrl+A (instead of :
just Ctrl+A). This combination should restore your scaling to the proper size and centering.
View Autoscale Visible Ctrl+A
...works just like the View Autoscale All command, except that it only uses considers the
portions of the model that are displayed when doing the centering and scaling computations.
This means that if you are only displaying geometry, then the nodes and elements in your
mesh will not be used for the scaling (and therefore may be outside of the window). Like-
wise, the current group and layer settings are also considered. If you are displaying a group
that only contains one corner of your model, then that corner will be scaled to fill the win-
dow and moved to the center.
Using Autoscale for XY-Plots
If you have selected any of the XY-plot styles, View Autoscale will set both the XY X
Range/Grid and XY Y Range/Grid options to Automatic. These selections display the entire
XY-plot. The axis extents are determined from the data you have selected.
This command displays the View Zoom dialog box. You must choose between two zooming
directions: Zoom In and Zoom Out. When you Zoom In, FEMAP will enlarge the rectangu-
lar area that you define to fill the entire window. Zoom Out does just the opposite. The mag-
nification is reduced, so that the portion of your model that had filled the entire window now
only fills the rectangular zoom area.
,(
9
The four text boxes near
the center of the dialog 1 5 9 13
:
Zoom Area
box are used to define two 2 6 10 14
You can also just type the locations of the corners using the keyboard. If you choose this
method however, you do not have the advantage of using the dynamic zoom box to position
the zoom area.
Previewing the Zoomed View
After you define the zoom area, you can press Apply, to zoom, and redraw the view. This is
just like pressing OK, except that the View Zoom dialog box is still present. You can still
press Cancel to revert to the original view, or you can define additional zoom areas to further
update the view.
Rotate, Mag, and Pan
These command buttons are shortcuts to the View Rotate, Magnify, and Pan commands. If
you are updating a view, it is often more convenient to use these buttons, than to press OK
and then choose the command from the menu. Pressing any of these buttons automatically
accepts any changes you have made - just as if you had pressed OK.
Using Zoom for XY-Plots
If you have selected any of the XY-plot styles, View Zoom will set both the XY X Range/
Grid and XY Y Range/Grid options to Max Min. The Minimum and Maximum axes values
are adjusted based on the zoom area that you specify. This is probably the easiest way to
choose particular sections of a complex XY plot. The zoom area that you choose should be
inside the graph area - although it does not have to be.
Note:
Only one level of previous zoom is saved. That means, for example, if you press the Pan but-
tons on the toolbar more than once, or you center, then magnify, you will only be able to
back up one step - not return the the original position before you changed the view.
center coordi- 3 7 11 15
9
about later rotations, the coordinate perpendicular to the screen can be given any value (or :
just skipped). It is unimportant.
You can use the mouse to choose the center of the view. It will work just like any other
graphical coordinate selection. If you just want to move something to the center of the
screen, this may be the easiest way to accomplish it. Just point at the location with the
mouse, and press the left mouse button. This will move the location you chose to the center
of the view. Remember however, that the depth, “into the screen”, will be chosen in the
Workplane. As described in the previous paragraph, this might not be the point you want to
rotate around.
If you want to center about an existing Node or Point, you can enable the appropriate Snap
Mode prior to your graphical selection. In this case, the center coordinates will be equal to
the coordinates of the entity you “snapped to”.
If you really want to specify a three-dimensional center, you may want to use the keyboard.
You can choose any of the standard coordinate definition methods, and enter the coordinates
manually. You can also graphically select coordinates, and then update one or more of them
prior to pressing OK.
Using Center for XY-Plots
If you have selected any of the XY-plot styles, View Center will set both the XY X Range/
Grid and XY Y Range/Grid options to “Max Min”. The Minimum and Maximum axes val-
ues are adjusted based on the location that you specify. The magnification is unchanged. The
location that you choose is just moved to the center of the graph.
Instead of the standard coordinate definition dialog boxes, XY-plots display the View Posi-
tion dialog box. These coordinates are specified as a percentage of the window. The location
(0%,0%) is in the upper-left corner of the window. The lower-right corner is (100%,100%).
It is usually best to use the mouse to graphically select the new center. This is especially true
since the required coordinates are relative to the window and not the graph area.
Viewing Your Model
This command provides two different methods to position your model. You can just press
the Left, Right, Up, or Down buttons to move your model in the indicated direction. This
method moves the amount specified by Percent, which indicates a percent of the window.
The other positioning method requires two locations. Within the view, the model is moved
from the first location to the second.
You will probably find that the easiest method of panning with the second method is to
choose the two locations graphically. Point to the location that you want to move From, and
press the left mouse button. Then point to the location you want to move To. As you move,
you will see an arrow moving with the cursor. The arrow indicates the direction and distance
of the pan.
You can also pan the view by typing coordinates. The two pan locations are specified in per-
centages of the window. The location (0%,0%) indicates the upper-left window corner. The
lower-right corner is (100%,100%), and the upper-right corner is (100%,0%).
Previewing the Panned View
After you define the pan locations, you can press Apply, to pan, and redraw the view. This is
just like pressing OK, except that the View Pan dialog box is still present. You can still press
Cancel to revert to the original view, or you can define additional pan locations to further
update the view. If you use the Left, Right, Up, or Down buttons, they will automatically
redraw the view.
Rotate, Mag, and Zoom
These command buttons are shortcuts to the View Rotate, Magnify, and Zoom commands. If
you are updating a view, it is often more convenient to use these buttons, than to press OK
and then choose the command from the menu. Pressing any of these buttons automatically
accepts any changes you have made - just as if you had pressed OK.
Using Pan for XY-Plots
If you have selected any of the XY-plot styles, View Pan will set both the XY X Range/Grid
and XY Y Range/Grid options to “Max Min”. The Minimum and Maximum axes values are
adjusted based on the pan locations that you specify. If you have magnified an XY-plot, this
is an easy way to move it around to see different portions of the curves. The pan locations
that you choose should be inside the graph area - although it does not have to be.
Deleting Views
It is usually best to use the mouse to graphically select the pan locations. This is especially
true since the required coordinates are relative to the window and not the graph area.
9
the View New command. You should also then perform a File Rebuild to restructure the
database. This should remove the corruption from the model.
:
Groups Layers
By creating multiple groups, and using multiple layers, you can create an infinite number of
visual combinations for your model. This greater flexibility also provides the disadvantage
Viewing Your Model
of more methods to “hide” things in your model. If you do not see an entity which you cre-
ated, it is a good bet that either it is not in the Group you are currently displaying, or it is not
on a visible layer.
Groups are designed to mimic how FEA models were numbered and arranged when they
were built by hand. For example, in the aircraft industry, a model of a complete aircraft
would be carefully numbered. All the nodes and elements at a frame at a particular location
along the fuselage would be numbered in such a manner as to clearly identify them as
belonging to that frame. FEMAP grouping makes it very easy to isolate portions of a finite
element model that are numbered in such a manner. You may also easily group elements
using a particular property or material.
Layers, on the other hand, are designed similar to layering in most CAD systems. The name
layer comes from the clear sheet of paper analogy for CAD layering, where all the entities
associated with a given layer would be drawn on a clear sheet of paper, and only the “active”
clear sheets being overlaid would produce a visual image.
This dialog box works just like the other set creation dialog boxes. To make a new layer,
enter an ID that does not exist in the list of available layers. Then enter a title, choose a color
and press OK. You may also use this command to activate a layer by selecting the layer and
pressing OK (you may also use the View Layers command to activate a layer). Unlike other
sets, you must always have some layer active.
Viewing Layers (View Layers command)
Once layers have been created and entities assigned to them, they can be used to control dis-
play and entity selection (View Layers command), or to control groups (Group Layers com-
mand).
9
The Modify Layer command actually makes no changes to the Layers themselves. Instead,
you can use this command to move entities from one layer to another. This is a much easier
:
method of changing the layer of a large number of entities in comparison to Modify Edit,
which requires input for each entity you selected.
Delete Tool Layer
This command enables you to delete a layer. You will typically only want to use this com-
mand when you have an empty layer. This command does not delete entities that are on the
layer. In fact, these entities may still have the same layer reference, but the layer itself will be
removed. The entities on the deleted layers will then not be visible unless you have Show All
Layers active. There are also no checks made to see if entities exist on a layer when you are
about to delete it. Therefore, be careful when using this command.
Hint:
If you do delete a layer which has information contained on it, you may simply use Tools
Layers to create a new layer with that same number. The entities which were on the deleted
layer will automatically be placed on the new layer.
Group Layers
This command provides an easy method to limit a group to a specific number of layer(s).
This does not automatically create a group with all the entities in that layer. It simply limits
the selected entities to a specific layer. For more information on this command, please see
Group Layers under the Group Menu Commands section.
You can turn this option off by reselecting the command, and choosing No - don’t automati-
cally evaluate.
You do not need to turn on Evaluate Always for a group that you select for “Automatic
Add”. In fact, it will be much faster if you do not.
Note:
If you are displaying a group where you have turned on Evaluate Always, you will not be
able to graphically select nodes or other entities in that View. In addition, any attempt to ref-
erence that View will be significantly slower than if Evaluate Always was off, because the
Group must be reevaluated.
Group Operations Automatic Add...
...automatically adds all newly created entities to the selected group. With this option there is
no need to reevaluate the selected group to have the entities appear - they are added without
,(
9
the need for reevaluation.
:
Note:
You will be able to choose from the “Active” Group, Select a Group, or “None”. The default
is “None”, which means that new entities will not be added into any group. If you choose the
“Active” option, newly created entities will be added to whatever group is active at that
time. You can change the active group using the Group Set command. If no group is active,
it is the same as choosing the “None” option. If you choose “Select”, then you must also
choose an existing group from the combo box. All entities will be added to that group. In this
mode, if you want to switch to a different group, you must use this command to make a new
selection.
In File Preferences, the View Autoplot Created/Modified Geometry preference must be on,
or Automatic Add will be disabled.
Group Operations Renumber...
...provides the capability to maintain the same entities in the group even when you renumber
the entities. When you select this command, FEMAP will ask you whether it is OK to
renumber the active group when you renumber entities. The default is Yes for this command.
This means that if you have included Node 1 in the group, and you then renumber it to 50, it
will still remain in the group (i.e. FEMAP will change the Group Node ID entry from 1 to
50). If you select No for the renumbering option, Node 1 will remain as the entry, and you
will lose the new Node 50 (renumbered 1) from the group. Any entity you make in the future
with Node ID 1 will automatically be included in the group. You will typically want to have
this option on Yes to prevent changes in your groups from renumbering.
Group Operations Copy...
... makes a new Group which is a copy of the active Group. When you invoke this command,
you must input the ID and Title of the Group that will be created. If you check the Evaluate
Viewing Your Model
option, you will force the Group to be reevaluated prior to being copied. If the active Group
has not been evaluated since it was created or last modified, FEMAP will always evaluate it
before the Group is copied. This evaluation must happen, and will occur no matter how you
set the Evaluate option.
Group Operations Condense...
... is similar to Group Operations Copy, in that it creates a new Group which selects the same
entities as the active Group. In this case however, the new Group is not a copy of the active
Group. Instead, all of the entities which are selected in the active Group are used to define
ID rules in the new Group. The new ID rules (Coord Sys IDs, Point IDs, Node IDs, etc.) will
select all of the entities that were previously selected. It does not matter if the original Group
selected the entities by clipping or other types of rules, the selections will be converted to ID
rules. None of the original rules, clipping, or layer information will be included in the new
Group.
When to use Condense
Condense is usually used when you have defined a Group using Clipping or other fairly gen-
eral rules (like Nodes 1 to 10000), and you want to make sure that no entities, other than
those which are currently selected, will be inadvertently included during future Group evalu-
ations. In addition, a condensed group will typically reevaluate faster than the group defined
by clipping.
Condense will reduce these general selections to specific rules which will only include the
currently selected entities.
Group Operations And...
... creates a new Group which selects all of the entities that are currently in two other
selected Groups. This command works with the Active group, as well as a 2nd group that
you select from the existing Group list. You can also choose to Evaluate either Group prior
to creating the new Group. Again, just like for the other Group Operations commands, the
Groups will always be evaluated if they have not already been evaluated.
A new ID will automatically be assigned for the Group to Create, but you can choose the ID
of any nonexisting Group. You should also specify a descriptive Title.
The resulting Group is formed just like it was by the Group Condense command. All clip-
ping, layer, and rule information in the original two Groups is reduced to “by ID” rules
which select just the appropriate IDs. To be selected in the resulting Group, an entity must be
included in both the active Group AND the other Group you select.
Group Operations Or...
... is similar to the Group Operations And command. The only difference is that the resulting
Group contains all entities which are included in either the active Group, or the other Group
that you select.
Group Operations Menu
9
When you choose this command, you will be asked for the elements that you want to con- :
sider. This command only works with planar or solid elements. Line and other types of ele-
ments will simply be ignored. Typically, you should only choose one type (Planar or Solid)
at a time. You will then see the following dialog box:
The correct element type should be selected
automatically based on the elements that
you selected - unless you chose multiple
types. You must then decide how you want
to segment your model.
Add Layers
If you turn this option on, not only will ele-
ments be placed into segmented groups,
their layers will also be updated so that each
segment is on a separate layer. This can be
useful if you want to display multiple seg-
ments simultaneously, since any combina-
tion of layers can be displayed.
Attribute Breaks
Breaking your model into segments based on attributes allows you to find areas of differing
thickness or material. When used for output extrapolation, these options recognize that
stresses or other output are not continuous across different materials or other part/thickness
boundaries.
If you want to put elements with different properties into different groups, choose “Property
ID”. Since each property references a material, this will automatically put each material into
one or more groups. If you just want to break based on changing materials, choose “Material
ID”. Choose “None” to skip this type of checking when the model is being segmented.
Viewing Your Model
In addition to these basic attribute options, you can also choose to formulate different groups
based on changes in the Layer or Color that each element references. These options really
provide you a way to customize the way that FEMAP will segment your model. For exam-
ple, if you really want to break some portion of your model into multiple parts, but all ele-
ments have the same property, you can always set their color or layer prior to using this
command, then choose the appropriate option, and FEMAP will segment based on those
attributes.
Geometric Breaks
Unlike the attribute breaks, which can be used with either planar or solid elements, geomet-
ric breaks apply only to planar elements. Geometric breaks are very important for segment-
ing complex plate structures. For example, if you have a box structure, geometric breaks will
automatically detect and segment each face of the box - even if all elements have identical
attributes.
When you choose to do geometric breaking, FEMAP calculates the normal to the planar face
for each element. If the normals of two adjoining elements are within the angle that you
specify of being parallel, they will be considered to be in the same segment (neglecting any
attribute differences). If they are not within that angle, a new segment will be formed.
To ignore geometric breaks, choose “None”.
Complete Model
Generated Groups
Note:
This command can create quite a few groups given a large model - especially if you use geo-
metric breaks with a small angle. It can also take quite a while to evaluate the entire model.
Group Operations Menu
Hint:
Since FEMAP has no way of knowing what the various segments of your model represent, it
simply assigns default titles to the groups that are generated. After they are created, it is usu-
ally best to display each group, one at a time, and change the title (use Group Set) to some-
thing that will be more meaningful to you.
Group Operations Generate Solids...
...will automatically create a group based on Solid geometry. You simply select the Solids
you wish to group and FEMAP will create a single group containing the selected solids and
there associated curves, lines and points.
Operations Generate Property...
... will automatically create groups by segmenting your model based on properties. You sim-
ply select the properties you wish to consider and FEMAP will create separate groups con-
,(
9
taining elements that reference each property. This works very similar to Group Operations
Generate, except you pick the particular properties for the groups, and no discontinuities will :
be considered. All elements in the model referencing a particular property will be placed in
the same group, regardless of their locations.
Group Operations Generate Material...
... is similar to the Group Operations Generate Property command, except the groups are
generated based upon the materials of the elements (on their property cards), not the proper-
ties themselves.
Group Operations Generate Elem Type...
...is similar to the Group Operations Generate Property command, except the groups are
based upon the element type, not the properties themselves.
Group Operations Peel...
... is used with solid elements to remove one or more layers from the outside of a model. Ini-
tially, you choose the elements that you want to “peel”. Typically you will want to select the
entire model. Remember however, that only solid elements are considered for this command.
You specify the number of layers of elements to “peel” off of the outside. Elements are
“peeled” if they have one or more faces on the outer surface of the selected elements. Simi-
larly if you choose to peel multiple layers, each layer is removed, and the next layer is
“peeled” from the remaining elements.
You have two choices as you group elements using this command. You can create groups
from the outer layers - the ones that are “peeled”. This will result in one group for each layer
that you choose. You can also choose to create a group from the elements that remain after
all peeling has been completed - i.e. the core elements.
Viewing Your Model
While it is somewhat difficult to visualize the result of this command the following picture
attempts to show it
First Layer (no center elements)
Complete Model
Remaining Core
Note:
The Group Clipping Screen, Plane, and Volume commands all control the same six clipping
planes. They are not independent - choosing one will override previous plane selections.
FEMAP will therefore ask you to confirm that you want to turn off the previous clipping
options, if they were defined using a different command. If you answer No, for Screen and
Volume clipping, the command will continue, but the defaults will be relatively meaningless.
When you choose No, for Plane clipping, the clipping planes that were previously active will
remain active. You can use this technique to edit one or more planes that you defined using
Screen or Volume.
,(
9
How Clipping is Evaluated :
When you specify either plane or coordinate clipping, FEMAP bases the selection of entities
on coordinate locations. Points, Nodes, and Coordinate Systems are all clipped based on
their location in your model. Text that is positioned relative to your model is clipped in the
same way. View positioned Text can not be selected via clipping.
Other entities are clipped based on the Points or Nodes that they reference. For example,
Elements are included if any of the Nodes that they reference are included by clipping. It is
not necessary that all of the Nodes referenced by an Element are included - just one. Nodal
Loads are included if the Nodes where they are applied have been selected by clipping. Ele-
mental Loads are included only if the Elements where they are applied have been selected by
clipping. This implies that at least one of the Nodes referenced by those Elements has been
included also. If you are trying to establish clipping planes to select Elements, you only need
to include one of the Nodes to include the Elements.
Group Clipping Coordinate...
... allows you to quickly select portions of your model based on their coordinate values rela-
tive to a selected Coordinate System.
The Group Selection by Coordinate Clipping dialog box selects the clipping options. You
can choose to clip Above, Below, Between, or Outside of the selected Minimum and/or
Viewing Your Model
Maximum coordinates. The Coordinate Value section allows you to select the coordinate
direction that will control clipping. If you choose None, coordinate clipping will be turned
off.
Finally, you can select any existing Coordinate System. To evaluate the clipping, FEMAP
will transform the entity coordinates into the system you select and compare them against
the Minimum and/or Maximum values that you specify.
When you choose Above, anything which is above the Maximum will be clipped, or
removed. Anything less than the Maximum will be included. Below is the opposite. Any-
thing less than the Minimum will be clipped. Between will clip or remove anything between
the Minimum and Maximum. Outside is the opposite.
Clipping Non-Planar Regions
If you choose a cylindrical or spherical coordinate system, the clipping region can be non-
planar. For example, if you wanted to select a cylindrical volume, you could choose a cylin-
drical system and then clip Above an X (actually a radius for a cylindrical system) value.
Everything that has a radius which is smaller than the Maximum value that you specify will
be included.
Group Clipping Screen...
... allows you to quickly orient up to four (of the possible six) clipping planes. With this
command you pick a series of locations. The clipping planes will be oriented to pass through
those positions and be normal to the active View - hence the title Screen Clipping. Although
the orientation of the active View orients the clipping planes, the planes are still defined rel-
ative to your model. That means that if you rotate the View after you define the clipping
planes, the planes will not rotate. They are still defined relative to model coordinates - which
cannot change. This approach insures that the same entities are always selected for the
Group, no matter how you orient the View.
When you invoke the command, the Group Selection by Screen Clipping dialog box will be
displayed. You can choose between four possible methods to orient the clipping planes.
Rectangle allows you to specify two opposite corners of a rectangular region. The sides of
the rectangle are aligned with the sides of the window. The 2 Point method defines a single
clipping plane which passes through the two locations and which is perpendicular to the
active View. Both the 3 Point and the 4 Point methods define clipping polygons, just like the
Rectangle method. With these options however, you can specify an arbitrary polygon.
Although you can specify a convex polygon with the 4 Point method, it will not clip your
model properly. Since all clipping is really done with Planes, they can only properly be com-
Group Clipping Menu
bined to form non-convex regions. The figure shows how, and why, a convex region will be
improperly clipped.
After choosing a method, you should define the locations that you want to use to position the
,(
9
clipping plane or planes. While you can always type X, Y and Z coordinates, the easiest way :
to define these positions is to use the graphics cursor to choose screen locations. Simply
move the cursor to the location you want and press the left mouse button. Then, move to the
next location and press again. As you move the cursor around in your graphics window, you
will see lines which outline the region that you are defining. These lines can assist you in
properly positioning the clipping planes. If you are typing coordinates, or you just want to
verify your final positions before pressing OK, you can press Preview. Preview will draw an
outline around the clipping region.
If you type coordinates, they must always be relative to the active Coordinate system. You
can not choose an active system in this command. Before invoking this command, you can
choose an active Coordinate System using the Tools Parameters command, or many others.
To complete the screen clipping specification, you must choose whether to clip Inside or
Outside the clipping region. For the methods that define polygonal regions, this choice
should be obvious. For the 2 Point method, Outside chooses the side of the plane indicated
by the right-hand rule going from the first to the second point and then into the screen.
Choosing Outside, will clip or remove all entities which lie outside of the clipping region,
and will select all entities which are inside the region. Choosing Inside does just the oppo-
site.
Group Clipping Plane...
... enables you to independently position the six clipping planes. For this command, the stan-
dard plane definition dialog boxes are used to position the planes. Only one plane can be
positioned each time you use this command.
When you choose Group Clipping Plane, you will see the Group Selection by Plane Clipping
dialog box. You can choose which plane to define or update by selecting one of the option
buttons from 1 to 6. If a plane is already active you will see the word “On” beside the option
button. You must also choose whether to clip the Positive Side or Negative Side of the plane.
The Positive Side, is the side toward the plane normal direction. Clipping the Positive Side
Viewing Your Model
will ignore all entities on the side toward the positive plane normal and include entities on
the other side.
When you press OK, the standard plane definition dialog box will be displayed. You can
choose any of the definition methods to orient the plane.
If you want to turn a particular plane off, select the appropriate option button, and press
Reset. If you want to turn all planes off, it is quicker to use the Group Clipping Reset com-
mand.
Working with Multiple Clipping Planes
By correctly choosing between the Positive Side and Negative Side options, you can clip
entities on either side of a plane. When you are trying to combine multiple planes to clip a
more complex region, you must be certain that these orientations are properly aligned. If
they are not, you will not select the correct portion of your model. In general, if you want to
select some region of your model using multiple planes, you should use the Positive Side
option. Then, position the clipping planes around the periphery of the region you want to
keep, with all plane normals pointing outward. As stated previously, you can not create con-
vex clipping regions.
Group Clipping Volume...
... automatically positions all six clipping planes to form a cubic (hexahedral) volume. There
are two methods for defining the desired volume, which you can select from the Group
Selection by Volume Clipping dialog box, a 2-Point method or an 8-Point method.
The 2 Point method defines a cubic volume, aligned with the Global Rectangular coordinate
system. For this method, when you press OK, the standard coordinate definition dialog box
will be displayed twice, once for each corner. The two coordinates that you specify will
define the diagonal of the clipping cube.
With the 8 Point method, you can define a general hexahedron. The standard coordinate def-
inition dialog box is displayed eight times. Each coordinate defines a corner of the hexahe-
dron. You must specify the corners in the same order as you would for an 8-noded solid
element - around the bottom face and then around the top face.
Before you press OK, you must also choose whether to clip Outside or Inside the volume. If
you clip Outside, all entities which are outside of the volume you define will be skipped. The
entities which are inside will be selected into the Group. Clipping Inside does just the oppo-
site.
Group Clipping Reset Clip...
... turns off both coordinate clipping and plane clipping. This command will ask two ques-
tions. The first asks whether you wish to turn off all plane clipping. The second asks whether
to turn off coordinate clipping. If you answer Yes to either of these questions, the associated
clipping options will be turned off.
Group Layers...
9
ence layers numbers which are less
than (but not equal to) the minimum,
:
or that reference layers which are greater than (but not equal to) the maximum.
,(
9
Hint: :
If you want to select all nodes that are loaded, or constrained (or on free edges or free faces),
simply do a View Autoscale, change the method for the grouping to the appropriate ID
method, and then do a Box pick of the entire screen. This will select all nodes that meet the
criteria.
Group Element Menu
The commands on this submenu allow you to define, edit, and delete the rules which will be
used to select Elements. You can select Elements into your Group based on their ID, Color,
Layer, Properties, Materials or Nodes they reference, the Element Type, the Element Shape,
Geometric References (Points, Curves, Surfaces, and Volume/Solids from which they were
created), or any combination of these methods.
Similar to the Group Node by ID, you can limit the ID selections to those elements that have
a Free Edge, Free Face, or a Load applied.
Group Material Menu
The commands on this submenu allow you to define, edit, and delete the rules which will be
used to select Materials. You can select Materials into your Group based on their ID, Color,
Layer, Properties or Elements which reference them, the Material Type, or any combination
of these methods.
Group Property Menu
The commands on this submenu allow you to define, edit, and delete the rules which will be
used to select Properties. You can select Properties into your Group based on their ID, Color,
Layer, Elements which reference them, Materials which they reference, the Property Type,
or any combination of these methods.
Viewing Your Model
9
stant value to each ID. All other :
options except Starting ID and Verify
Renumbering are turned off when
you select this option.
Viewing Your Model
7Modeling Tools
FEMAP has an extensive array of tools for checking and manipulating your model. These
tools range from summing forces to performing Free Edge and Free Face plots to visualize
any gaps in the model. These tools can be separated into three major areas based upon their
functions and their placement in the Menu. They are Tools, Listing, and Viewing. The com-
mands under the Tools and List Menu will be explained more fully below, while Viewing
Tools will be briefly discussed. For further explanation on the general operation of the view-
ing commands, please see the View Select and View Options sections of the Viewing Your
Model Chapter.
When you undo a command, you will see a message in the Messages and Listings Window
which tells you the command that you are undoing. The graphics windows will also be
updated to show the effect of undoing the command. Immediately following an Undo, you
may need to use View Redraw, prior to being able to graphically select an entity from the
screen - even though the entity is displayed. If you attempt to select something, and a differ-
ent entity is picked, or nothing is selected, then use View Redraw.
The commands on the File menu, and the View New, Activate and Window commands can-
not be undone. They all write files, or make changes which are non-reversible. You cannot
undo back through the initialization of either the ACIS or Parasolid advanced geometry
engines since their initialization also causes non-reversible changes to the database. If you
execute any of these commands you will be unable to back-up past that point. Other changes
which you make to resize or move a window will also not be undone, but do not cause any
loss of previous undo information.
If you are using the autorepeat feature of the Create commands to create multiple entities,
Undo will erase all of those entities as a single command. You must choose the command
from the menu to be able to backup a single creation per undo.
These commands all involve locating the workplane. They simply provide different methods
to locate it. These commands are separated into three major types: (1) Define Plane, (2)
Move Plane, and (3) Origin and Axes. In addition, you can change Snap Options with the
Snap Options button or turn the drawing of the Workplane on or off with Draw Workplane.
Define Plane
Hint:
You can also access this command from any dialog box (in a text box or drop-down list) by
using the Ctrl+W shortcut keys, or from the Workplane option on many of the Command
Toolbars (those related to creating geometry).
7
2
/6
Input (or graphically select) the Surface ID, the Point for the origin of the Workplane Grid
(At Point), and optionally a Point along the X Axis (Axis Point). FEMAP will automatically
align the Plane to the surface by orienting the Y Axis to the surface, and then use the right-
hand rule convention to align the Z axis to complete the triad.
In addition, you can decide to force the surface to be in the first quadrant of the Workplane
(First Quadrant), Reverse the direction of the Normals (Reverse Direction), or provide an
offset distance from the surface. The First Quadrant option may also reverse the Normal
direction. If you plan to perform solid boolean operations such as Extrude, it is best to leave
this option off so the default directions for Add or Remove material will be properly aligned.
Previous
The Previous method requires no input. It simply places the Workplane at its last previous
location. You can only backup one position with this command. If you perform previous
twice, the Workplane will be placed back at its original position.
Modeling Tools
The Snap To dialog box is separated into four major sections: (1) Grid and Ruler Spacing,
(2) Grid Style, (3) Workplane Size, and (4) Snap To. Each of these areas are explained more
fully below.
Hint: 2
7
2
You can access this command from any dialog box (in a text box or drop-down list) by using /6
the Ctrl+T shortcut keys, through the Quick Access command menu, or through the Work-
plane icon on the geometry sections of the Geometry.
Grid and Ruler Spacing
These options specify the spacing between snap grid locations. You can allow FEMAP to
determine the spacing (Automatic), set a Uniform spacing, or a Nonuniform spacing. Auto-
matic requires input only of the Divisions. The Divisions option specifies how many minor
tic marks will be drawn between every major tic. FEMAP will calculate a grid spacing based
upon the model size and then use the Divisions value to further partition the grid.
Uniform and Nonuniform spacing also require input of the Divisions, but you must also
specify a Grid Size. For Uniform, input a value for the X Grid Size and FEMAP will also use
this for Y. In addition, FEMAP uses this value for the Ruler Labels, which controls the fre-
quency of labels on the Workplane. Nonuniform requires the additional input of the Y Grid
Size, and the Ruler Labels. The Ruler Labels value will be used for both grids. You cannot
define nonuniform labeling.
Modeling Tools
Grid Style
The Snap Grid can be displayed either as Dots or Lines, or it can be Invisible. The style of
display has no effect on whether or not the cursor snaps to a particular location. You can
make the grid invisible and still snap to it. Conversely it can be displayed as dots or lines and
the snap mode can be set to snap to a Point, Node or screen location. The display of the Snap
Grid for an individual window can be turned on or off using the View Options command.
If the Snap Grid spacing is too small relative to the image displayed in a window, the dots or
lines could completely fill the window. In this case, the grid will not be drawn, and you will
receive a message which tells you that the grid is too dense for display.
Workplane Size
This area controls the total size of the Workplane grid, as well as the drawing of the X and Y
Rulers. The X From/To and Y From/To allow to manually scale the Workplane. This can be
very handy in instances when you are working on small sections of your model to define the
Workplane size.
It is often much easier, however, to select the Adjust to Model Size, and Adjust to Planar
Surface options. These options will allow FEMAP to automatically scale FEMAP based
upon the model size, and even attach the Workplane directly to planar surfaces when the
Workplane coincides with a planar surface. These options are much more convenient when
building a model than the manually scaling approach.
The Snap Grid is drawn as a rectangular pattern. The size of that pattern is based on your
model size and current view scale factors when using the automatic scaling. If your work-
plane and grid is rotated relative to your graphics window, the grid may not completely
cover the window display area. Also, you may manually define a Workplane which does not
fill the screen. Even in these areas where the dots or lines are not drawn, the cursor will still
snap to the grid location (assuming you have the snap mode set).
The Draw X and Y Ruler controls define whether the rulers are drawn. You will also have to
turn on the option to Show Rulers under View Options, Tools and View Style, Workplane
and Rulers to see the Rulers.
Snap To
These options choose whether the graphics cursor will select locations which correspond to a
screen location (Off), or will snap to the nearest Snap Grid location, nearest Point, or nearest
Node. Please refer to the FEMAP Users Guide for more information on each of these Snap
To methods.
Hint:
You can also set these modes from any dialog box by using the Ctrl+S (Off), Ctrl+G (Snap
Grid), Ctrl+P (Point) or Ctrl+N (Node) shortcut keys, the Quick Access menu, or from the
View Toolbar.
Operational Tools
Coord Only
This option controls whether FEMAP will use the snap mode only during coordinate defini-
tion, or every time you select an entity from the graphics window. When this is on, FEMAP
will only snap if you are trying to define a model coordinate location. All other picks will
work as if snap was off. If you turn it off however, the active snap mode will always be used
- even when you are picking entities, zooming, or any other time you click in the graphics
window.
Full Precision
This option controls how FEMAP will write graphically selected coordinates into your dia-
log boxes. It only applies when you are snapping to Nodes or Points. If Full Precision is on,
FEMAP will use the equation functions XND( ), YND( ), ZND( ), XPT( ), YPT( ) and
ZPT( ) instead of the coordinate values. In this case, when you press OK, FEMAP will use
the full double-precision database coordinates of the selected Node or Point. When Full Pre-
cision is off, the coordinate values are written to the dialog box. In this case, the location is
only as accurate as the number of digits that are in the dialog box.
7
2
2. Advanced Geometry - Parasolid /6
3. Advanced Geometry - ACIS ACIS.
Depending upon the options you purchased with
FEMAP, one, two or three of these options may be
applicable. The Standard engine uses internal FEMAP geometry to create models. This
engine does not have solid modeling or advanced surface capability. You must have the
Parasolids and/or ACIS modelers to perform solid modeling operations.
If you have selected one of these modules or FEMAP has activated one of them automati-
cally, you will see a check mark next to the Advanced Geometry command on the menu.
FEMAP will automatically choose the appropriate engine when importing geometry files. It
will also default to the proper engine if you have only purchased one of the modeling
engines. The only time you need to select the engine is if you combine an ACIS and a Para-
solid part, or are creating a solid model inside of FEMAP, and need to export either an ACIS
or Parasolid file to import to another program.
Modeling Tools
Arrow indicates
that a button is
used to access a
second level menu
Press Here to go
back to previous menu
Tools Parameters. . .
Most toolbox buttons execute commands, however, some will switch to a “toolbox sub-
menu”. In the standard toolbox, these buttons have a small black arrow, just like the menu
items that display a submenu. When you switch to a toolbox submenu, an extra button,
labelled <<Menu, will appear at the bottom of the toolbox. Press this button when you want
to go back to the previous menu.
FEMAP comes with a standard toolbox that implements many common commands. You can
create additional toolboxes or even change the standard toolbox. Refer to Appendix on Tool-
boxes for more information. If you have multiple toolboxes, the File Preferences command
is used to select the toolbox that is displayed. Simply changing the preferences will not
select a new toolbox if it is already on your screen. FEMAP only refers to the preferences
when you open a toolbox. So, if the toolbox is already open (on the screen), you must close
it and reopen it whenever you change your preferences.
Hint:
Making the Toolbox visible can significantly reduce the screen area for visualizing your
model. It is often easier to use the Command Toolbars as shortcuts to commands, and only
open the Toolbox when you are performing repeated operations which are not contained on
the View or Command Toolbars.
7
2
/6
Modeling Tools
For all of the entities which are drawn in the graphics window, you can set the Color, Next
ID and creation Increment. Whenever you create an entity, Next ID is used as the default ID,
and it is automatically incremented by the creation Increment for the next creation.
For the entity sets, you can choose an Active Set, or specify the Next ID and creation Incre-
ment. Active Sets are used to hold all entities which are created. For example, loads and con-
straints are always created in the active load or constraint set. Active entities (coordinate
systems, materials and properties) are referenced by new entities. For example, coordinates
are always specified in the active coordinate system. You may also change the Active Layer,
as well as specify a Merge Tolerance when meshing geometry. All Nodes within this toler-
ance will be automatically merged, thereby eliminating many of the coincident nodes you
would typically get in a multi-surface mesh.
This approach gives you great flexibility in your conversion. Typically however, for unit
conversions, you will set the add factors to zero. The only exception is for conversion of
temperatures.
The Base Factors are not directly used during a conversion, but provide a simple way of
specifying the twenty-four actual conversion factors. Whenever you select Calculate, (or as
an option when you choose OK), the current values of the base factors are used to update the
conversion factors. If necessary, you can then make further modifications to the conversion
factors. Reset will quickly set everything back to the default - all multiplication factors equal
to 1.0 and all add factors equal to 0.0. Invert will take all of the current conversion factors
Tools Convert Units...
and “invert” them. For example, if the factors were loaded to convert from SI to USCS, this
will invert them to become factors to do the opposite conversion.
The following table shows the method that “Calculate” uses to determine the conversion fac-
tors from the Base Factors.
Unit Conversion Factors 2
7
2
/6
Calc By uses the Base Factors
L=Length, F=Force, t=Time, M=Mass, E=Energy, T=Temp
ID Factor Calc By ID Factor Calc By
0 Length L 12 DampingRot F*t
1 Area L2 13 Mass M
2 Inertia L4 14 Mass-Length M*L
3 Force F 15 Mass/Length M/L
4 Moment F*L 16 Mass/Area M/L2
5 Spring F/L 17 Density M/L3
6 Spring Rot F 18 Mass Inertia M*L2
7 Pressure F/L2 19 Temperature T (mult &
add)
8 Acceleration L/t2 20 Thermal 1/T
Expansion
9 Acceleration 1/t2 21 Thermal E/t*L*T
Rotation Conductivity
Modeling Tools
The file is actually written and read in free-format and you must have one or more spaces
between each number, but no specific columns or number of digits is required. The first six
lines contain the base factors and must always be specified. You can also specify one or
more additional lines which directly update the conversion factors, but these are not
required. You must specify the ID of the conversion factor to be updated along with the fac-
tors. The conversion factor IDs are shown in the table above.
Note:
The following rules must be followed for all conversion factor files:
m No blank lines are allowed in conversion factor files, including at the end of the file.
m You can place comments at the end of each line in the file. Just put one or more spaces
after the add factor and before any other text.
m All factors must be separated by one or more spaces.
m No factors may be skipped - even if they are zero.
7
Variables are used in FEMAP to store a numerical value or an equation with your model.
2
Throughout FEMAP, at any time a numerical value is required, you can specify a variable, /6
or an equation which contains variables, instead of a number. Refer to the FEMAP Users
Guide for more details on specifying numerical input using variables. Before you can use
variables however, they must first be created.
Variable Names
FEMAP variable names can be up to 20 characters in length, but they must be unique within
the first 5 characters. This means that A1234, A12345, and A1234_EXTRA all reference the
same variable. Variables must start with a letter (A through Z), but can also contain numbers
(0 through 9), and underscore characters (_). Spaces are not allowed. Differences between
upper and lower case and underscores are ignored. This means that Var_1, var_1, VAR_1
and var1, all reference the same variable.
Modeling Tools
The variable creation dialog box defines new variables, and updates existing variables. You
simply enter the Variable Name. If a variable with that name (or an equivalent name based
on the rules specified above) already exists, you will modify it. If it does not exist, it will be
created.
The drop-down list is provided to show you a list of all variables which are currently
defined. After specifying a name, switch to the Value or Equation text box and define the
data to be stored with the variable. If you are updating an existing variable, you will notice
that the text box was updated to reflect the current contents of the variable. As the title
implies, you can enter either a numerical value, or an equation to be saved in the variable. If
you are entering an equation, and you want to see its current value, press Show Result. The
value will be shown under the text box. Press OK when you are satisfied with the variable
definition.
If you want additional assistance when you are defining the equation, you can either press
Equation Editor, or just type Ctrl+E. In either case, FEMAP will display the FEMAP equa-
tion editor. For more information on the equation editor, please see the FEMAP Users Guide.
command). For more information on showing layers, please see the Layers section of the
Viewing your Model chapter in this manual.
7
2
/6
Note:
You must always remember to use Ctrl+Enter to advance to the next line of text. Pressing
Enter alone will choose OK - the default command button.
After you choose all of the text options, and enter the text, you will see either the standard
coordinate definition dialog box (Model Positioned text) or the View Position dialog box
(View Positioned text), which will allow you to locate the text. A second dialog box will be
displayed if you have chosen to define a text pointer. This locates the tip of the pointer.
You can optionally add a rectangular border/box around the text and a pointer which goes
from the text to another location that you specify. Font selection is limited to the entries
shown in the drop-down list. The Color options set the color of the text, while the Border/
Pointer Color options set the color of the lines drawn for the border and pointer. The Back-
ground Color fills the background of the text inside the border (only if the border is drawn).
Modeling Tools
Justification
The justification options have two purposes. First, the lines of text are justified based on the
settings of these options when they are drawn. Secondly however, justification specifies how
the text will be located, relative to the location you specify. If the text is Left, Top justified,
the location you specify will be the Left, Top corner of the text. If the text is H Center (hori-
zontal centering) and V Center (vertical centering) justified, the location you specify will be
in the middle of the text both horizontally and vertically.
Position
There are two ways to position text entities - relative to the View or relative to the Model.
View positioned text will always appear at the same location in every view (based on a per-
centage of window size from the upper left corner). This location is completely independent
of the model orientation or scaling within the view. You should normally use this type of text
for picture titles that you want to remain in the same spot.
Model positioned text is located relative to model coordinates. It is therefore displayed
wherever those model coordinates are located in the view. This type of text is useful for
labelling a model feature since it will move with the coordinates where it is defined. View
positioned text should rarely have a pointer, since it would not point to the same location as
the model was scaled or rotated.
Visibility
Text can either be visible in All Views, or in a Single View. If you choose the Single View
option, you must identify an existing view for the display. Text display can also be turned on
or off in each view using the View Options command.
Style
These options control whether or not the text pointer and border will be drawn for this entity.
If you want a pointer, you will need to specify a set of coordinates to locate the tip of the
pointer in addition to the coordinates you specified to position the text.
Using Text to Create a Pointer
Normally, you must enter one or more characters of text. If you turn on the pointer however,
FEMAP will allow you to create a text entity which has no text. This type of entity will sim-
ply display as a pointer or vector. It will be drawn from the text position, to the tip position,
that you specify. This approach can be used to add multiple pointers from a single annota-
tion, or just to add vectors with arrowheads to your model.
Hint:
This command is also available wherever an input of a length is required, such as defining
vectors. Simply press Ctrl+D in the field where you need to input the distance, and FEMAP
will execute this command. Instead of reporting the value, FEMAP enters the result in the
current field.
7
second endpoint 2
/6
angle
first endpoint
origin
The first location specified is the origin or center of the angle. Then, two additional “end-
point” locations must be chosen. The angle is measured between the vectors formed by these
endpoint locations and the origin of the angle.
Hint:
This command is also available wherever an input of a angle is required, such as rotation
commands. Simply press Ctrl+A in the field where you need to input the angle, and FEMAP
will execute this command. Instead of reporting the value, FEMAP enters the result in the
current field.
Modeling Tools
In the listing,
ments reported. Overall mass properties are always reported, both in global rectangular coor-
dinates, and the coordinate system you choose.
The following table shows the formulas used to calculate the mass and CG for each element
type:
7
Density 2
/6
Laminate Area*(sum of Layer Thick- Area*NSM
ness*Layer Density))
Axisymmetric Area*PI*Ravg2*Density None
Solid Volume*Density None
Mass Mass None
Mass Matrix Mass(Matrix[1,1] only) None
Rigid None None
Stiffness None None
Matrix
Slide Line None None
Modeling Tools
The format of the detailed element mass listing shown above has been narrowed to fit in this
manual. You will probably have to scroll to the right to see the full report width. The type of
data listed in the Length/Area/Volume column depends on the element type. For Line Ele-
ments it contains the element length and will be followed by the letter “L”. For plane ele-
ments it contains the element area and is followed by the letter “A”. For volume elements, it
contains the element volume and is followed by the letter “V”.
The inertia calculations are done based only on a lumped/point mass formulation. Other than
mass and mass matrix elements, no elemental inertia is added. The inertia is calculated due
to the offset of masses from the center of gravity and the center of the selected coordinate
system. This approximation is not very accurate for models with very few elements, or with
a few large, high-mass elements. For most finite element models however, with large num-
bers of small elements, it is relatively accurate.
The mass and inertia report is written to the active List Destination.
use the Y-Axis vector and the Beam Cross-Section Generator to calculate the section proper-
ties. The result is output to the List Destination. A typical result is shown below:
The result includes reference to the chosen orientation as well as the section properties.
FEMAP calculates the standard section properties such as area, moments of inertia, torsional
constant, and shear area. In addition, principal moments of inertia, radius of gyration, angle
to principal axes, and warping constant are output.
This command uses the same Beam Cross-Section Generator available under Model Prop-
erty (type Beam) Shape.
Tools Section Properties Mesh Properties...
... is identical to Tools Section Properties Surface Properties except you choose elements 2
7
2
instead of a surface. FEMAP then calculates the cross-section properties of the mesh directly /6
from the elements instead of creating an internal mesh as in the case of Tools Section Prop-
erties Surface Properties. You must still define the Y-Axis vector.
In addition to listing however, by checking the final two options, you can also place the coin-
cident Nodes into Groups. Creating groups, without merging, is a good way to review the
entities that will be merged. You can display the groups, or use them in other FEMAP com-
mands, to insure you will merge the correct entities. The groups can be combined into a sin-
gle group using the Group Operations Or command.
If you specify a distance which is too large, Nodes which should not be coincident could be
merged. If it is large enough, Nodes which are used to define different corners of the same
Element could be found as coincident and merged. Since this would create an invalid Ele-
ment, FEMAP will never merge Nodes that are used to define the same Element. This pre-
caution will prevent Nodes from being merged no matter how close together they are. These
Nodes will still be reported as coincident, and added to the groups.
Similarly, FEMAP will not allow you to merge Nodes with different Output Coordinate Sys-
tems since their nodal degrees of freedom may not be aligned. These too will still be identi-
fied, and added to the groups.
When Nodes are merged, all references to the Node being eliminated are updated to the
other Node. In addition, nodal and permanent constraints on the two Nodes are merged or
combined. A report, which identifies the nodes that have been, or would be, merged is writ-
ten to the active List Destination.
7
to check for planarity. The standard 2
entity selection dialog box is used for /6
this purpose. After you make your
selections, you will see the Check Pla-
narity of Nodes dialog box.
You can specify a Max Allowable Dis-
tance from the Plane. If the perpendic-
ular distance from a Node to the plane
is larger than this distance, the Node is
considered to be “out of the plane”.
Otherwise, it is “in the plane”.
By default, Nodes which are out of plane are simply listed to the active List Destination. If
you select “Move Nodes Closer...”, they will be projected, in a direction which is normal to
the plane, onto the plane. Also by default, the plane will be determined from the three Nodes
with the minimum IDs that are also not colinear.
If you want to control this plane more precisely, choose Specify Plane Manually. If this
option is set, after you press OK, the standard plane definition dialog box will be displayed
Modeling Tools
so you can define the plane to be used. If you do choose to specify your own plane, the
default plane will be the one that was automatically determined.
When “out of plane” Nodes are found, they are listed, along with the perpendicular distance
to the plane.
Hint:
When you are going to “Move Nodes” onto the plane, you will almost always want to spec-
ify the plane manually. FEMAP looks at all of the nodes that you select to determine the
“best fit” plane. If you have nodes that are “out of plane”, they will, in fact, cause the plane
to be rotated, and you will project onto a skewed plane. When you specify the plane manu-
ally, FEMAP still chooses a plane, and uses it as the default for the plane definition dialogs.
You will then have a chance to review and change the definition.
Other Uses for Check Planar
While this command was intended to be used to check for the planarity of Nodes, it has sev-
eral other interesting applications.
Distance from a Plane to a Node:
If you need to find the perpendicular distance from a plane to one or more Nodes in your
model use this command. Select the Nodes that you want, then specify a very small (or zero)
Max Allowable Distance... and choose Specify Plane Manually. Do not select Move Nodes
Closer.... Define the desired plane. The perpendicular distances will be listed.
Projecting onto a Plane:
If you need to project some portion of your model onto a plane, you can also use this com-
mand. Select the Nodes to be projected, specify a large “Max Allowable Distance...” so all
nodes chosen will be within this distance from the plane, and choose “Specify Plane Manu-
ally”. In this case, also select “Move Nodes Closer...” and define the plane that you want.
The selected Nodes will be projected onto the plane.
this option is not selected, only elements of the same type are considered to be coincident.
The Beam would never coincide with the Bar.
If Check Elements with Different Shapes is selected, a triangular element will be considered
to be coincident with a quadrilateral element as long as all three Nodes are also referenced
by the quadrilateral. This same comparison technique applies to all other shapes as well.
In addition to just checking and listing coincident elements, the coincident pairs can also be
placed into groups. You can then review these groups to update or delete the coincident ele-
ments. If more than two elements are coincident with each other, some care must be taken,
because there will still only be two groups.
Normally, Mass Elements are ignored by this command. If you choose Check Mass Ele-
ments, they will be included. If Check Elements with Different Shapes is also selected, every
Mass Element which references a Node which is also used by other Elements will be identi-
fied. You can identify Mass Elements which are coincident with each other by turning off
either the... Different Types or... Different Shapes options.
Coincident elements are identified in a report that is written to the active List Destination.
7
2
Each of the four checking options can be /6
independently enabled or disabled. You
must also specify limit values for each of the
enabled options. Any element which
exceeds one of these limits for an enabled
checking option will be listed to the active
List Destination.
Only Plane and Volume elements are
checked by this command. Line and Other
element types are simply ignored.
If you select the Make Group with Distorted
Elements option, a new group will be created that contains all of the elements that fail the
check. This group can then be displayed or used for modifications to your model.
Modeling Tools
Alternate taper checking is only done on quadrilateral faces. It will identify elements which
have trapezoidal faces.
Internal Angles Checking...
... evaluates whether the
Angle deviation from
included angles at the cor- 90 degrees
Angle deviation from
60 degrees
ners of an element face
deviate from an optimal
condition. For quadrilat-
Tools Check Normals...
eral faces, the deviation is based on a 90 degree angle. For triangular faces, the deviation is
based on a 60 degree angle.
This check will identify elements which are skewed from a square or equilateral triangle.
Although similar, Taper Checking will identify trapezoidal faces, but will ignore a face
which is a rhombus. The Internal Angles check will find both variations.
Warping Checking...
... evaluates the planarity of
Warping calculated from
element faces. All of the No Warping this angle 50% Warping
other checks evaluate
parameters within the plane
of the element faces, but
this check evaluates “out of
plane” parameters. This
check only looks at quadri-
lateral faces. Internally, this check divides the quadrilateral face into triangles. If the face is
planar, then all triangles should be coplanar. That is, their normals will all point in the same
direction. If the face is warped however, the normals will not be in the same direction. This
check evaluates the maximum angle between the normals, and identifies any elements where
the angle exceeds the limit you specify.
Tet Collapse...
...evaluates the tetrahedral elements
in your model. A collapsed (flat) tet-
Longest Edge
rahedral element will either prevent
the solver code from running, or will
2
7
Shortest Height
give inaccurate results. This check 2
computes the distance from the /6
plane of each face of the tetrahedral
element to the fourth node for that
face. FEMAP then takes the ratio of
the longest to shortest value as the
value to check for the collapse of the
tetrahedral element. The default
value is 10.
All selected elements which have normals that point opposite the specified vector will be
listed to the active List Destination. If you choose the Update/Reverse Element Normals
option, those elements will be reversed. Element normals are reversed in the same manner as
the Modify Update Reverse command.
Obviously, since you are specifying a single direction, elements from a complex model
which lie in multiple planes and in different orientations cannot always be checked at the
same time. The checking is based on the sign of the dot (or scalar) product of the desired
direction with the current element normal. This approach can handle elements which are not
perpendicular to the direction you specify, but you should still select elements which are
somewhat coplanar.
It can be particularly difficult to align the normals of cylindrical or spherical geometries. In
this case the normals do, and should, point in different directions. You can still use this com-
mand for those geometries by selecting a Coordinate System for the comparison. To check a
cylindrical geometry, you should first define a cylindrical coordinate system with its Z axis
pointing along the cylindrical axis. Then if you select that coordinate system, and define a
radial vector, the element normals will all be checked against the radial direction. You can
then set to point either inward or outward based on the direction of the vector you specify.
The same technique applies to spherical coordinate systems.
When you invoke this command, you will be asked whether to include Nodal Permanent
Constraints in the calculations. If you press Yes, all permanent constraints will be combined
with the nodal constraints from the active constraint set. If you press No, only the nodal con-
straints from the active constraint set will be used.
To calculate the Constraint Factors, FEMAP adds 1.0 to the appropriate factor for each node
that has a particular degree of freedom constrained. If the output coordinate system of the
node rotates the nodal degrees of freedom, the direction cosines of the constrained degrees
of freedom are added, instead of 1.0.
Only nodes which are used to define elements are included in this calculation. This approach
ignores constraints which are properly assigned to reference or orientation nodes, but which
do not really constrain your model.
Since this command uses the active constraint set, you will have to invoke it multiple times
if you have multiple constraint sets.
Tools Check Coincident Loads...
7
2
Hint: /6
This command is very useful when combining Geometric and Finite Element loads in the
same model. You can use the Model Load Expand command to permanently expand geomet-
ric loads to nodal/elemental loads, and then use this command to combine these loads with
nodal/elemental loads already created in your model.
If Expand and Include Geometric Loads is turned off, no geometric loads will be included.
The Partial Model option allows selection of specific elements and nodes to include in the
summation. With this option Off, the entire load set is used.
When computing total effective moment, the location you specify will be used to find the
force couples caused by the applied forces and pressures. When you press OK, a report in
the following format will be produced. It will be written to the active List Destination.
Summation of Forces, Moments and Pressures for Set 1
Nodal Force FX = 46. FY = 0. FZ = 0.
Nodal Moment MX = 0. MY = 0. MZ = 0.
Pressure Force FX = 0. FY = 0. FZ = 0.
Totals
About Location X = -0.283536 Y = 0.206208 Z = 0.
Forces FX = 46. FY = 0. FZ = 0.
Moments MX = 0. MY = 0. MZ = -2.71259
In the first section of this report, all loads are simply added in global rectangular coordinates.
The Pressure Force is determined by multiplying the Elemental Pressures you defined by the
element face area. This force is then applied in the direction opposite the face normal, at the
centroid of the face.
The Totals section of the report shows the location you selected. The total Forces will
include both the Nodal Force and the Pressure Force. The total Moments will include Nodal
Moments, and the force couples produced by the Nodal Forces and Pressure Forces around
the location you selected.
List Menu Commands
7
cursor will return to its normal pointer or crosshair shape. If you are just listing information 2
to a file, and you have screen messages turned off, the changing cursor shape will let you /6
know that the listing has completed.
Since FEMAP automatically aborts whenever you press a key or the left mouse button, you
can never press either of them before a listing is complete - unless you want to abort.
For each variable, there are two items reported - the Value of the variable when it was stored,
and the defining Equation. When used in equations, the Value can be accessed by using
“!variable_name”, and the Equation can be accessed by using “@variable_name”.
For each layer, there are two items reported - the title and layer color.
This listing format simply reports the options which you defined in the Create Text com-
mand. Note the differences between screen positioned text (ID 1) and model positioned text
(ID 2). Screen positioned text lists X and Y positions in percentages of the view from the
upper left corner. Model positioned text lists X, Y and Z coordinates. The text itself will be
listed on as many lines as you defined in the text entity.
7
2
you select the Sort by method, Sort Order (Ascending or Descending), and the Listing Coor- /6
dinate System. Sorting methods available include the common methods (see Common List-
ing Options above) and by Definition Coordinate System. The Point listing looks like the
following:
ID Def CS X1 X2 X3 Color MeshSize > Layer #Curve
_______________________________________________________________________
1 0 0. 0. 0. 24 0.5 1 0
2 0 1. 0. 0. 24 1 0
3 0 1. 1. 0. 24 0.25 1 0
4 0 -1.91421 0.239276 0. 24 0.25 1 0
5 0 -0.714612 0.553248 0. 24 1 0
6 0 1.63669 -0.530196 0. 24 0.25 1 0
In the listing,
In the listing,
Points are the IDs of the points which are referenced by this
curve. For lines, these are the endpoints. For arcs and
circles they are the center, start, middle and endpoints.
For splines, they are the control points.
#Surface the number of surfaces which reference the curve.
Length the length of the curve. This is the arc length/perimeter
for arcs and circles.
Radius the curve radius - only listed for arcs and circles.
Angle the included angle - only listed for arcs and circles.
The width of the sample listing shown above has been reduced to fit within the manual mar-
gins. You will notice that on many video adapters, you will have to scroll right in the Mes-
sages and Lists Window to see the end of this listing.
7
1 Bilinear 2 3 x 4 8 9 10 R 11 R 1 0
2
2 Revolve
3 Ruled
2
2
8 x 4
3 x 4
5
3
12 R
14
13
1 R 15
1
1
0
0 /6
4 Revolve 2 4 x 4 17 16 R 18 R 4 1 0
5 Bezier 2 16 x 16 21 22 7 R 23 1 0
20 19 R
6 Coons 2 16 x 16 7 22 R 21 R 23 R 1 0
In the listing,
In addition, if the surface forms the face of a solid, the number of segments, the geometric
engine (Parasolids or ACIS), and the address of the face in the geometric engine database
will be listed.
The width of the sample listing shown above has been reduced to fit within the manual mar-
gins. You will notice that on many video adapters, you will have to scroll right in the Mes-
sages and Lists Window to see the end of this listing.
In the listing,
7
ing Selection Order will order the listing in the order that you selected the Points. This 2
option allows you to list the entities in any order, simply by selecting them in that order. /6
Other common sorting methods include Color, Layer, Position (X, Y, or Z), and Absolute
Value of Position.
Sort By:
In addition to the common options (please see Common List Options section above), you
can also list by the Definition Coordinate System. The position sort methods (X, Y, and Z)
use the coordinate system origin.
The Coordinate System listing looks like the following:
Coordinate System 3 - Base System
Type Def CS Origin Rotation Color Layer Referenced By
Rect 0 X=0.264032 X=30. 60 1 CS=1 PT=0
Y=0.232348 Y=30. NO=0 MT=0
Z=0. Z=-75. PR=0 CN=0
LD=0
Coordinate System 4 - Secondary CSys
Type Def CS Origin Rotation Color Layer Referenced By
Sph 3 X=-0.281312 X=-178.223 60 1 CS=0 PT=0
Y=-1.10288 Y=17.0431 NO=0 MT=0
Z=-0.64794 Z=-148.036 PR=0 CN=0
LD=0
In the listing,
In the listing,
The width of the sample listing shown above has been reduced to fit within the manual mar-
gins. You will notice that on many video adapters, you will have to scroll right in the Mes-
sages and Lists Window to see the end of this listing.
7
2
sort (X, Y, and Z). Element listings resemble the following: /6
Element 1 - PLATE
Property 1 Color 124 Layer 1
Nodes 9 5 6 10
Element 2 - PLATE
Property 1 Color 124 Layer 1
Nodes 6 7 10
Element 3 - BEAM
Property 2 Color 124 Layer 1
Orientation Node 11
Offset Vector End 1 0. 0. 0.1
Offset Vector End 2 0. 0. 0.1
Release End 1 12---- End 2 ------
Nodes 3 8
Element 4 - BEAM
Property 2 Color 124 Layer 1
Orientation Vector -0.951615 0.307293 0.
Nodes 8 12
Element 5 - RIGID
Property 2 Color 124 Layer 1
Nodes 16 15 11 12
Many other formats are also used for the other Element types, but they all follow the conven-
tions shown above. The Element type is listed on the first line, along with the ID. The next
line lists the Property, Color, and Layer which are referenced by the Element. Additional ele-
ment data (like orientation, releases, and offsets) are then given. Finally, all of the nodes are
listed.
Modeling Tools
Similar formats are used for the other Material types, and they follow the conventions shown
above. The Material ID and Title are listed first, followed by the Type, Color, and Layer.
#Prop is the number of Properties which reference this Material. Finally, the Material values
are listed in three major categories - STIFFNESS, STRENGTH and THERMAL. These cat-
egories directly correspond to the grouping of the data in the Create Material dialog boxes.
Function Dependent Materials
If you have defined materials which reference functions in your model, you will see addi-
tional lines of data mixed between those shown above. Following each of the lines of proper-
ties, and aligned under each of the corresponding values will be a second line listing the
function references. Because of space constraints, the full function title will not be listed, but
the ID and the beginning of the title will be shown.
and Laminate Plates which reference multiple Materials, will all sort as if their Material ID was zero.
Property listings resemble the following:
Property 1 - W8x20 Wide Flange
Type BEAM Color 110 Layer 1 Material 6 #Elem 0
End A Area 5.89 ShearF, K1 0. ShearF, K2 0.
I1 69.4 I2 9.22 I12 0.
NS Mass/Len 0. J 78.6
Recover Stresses At: Y 3.43 Z 1.25
Property 2 - 25# Lumped Mass
Type MASS Color 110 Layer 1 CoordSys 0 #Elem 0
Mass, X 25. Mass, Y 25. Mass, Z 25.
Inertia, I11 100. I22 100. I33 100.
I21 0. I31 0. I32 0.
Offset, X 0. Y 0. Z 0.
Property 3 - 1" Dia Tube (.1" wall)
Type TUBE Color 110 Layer 1 Material 6 #Elem 0
Outer Dia 1. Inner Dia 0.8 NS Mass/Len 0.
Property 4 - Composite Plate
Type LAMINATE Color 110 Layer 1 Material 6 #Elem 0
Failure Theory NONE Bond Shear Allowable 0.
Bottom Surf 0. NS Mass/Area 0.
Layer 1 Material 1 Thickness 5.E-2 Angle 45.
Layer 2 Material 2 Thickness 5.E-2 Angle 0.
Layer 3 Material 3 Thickness 5.E-2 Angle -45.
Property 5 - 1/2" Plate
Type PLATE Color 110 Layer 1 Material 6 #Elem 0
Thickness 0.5 Top Fiber 0.25 Bot Fiber -0.25
NS Mass/Area 0. 12I/T**3 0. Tshear/T 0.
Similar formats are used for the other Property types, and they follow the conventions shown
above. The Property ID and Title are listed first, followed by the Type, Color, and Layer. The
Material or Coordinate System that the Property references is listed next. #Elem is the num-
ber of Elements which reference this Property. Finally, the Property values are listed. These
property values directly correspond to the data in the Model Property dialog boxes.
7
than listing most other entities in that you must first select the sets to list You will see a dia-
2
log box which allows you to select the type of loads that you want to list. /6
By default, all load types will be
selected. You can turn off certain types
by deselecting those options.
You may also decide to list all loads of
a certain type (the Select All option) or
you will be asked to select the entities
where Loads should be listed. This
requires entity selection dialog boxes
for each of the types you requested
Under Defined On (two for Node/
Elem). If you only want a specific load
type, turn off all other types. If you
turn off all of a certain type, the entity
selection dialog box for this type will
not be displayed.
Modeling Tools
There are no sort options available for Load listings. All selected loads for each selected set
are grouped together in the report. Load Sets are listed in order of their IDs - lowest to high-
est. If you select a load type, but no loads of that type exist in a set, a header identifying the
load type is printed, but no loads are listed.
Load listings resemble the following:
Load Set 1 - Untitled
Body Loads
Acceleration - Translational X 2. Y 2. Z 2.
Acceleration - Rotational X 0. Y 0. Z 0.
Origin - for Rotations X 0. Y 0. Z 0.
Default Temperature 75.
. . .
Load Set 1 - Untitled
Nodal Forces and Moments
Node Color Layer Def CS Force Moment Phase
2 10 1 0 X 7. X 0. 0.
Y 0. Y 0.
Z 0. Z 0.
Load Set 1 - Untitled
Nodal Enforced Displacements
Node Color Layer Def CS Translational Rotational Phase
4 10 1 0 X X 90.
Y 0.1 Y
Z 5.E-2 Z
Load Set 1 - Untitled
Nodal Temperatures
Node Color Layer Temperature
2 0 0 60.
3 0 0 60.
Load Set 1 - Untitled
Elemental Pressures
Element Color Layer Face ID Pressure Phase
1 10 1 1 4. 0.
4 10 1 1 4. 0.
Load Set 1 - Untitled
Elemental Temperatures
Element Color Layer Temperature
1 0 0 30.
Any body loads which are not activated for a specific Load Set are not listed. In the sample
above, all body loads are enabled, even though some are zero. The X, Y, and Z components
listed for Nodal Loads are given in the Load Definition Coordinate System (Def CS).
There are no sort options available for Constraint listings. All selected Constraints for each
selected set are grouped together in the report. Constraint Sets are listed in order of their IDs
- lowest to highest. If you select a Constraint type, but no Constraints of that type exist in a
set, you will see a header which identifies the type, but no data will be listed.
Constraint listings resemble the following:
Constraint Set 1 - Sample Constraints
Constraints
Node ID 1 DOF 123456 CSys 0 Color 120 Layer 1
Node ID 24 DOF 1---56 CSys 0 Color 120 Layer 1
Node ID 30 DOF 1---56 CSys 0 Color 120 Layer 1
Node ID 36 DOF 1---56 CSys 0 Color 120 Layer 1
Node ID 42 DOF 1---56 CSys 0 Color 120 Layer 1
Constraint Equations
ID 1 Color 8312 Layer 1
Node 7 DOF 1 Coefficient 1.
Node 13 DOF 1 Coefficient 1.
Node 19 DOF 1 Coefficient -1.
The DOF numbers (1 to 6) correspond to the TX, TY, TZ, RX, RY and RZ degrees of free-
dom. In the listing, a number indicates that the degree of freedom is constrained. Uncon-
strained degrees of freedom are indicated by a dash (-). The CSys is the output coordinate
system of the associated node. Since geometry (Points, Curves, Surfaces) does not contain
output coordinate systems, this information is not written for these types of constraints.
7
2
/6
For each function, the type is reported along with the Number of Material and Load refer-
ences to the function. Also listed are the XY data points.
In the Clipping section of the report, up to 6 planes can be listed, depending upon how many
are enabled. In the Rules section, there may be many subsections. There is one subsection
for each type of rule that you define. Similarly, there may be many additional Selected Enti-
ties subsections, depending upon your model and the group definition. For large models, this
section can become very, very long. It should usually be disabled.
List View. . .
You will see that several sections have been abbreviated by ellipses (. . .) in the sample list-
ing. The options listed, all match the values that you chose in the various View commands.
7
2
Filenames
Model Untitled
/6
Scratch File P:\~MOD392B.TMP
Model Size 8192 bytes
Min Max Number Next Active Color
Coordinate System 3 60
Point 1 24
Curve 1 100
Surface 1 2
Volume 1 62
Text 1 74
Node 1 46
Element 1 124
Material 1 55
Property 1 110
Load Set 1
Constraint Set 1
View 1 1 1 2
Group 1
Output Set 1
Output Format 1
Workplane Origin X Y Z
0. 0. 0.
Workplane Normal X Y Z
0. 0. 1.
Workplane X Axis X Y Z
1. 0. 0.
Snap X Spacing Y Spacing Angle
1. 1. 0.
Model Extents X Y Z
-0.5 -0.5 -0.5
0.5 0.5 0.5
Active Views
1
Modeling Tools
The sample listing was produced from an empty model. The Min, Max, Number and Active
fields will be filled in as entities are created. The Active Views section of the report lists the
IDs of the Views which are active.
Hint:
If you need to print messages or listings that are already in the Messages and Lists Window,
you can simply use the File Print command, and select the Messages option.
View Style (View Select command)
7.3.1 Features
This style draws all entities and therefore is a relatively fast drawing method. Lines of the
same color, which overlap, alternately draw and erase themselves. The result of this style is a
plot which only shows color boundaries. If you have assigned different colors to different
properties or materials, this option will provide a quick method of visualizing boundaries
between properties/materials.
7
2
The Hidden Line removal options do require substantial calculations, and can be somewhat /6
slower than the other drawing methods. Also, surfaces which share the same space as ele-
ments may not be completely hidden. If either the drawing speed or hidden line removal is
deemed to be inadequate, change to Render mode (by selecting the Render option at the bot-
tom of the View Style section). Render mode will significantly increase your drawing speed,
allow you to dynamically rotate a hidden line plot, and hide a surface below elements which
share a common space.
Render mode is recommended for all complex 3-D shapes when Hidden Line is active.
model in Free Edge mode before running the analysis. This will remove the possibility of
having unwanted gaps in your model.
This chapter provides information related to postprocessing. Postprocessing does not have its
own menu on the FEMAP Main Menu, but there are specific commands related directly to
Postprocessing. These commands can be separated into five major areas based upon their
functionality and menu area. They are:
1. Type of Views (View Select command - Deformed, Contour, and XY Plots)
2. View Options - Postprocessing Category
3. Specialized Postprocessing (Advanced Post command)
4. Output Manipulation (Model Output Menu)
5. Output Reporting (Output Listing)
Each of these areas are discussed in the following section, however, the first section of this
chapter will be a brief explanation of the overall Postprocessing procedure.
8.1 Procedure
The postprocessing procedure in FEMAP is relatively straightforward. It simply involves
obtaining the results from the analysis program, selecting appropriate views, modifying
options on these views, and manipulating and/or reporting output.
Once FEMAP is finished reading the file, you can now begin to perform postprocessing
tasks.
Hint:
At this point, if you have a solid model, you may want to go back into View Select and
change the Model Style to a Quick or Hidden Line style and also turn on Render Mode. It
will be much easier to view your results than when drawing the entire model. You also may
want to change to Render mode to allow dynamic rotation of your model while in the
deformed and contour state.
You can continue to go back into View Select and change the Deformed and Contour Data to
show different contours, or to change styles. You may even use the Model Data button to
show only a specific group of elements or even change to an XY Plot. These features will be
explained in the View Types (View Select command) description contained later in this
chapter.
Besides changing view types, you may want to change the colors or levels of contours, or
other details about the view itself. This is accomplished with the View Options command.
The View Select dialog box is divided into several sections. The Model Style and XY Style
option buttons comprise the first section. These options choose the method for display. You
can choose any one option from these two groups of styles. If you choose a model style, your
model will be displayed in the view, using all of the other options you choose. If instead you
choose an XY Style, the view will contain a 2D, XY plot of the selected output data or func-
tion. XY Styles are only available when you have output data available for postprocessing
(or functions).
2
3
This description will concentrate on the application of this command to postprocessing. All 67
of the Model Style types (Draw Model, Quick Hidden Line, etc.) also apply to postprocess- 35
2
ing, but they will not be discussed here. Please see the View Select section under Viewing &
Your Model for more information on these styles. (6
6,
The second section of the dialog box consists of the Deformed Style and Contour Style 1
option buttons. Here you choose one option from each category to define the type of post-
*
processing display that you want to have. The default settings (None-Model Only) are used
to create a normal model display which does not use any output data for postprocessing. The
settings of these options are ignored if you choose an XY style.
Postprocessing
The final section of the dialog box, located under the previous sections, consists of the XY
Data, Model Data, and Deformed and Contour Data command buttons. Each of these buttons
displays an additional dialog box which allows you to select the model or output data which
will be used in the view. By pushing the Model Data button and selecting a group, you can
limit your postprocessing view to a single group. This is especially valuable in large models.
Output
Deformed
Will Display Data Typical Uses
Style
Type
None Model Only None Modelling.
Deform Model, deformed by Nodal Static display of dis-
output data. placements or eigenvec-
tors
Animate Same as Deform, Nodal Animated display of dis-
but animating. Ani- placements or eigenvec-
mation positions tors
based on output
data.
Choosing Deformed and Contour Styles
Output
Deformed
Will Display Data Typical Uses
Style
Type
Animate - Same as Animate. Nodal Animated display of
MultiSet Animation positions transient analysis results,
based on output data deployments or other
from multiple Out- motion with relative
put Sets positions stored in multi-
ple sets.
Vector Model with vectors Nodal Visualization of direc-
representing direc- tion and magnitude of
tion and magnitude displacements, eigenvec-
of output data. tors or forces
Trace Similar to Animate- Nodal Visualization of deforma-
MultiSet except will tion history from a tran-
display trace lines sient analysis.
connecting historical
positions of nodes.
Deformed Style
Vector/Trace Style
2
3
67
35
2
&
(6
6,
1
*
Postprocessing
Output
Contour
Will Display Data Typical Uses
Style
Type
None Model Only None Modelling.
Contour Model, elements Nodal Contour of elemental
will display contour loads, elemental stresses,
areas or lines - nodal displacements,
These are areas or nodal stresses...
lines of constant out-
put value.
Criteria Like Contour, Elem Same as Contour. Crite-
except each element ria allows you to limit
is colored based on a the display to portions of
single output value your model which have
for the element. output values that meet a
specific criterion.
Beam Model, with con- Ends of Understanding variation
Diagram toured diagrams on Line of output values along
line elements, much Elem the length of line ele-
like 3D shear and ments.
bending moment
diagrams.
IsoSurface For models with Nodal Good for understanding
solid elements - inte- output distributions
rior surfaces of con- inside your model. Con-
stant output value. tours show variations on
the outer surface - Isos-
urfaces show inside.
Section For models with Nodal Understanding output
Cut solid elements - distribution on one or
enhanced contouring more arbitrary planes
method. Shows con- inside your model.
tours on any planar
cut thru your model.
Vector Model with vectors in Nodal Visualization of magni-
contour colors at the or Ele- tude and direction of
elemental centroid or mental stresses/strains.
nodal position
Choosing Deformed and Contour Styles
8705.
Contour Style 8307.
7909.
7511.
7113.
6714.
6316.
5918.
5520.
5122.
4724.
4325.
3927.
3529.
3131.
2733.
Output Set: NASTRAN Case 1
2335.
Contour: Plate Top VonMises Stress
8705.
Criteria Style 8307.
7909.
7672.1 7511.
5903. 7113.
5903.
6714.
2599.
5288.6 6316.
8705.3 2599.
5918.
3925.4
3925.4 5520.
7225.7 8705.3
4473.9 5122.
7225.7 4724.
4804.
4804. 4325.
3927.
2334.5
3529.
3131.
2733.
Output Set: NASTRAN Case 1
2335.
Criteria: Plate Top VonMises Stress
-5.374E-15
Beam Diagram
-0.703
-1.406
-2.109
-2.813
-3.516
-4.219
-4.922
5. 1.125
2
3
-5.625
123456
-6.328 67
-7.031
-7.734
35
12.2
2
&
-8.438
-9.141
-9.844
(6
-10.55 6,
Output Set: LOADING
-11.25 1
Contour: Beam End A Moment2
*
Postprocessing
IsoSurfaces
Section Cut
The tables above list typical uses for the various postprocessing styles. In fact, FEMAP does
not really limit you in any way. The only restrictions are the obvious ones - you can only do
Beam Diagrams if you have line elements, and you can only do IsoSurfaces/Section Cuts if
you have solid elements. You can choose any type of output data for any style. The same
applies to the listed output data types. The table lists the type of data required for the style,
Skip Deformation Option
but if you choose data of the opposite type (Nodal vs. Elemental), FEMAP will automati-
cally convert it prior to completing the display. Refer to the Model Output Convert com-
mand for more information on this process.
If you are using the Animate-MultiSet deformation style, you should also select a Final Out-
put Set and the Output Set Increment. This additional set is required since this style of ani-
mation uses data from multiple sets. The first animation frame uses data from the original
Output Set that you specified, then one animation frame will be generated for each addi-
tional output set, up to, and including the Final Output Set that you select. If you select an
output set increment other than 1, FEMAP will skip output sets based upon this increment.
Frames will only be generated for the sets where the selected Output Vector exists. If you do
not specify a Final Output Set (or if you specify a nonexistent set), FEMAP will generate
one frame for every set with an ID greater than the original Output Set that you select.
Making it Easier to Select Output Data
When you are trying to select output vectors for deformations and contours, you can some-
times become overwhelmed by the amount of output data FEMAP lets you postprocess. By
default, the drop-down lists contain all of the output vectors from the Output Set that you
selected. This can result in hundreds of vectors. If you know that you want to select a spe-
cific type of output, you can choose a Category other than Any Output. When you select a
different Category, like Stress, the drop-down lists will only show output data of that type.
Similarly, if Data at Corners is checked, the lists will show element corner output, otherwise
they will not. Since element corner data is normally not directly selected for deformations or
contours, it is usually best to leave this option unchecked.
If you create output data in FEMAP, you have the opportunity to specify your own catego-
ries (up to 255). You can choose Other, and specify the category number to list this type of
data.
Working with Complex Output
If you are postprocessing complex output, you can choose the type that you want to select
from the “Type” option. By default, Magnitude data will be shown, but you can review all
other types by simply changing this option.
Reviewing Your Output
As you select output sets or vectors from the drop-down lists, you will notice that the right
side of the dialog box is continually updated. The values shown here tell you where the out-
put was generated, and the maximum and minimum values in the vector. By scrolling
through the list of available vectors, you can use this feature to quickly review your output
data. The maximum and minimum values may also give you a good idea of what to expect
before you actually see the data graphically.
Quickly Choosing Output Data
In addition to using the View Select command, you can also access the PostProcessing Data
dialog box directly from the Quick Access menu. Just press the right mouse button while
you are pointing inside any graphics window and choose Post Data. You can also get to this
dialog box by pressing Shift +F5.
Selecting Data for a Deformed or Contour Style
Contour Options
The contour options dialog box
allows access to the type of
contour and data conversion to
perform. When you select this
option, The Select Contour
Options dialog box appears.
This dialog box is separated
into five major sections: (1)
Contour Type, (2) Data Conver-
sion, (3) Rendered Contours,
(4) Element Contour Disconti-
nuities, and (5) Other Options.
Each of these areas are dis-
cussed more fully below. All of these options can also be accessed through the View Options
command (Category - Postprocessing, Option - Contour Type).
Contour Type
This section allows you to pick from either Nodal or Elemental contouring. Nodal contour-
ing simply averages all values at the nodes and cannot account for any discontinuities in
material or geometry. When Nodal is selected, a relatively smooth contour will appear,
although the results will not be accurate at material boundaries or property breaks. In addi-
tion, the Other Options section will not be available. Nodal contouring should not be used
across material boundaries or changes in properties such as plate thickness since averaging
stresses across these areas results in inaccurate results at the interface.
If Elemental contouring is chosen, you can specify which discontinuities in the model to use
in the contouring to obtain an accurate representation of the results. This type of contouring
is very useful for multiple material models as well as models with plates with that intersect
at large angles or have varying thickness. Stresses will not be averaged across these values.
The resulting graphics may not be as “smooth” as nodal contouring, especially at material
breaks, but it provides a more accurate representation of the results when discontinuities
exist in the model. In addition, element contouring allows you to view both top and bottom
stresses of plates on one plot, as well as an additional output vector (see Other Options
below). 2
3
67
35
2
Note: &
(6
Element contouring has the added feature that if you select No Averaging under Element 6,
1
Contour Discontinuities (discussed more fully below), the pure data at the element centroid *
and corners is plotted without any manipulation. This provides a graphical representation of
the pure data.
Postprocessing
Data Conversion
This section controls how FEMAP converts the results from pure data at element centroids,
corners, and nodes to the actual continuous graphical representation. There are three options
to convert the data: (1) Average, (2) Max Value, and (3) Min Value. If Average is on,
FEMAP will take an average of the surrounding values to obtain a result, whereas Max or
Min Value will just use the max or min value, respectively, of the pertinent surrounding loca-
tions. The Min Value option should only be used when performing contours for vectors
where the minimum values are actually the worst case, such as Safety Factor or large com-
pressive stresses. You can also choose to use any elemental corner data (if it has been recov-
ered from the analysis program) or to skip it for any of these methods.
The easiest way to understand the data conversion process is through an example. If an inte-
rior node of a continuous mesh (no geometric or material breaks) is attached to four ele-
ments, there will be four values associated with it for a given stress vector (either corner data
or if Use Corner Data is off elemental centroidal data). If these values are 100, 200, 300 and
400, an Average conversion would result in 250 at that node, a Max conversion with 400,
and a Min conversion of 100. This procedure would be used at all nodal locations to get the
basis of the plot, and then FEMAP would linearly interpolate to produce the corresponding
colors between locations. Thus, the data conversion can significantly affect the results if
there is a large gradient across adjacent elements. If elemental contours are On, FEMAP will
only average results at the specific node if there are no discontinuities as chosen by you
under Elemental Contour Discontinuities. FEMAP will produce results at each node and
centroid of the elements, and then use this information to generate the display.
Hint:
You can use the difference in Max and Average results to make a quick estimate of the fidel-
ity of the model. If there is a large difference between these two contours, especially at loca-
tions that do not have sharp corners or breaks in the model, your FEA model may require a
finer mesh.
Rendered Contours
This section allows you to choose between Continuous Colors and Color Levels for Render
Mode. Versions prior to v6.0 required continuous colors due to limitations in render mode.
FEMAP v6.0 and beyond now provide support for Color Levels by producing a texture map,
but this can be significantly slower than the Continuous Colors depending upon your graph-
ics card.
The speed of the Color Levels option depends upon the ability of the graphics board to pro-
duce texture maps. If your graphics board supports acceleration of texture maps, this option
will not be much slower than the Continuous Colors option. If the graphics board does not
accelerate texture maps, this option could be significantly slower.
Selecting Data for a Deformed or Contour Style
side of the plane toward the positive plane normal. In addition, all elements that cross the
plane are cut. Normal contours are displayed over the entire model, including on the cutting
plane. To set up this type of Section Cut, just choose Cut Model, then press the Define Sec-
tion button to define the cutting plane.
The other type of Section Cut, “Contour Sections”, allows you to pass one or more cutting
planes through your model. Rather than showing contours on the rest of your model, this
method makes all model elements transparent. The front faces are simply drawn as outlines
(or with a transparent fill pattern if you turn on element fill), and backfaces are filled with
background. Contours are drawn on the cutting planes only. In this mode, cutting planes do
not actually cut, or remove any elements, they simply locate the contours.
To setup this type of plot, first choose the Contour Section option, press the Define Section
button to define the first cutting plane, and finally define the Number and Spacing for the
sections. Spacing is only used if Number is greater than one. It is the perpendicular distance
between the planes. If you specify a positive number, the additional planes are located along
the positive normal to the first plane that you defined. Choose a negative number if you want
them along the negative normal.
Hint:
For other effects, try these options:
m If you just want to see contours on the cutting plane, use View Options and turn off the
display of elements. Only the cutting planes will be displayed.
m If you want to see the element edges on the cutting plane, use View Options, choose the
Tools and View Style category, and the Filled Edges option. Then set Section Cut Edges
to “Show Cut Edges”. All cut edges will be displayed in the Filled Edge View Color.
m Choose Free Edge Style to show just the outlines of your model along with the section
cuts.
Displaying IsoSurfaces
Unlike Section Cuts, IsoSurfaces do not require any additional options to be chosen. The
display mode of IsoSurfaces is much the same as the display of Contour Section planes - all
elements are shown in a transparent mode so that you can see the IsoSurfaces inside. Front
faces are transparent, and backfaces are filled.
Note:
Before using View Select to choose an IsoSurface display, you should use View Option to
reduce the number of contours. While 16 or more contour levels are usually appropriate for
contour and section cut plots, IsoSurface plots are rarely meaningful with that many sur-
faces, and they take a long time to compute. As a general guideline, choose 6 or less levels
before computing IsoSurfaces (use View Option, PostProcessing, Contour/Criteria Levels,
and set # of Levels).
Selecting Data for a Deformed or Contour Style
It is often best to turn on Shading with IsoSurfaces - it helps to visualize the curvature of the
surfaces. Alternatively, if you choose line contours (turn off the Filled Contour/Criteria
Style), FEMAP will display the edges of the polygons that define the surface with no filling.
This allows you to see through multiple surfaces, and can sometimes give a better under-
standing of the shape of the IsoSurface.
You can also choose the Free Edge style to see just the element outlines with the IsoSurfaces.
Trace Locations...
... will enable you to select the nodes to use for the
Deformed Style Trace plots. When you push this but-
ton, you will see the Trace Locations dialog box. You
can choose to select all the nodes, a group of nodes,
or a single node to use for the trace. All Nodes are
chosen by default.
Contour Vectors...
If you want to display vectors other than standard, you can simply select the number of com-
ponents of the vector (Single, 2-D, or 3-D). You will need to select output for that number of
components for each vector displayed. If you wish to see three 3-D vectors, you will need to
select 9 output vectors. If you decide to display a single vector, you must also define the vec-
tor direction under the Display Direction button. The standard FEMAP Vector Definition
Dialog Box is displayed to enable you to define the direction of this 1-D plot.
If you select 2-D components, and the two associated vectors for the X and Y components
for Vector 1 (and Vector 2 and 3 if multiple vectors are required), the data will be displayed
in the coordinate directions defined by the “Output Relative To” portion of the dialog box
(discussed below). 3-D components works just like 2-D except that you must now choose
three vectors for Vector 1 (and Vectors 2 and 3 if required). In either of these cases, the com-
ponents must be chosen in a top-down fashion. That is, the first vector represents the x com-
ponent, the second is the y component, and the third (if necessary) is the z component. By
allowing you to select a Standard Vector, or any combination of 1-D, 2-D, or 3-D vectors,
FEMAP can produce Elemental Centroidal plots for a wide variety of conditions and vec-
tors.
Note:
FEMAP does not know nor keep track of the coordinate system where your output is
defined. Therefore it is up to you to provide this information prior to making a vector plot.
You can choose any one of five different methods, depending on how your results were
defined by your analysis program. THIS IS EXTREMELY IMPORTANT! IF YOU
CHOOSE THE WRONG, OR INAPPROPRIATE METHOD, THE DISPLAY WILL BE
WRONG. YOU MUST KNOW HOW THE DATA WAS DEFINED BY YOUR ANALY-
SIS PROGRAM BEFORE PROCEEDING.
Element Edge / Solid CSys or Nodal Output Csys
This method is used for output from planar elements if the X output direction is defined rel-
ative to the first element edge (the line connecting the first two nodes). It is used for Solid
elements if output is defined in the solid property coordinate system. Use it for nodal output,
if the results are in the Nodal output coordinate system. Be aware however that for most
standard three dimensional nodal output vectors (Displacements, Constraint Forces, Applied
Loads, Velocities and Accelerations) FEMAP transforms output into global coordinates and
this option is not appropriate.
Element Midside Locations
This option is used for output from planar elements when the X output direction is defined as
the vector that joins the midsides of the second and final (4th for a quad, 3rd for a triangle)
edge.
Element Diagonal Bisector
This option is used for output from planar elements when the X output direction is defined as
the vector that bisects the angle formed by the two element diagonals, in the quadrant that
generally points along the first edge.
Selecting Data for a Deformed or Contour Style
2
3
This dialog box is separated into four major sections, (1) Style, (2) Group, (3) Options, and 67
(4) Total Load. Each of these areas are discussed more fully below. 35
2
Freebody Style &
This section controls whether the Freebody Display is shown and the loads to use for the
(6
6,
Freebody display. Show Freebody Display must be checked on to plot the freebody diagram, 1
as well as to activate other options on this dialog box. When you first enter this dialog box, *
this will be Off, and all other options will be grayed.
Postprocessing
Note:
The External and Internal Element Loads will only be available if you have recovered Grid
Point Force Balance from NASTRAN. If you are not using NASTRAN, or have not recov-
ered the Grid Point Force Balance, you will only have access to the Applied and Reaction
Loads (including MultiPoint), thereby limiting the overall usefulness of FreeBody displays.
Freebody Group
This option allows you to select between the entire model (None), the Active group, or to a
Select a group for which to perform the freebody display. In general, unless you are simply
checking reaction forces or multipoint reaction loads, you will want to limit this to a specific
group at critical interfaces or areas of concern.
Selecting Data for a Deformed or Contour Style
Freebody Options
These options control the details of
the FreeBody Display. You can
choose to show Forces, Moments, or
both. The vectors can be shown in
entity colors (reaction loads in the
color of the constraints, applied loads
in the color of the loads, etc.). If
Entity colors is turned Off, all loads
will be displayed in the color selected
under the Vector Style option in View
Options Postprocessing. Internal and
External Element Loads are always
drawn in the Vector Style color.
The Show Load Summation option controls whether you see one total sum vector of all
loads at the node (On) or all vectors for the different load types (Off). This option also
enables the Freebody Total Load section which will be discussed more fully below.
The Show Freebody on All Internal Nodes will provide results at every node of the elements
in the group or entire model. This option can create a rather cluttered display if there are a
large number of nodes and should typically be left off.
The remaining options in the section are more typical View Options. You can scale vectors
based upon their magnitude, including setting Max and Min values for the scaling, as well as
set a tolerance below which the loads are not displayed. This previous option will remove
loads that are not zero just due to numerical round-off. The final options under Display Vec-
tor Components simply allow you to display the vectors in component form in any coordi-
nate system, in one, two, or all three directions.
Freebody Total Load
If the Show Load Summation under Freebody Options is checked, you will have access to
the Freebody Total Load section of this dialog box. This section allows you to display the
resulting forces and moments due to the total load of the group or model at a specific loca-
tion. This can be very useful in obtaining the effect of loads on a specific portion of your
model to some other location, either in the model, or somewhere off the model, possibly
2
3
another part of an assembly. 67
Simply select the Show Load on Interface option and define the color and location for the 35
2
Total Load. The Location button enables you to input the specific coordinates via the stan- &
dard Coordinate Definition dialog box. Once you input these values and redraw, FEMAP (6
will display the total forces and moments at the specified location, taking into account the 6,
1
distance between the location and the freebody loads to calculate the moments. *
Postprocessing
Output
XY Style Will Display Data Typical Uses
Type
XY vs. ID Output Data values Node, Review output data vec-
from selected out- Elem tor to find peaks.
put vector vs. Node
or Element ID.
XY vs. Set Output Data from Node, Review transient results,
selected output vec- Elem or differences in output
tor for one Node or from multiple sets.
Element vs. all Out-
put Sets.
XY vs. Set Same as XY vs. Set, Node, Only for transient, modal
Value except X axis dis- Elem or other output that sets
plays Output Set the Output Set Values.
values, not the Set Not for Static Analysis.
IDs.
XY vs. Output Data values Node, Review output near a
Position from selected out- Elem specified location.
put vector vs. X, Y, Visual interpolation and
or Z position in a extrapolation of output
selected Coordinate data.
System.
XY of A function curve. N/A Reviewing the XY rela-
Function tionships that you
defined for a function.
XY vs. ID Style
9629.
7708.
5787.
3865.
1944.
22.94
-1898.
-3819.
-5741.
-7662.
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
Element ID
1: NASTRAN Case 1, Plate Top X Normal Stress
2: NASTRAN Case 1, Plate Top Y Normal Stress
7708.
5787.
3865.
1944.
22.94
-1898.
-3819.
-5741.
-7662.
0.375 0.6964 1.018 1.339 1.661 1.982 2.304 2.625
X Coordinate System 0
1: NASTRAN Case 1, Plate Top X Normal Stress
2: NASTRAN Case 1, Plate Top Y Normal Stress
This dialog box has several differences. For XY-plots, you can select up to nine sets of data.
FEMAP refers to these as curves. The Curve Number option buttons (1 to 9) select the curve
to define. Before selecting any other options, you should always choose the Curve Number.
After selecting the Curve Number, choose the Category, Type, Output Set, and Output Vec-
tor controls to select the output data that you want to display. Refer to the previous explana-
tion, of deformed and contour data, for more information on using these controls. The only
difference for XY styles is that you can choose a different output set for each curve.
If you want to define multiple curves, just select the first Curve Number and choose an Out-
put Set and Output Vector for that curve and then repeat the process. Choose a different
Curve Number, and the Output Set and Output Vector for that curve. Press OK, only when
you are done with all of the curves.
To delete the selected Curve Number, press the Delete Curve command button. Only the
selected curve will be deleted. All other curves will remain unchanged.
You can limit the XY plot to a certain portion of your model by choosing a Group. Selecting
None will display data for your entire model. Active will display data for the Nodes or Ele-
ments in the active group, or for the entire model if no group is active. If you choose Select,
you must also choose a group from the drop-down list. As stated in the dialog box, the group
selections you make apply to all curves.
Note:
The XY Data Group selections and the Model Data Group selections both refer to the same
option. Changing one automatically changes the other. If you are displaying a portion of
your model, and then switch to an XY style, the same group will automatically be used. This
feature allows you to simply switch styles and see a model and XY representation of the
same data.
For the XY vs. Set and XY vs. Set Value styles, you must select an Output Location. This is
the ID of a single Node or Element. The entity type matches the type of output in the Output
Vector you select. Since this style displays output from all Output Sets, the set you choose is
not really used. It is only specified so that you can have a list of Output Vectors from which
to choose.
The only difference between XY vs. Set and XY vs. Set Value is the values used for the X
axis. XY vs. Set displays the Output Set IDs on the X axis, and XY vs. Set Value displays the
value (time, frequency, or other value) that is associated with each output set. If you want to
limit output to only certain sets rather than all sets, you can also specify a range of Output
Sets to use in “Show Output Sets”. Data will only be selected from sets in the range you
specify. Leave these options blank to get all sets.
For the XY vs. Position style, you must select a Position or direction. You can choose either
an X, Y, or Z coordinate direction, in any Coordinate System. When the data is displayed,
the horizontal axis of the XY-plot will be these coordinate values. If you are displaying
nodal output, the location of the node will be transformed into the selected coordinate sys-
Quickly Choosing XY Data
tem. The output value will be plotted on the vertical axis, versus the selected coordinate on
the horizontal axis. For elemental output data, the location of the element centroid is used.
You can use this method to display variations in data across portions of your model. First,
define a group which contains the nodes or elements in that area. Second, define a coordi-
nate system which is aligned with the direction you want to view. Finally, if desired, select a
Group and Coordinate System and choose the Output Vector. FEMAP will display an XY vs.
Position plot that shows how your output varies.
Choose category
to change between
option lists
All of these different options are controlled from the View Options dialog box. There are
three basic parts to this dialog box. The Category option buttons choose the type of view
options that you want to update. When you choose a category, the Options list is automati-
cally updated. This list displays all of the View options that you can update for each Cate-
gory. You may have to scroll through the list, using the scroll bar, to see all of the available
options.
To modify an option, simply select it from the list. You can do this either by pointing at it
with the cursor and clicking the left mouse button, or by pressing the direction keys. As you
select an option, the right side of the dialog box will be updated. It will display various con-
trols which allow you to set the option. The current option settings will always be loaded as
the defaults. Each Postprocessing Option is explained briefly below.
Hint:
When performing large displacement (hyperelastic) contact and/or explicit analyses, it is
often best to change the Deformed Style to Actual, and keep the value as 1. These types of
analyses typically have large displacements which are visible, and scaling causes distortion.
2
3
67
35
2
&
(6
6,
1
*
Postprocessing
+1
Sine - Full
+1
Linear - Full Shape controls the defor-
mations in the frames that
are calculated. Full cycle
shapes smoothly return to
their starting position while
-1 -1 Number of Frames
half cycle shapes jump
+1
Sine - Full Absolute
+1
Linear - Full Absolute back.
The choice of Color or
Monochrome animation
impacts the speed at which
0 0 the image will animate.
Sine - Half +1
Linear - Half Monochrome is much
+1
faster. If on the other hand,
you are combining anima-
tion with a contour or crite-
ria display, you should
-1 -1
probably select color.
Sine - Half Absolute Linear - Half Absolute
+1
+1 By selecting the number of
frames in the animation,
you control both the anima-
tion quality and speed.
0 0 More frames take longer to
calculate, and produce a
slower, but smoother animation. Fewer frames are desirable if you want a quick look, or fast
animation. If you are using the “Animate” setting, for the Contour/Criteria Levels option,
best results are obtained with a larger number of frames.
The Delay factor specifies the initial speed of the animation. This can be varied using the
View Advanced Post Animation command. Larger numbers result in slower animations.
Hint:
Here are a few suggestions that can help when you are doing animations:
m FEMAP retains all of the frames that you calculate in memory. You can specify a very
large number of frames but you must have enough to hold those images.
m You can simultaneously animate multiple windows, even at different speeds, but your
computer and graphics adapter need to be fairly fast. It takes the combination of a fast
computer and a good graphics adapter to adequately handle multiple animations.
m If animations are not as fast as you would like, check the following:
m Make sure the Delay factor is small or zero.
m Try using monochrome animation.
Deformed Model...
m Make sure you are not running other applications in the background on your computer.
m Reduce the number of frames.
m Reduce the size of your graphics window. This may be the biggest savings - although at a
price. It can dramatically reduce the amount of data needed for an animation, and hence
increase the speed.
m Once an animation has been created, you can control it with the View Advanced Post
Animation command.
tours option (Continuous or Levels) and additional options for Elemental Contouring under
67
Contour Options. For more information on the Contour Options, please see Contour Options
35
2
in Section 8.2.2.2 Selecting Data for a Deformed or Contour Style. &
(6
8.3.9 Contour/Criteria Style... 6,
1
... allows you to choose whether solid/filled contours will be drawn or just the contour lines. *
The same setting also applies to filled or unfilled elements for criteria displays. Refer to the
Fill Element and Fill-Edges options (under View Options, Tools and View Style in the View-
Postprocessing
ing Your Model chapter of this manual) for more ways to customize the appearance of con-
tour and criteria plots.
Filled Contours
-7662.
Line Contours
6028.
If you select the “Max Min” labelling option, the two locations with the maximum and min-
imum output values will be labelled. Normally this will be the max and min values in the
entire model. If you also set the Auto-Group Contour Level mode, FEMAP will display the
max and min values based just on the output at nodes in your plotted group.
ID labelling is not used for filled contours. For line contours, the lines are labelled with let-
ters that correspond to those in the Contour Legend. Label Freq controls how many of the
lines are labelled. If Label Freq is 5, every fifth contour line will be labelled. You may also
specify the number of significant digits to be used in your contour/criteria plot.
The Data Conversion options control how FEMAP will calculate the Nodal data that is
required for contours when you select an Elemental output vector. By default, all elemental
data is averaged. If you would rather use the maximum (or minimum) values, choose Maxi-
mum Value (or Minimum Value). If you have recovered or calculated elemental corner out-
put but do not want it to be considered in the contour, choose one of the Skip Corner options.
For more information on Data Conversion options, please see Contour Options in Section
8.2.2.2 Selecting Data for a Deformed or Contour Style.
8.3.10.1 Palette
You can choose either the Standard or User-Defined contour palette. Instructions for defin-
ing a user-defined palette can be found later in this section, but the palette must be activated
here - even after it is defined. The “# of Levels” option is only used with the Standard Pal-
ette, and specifies the number of contour levels to be drawn. The number of levels for the
user-defined palette always matches the number of colors in the palette.
Animate
8.3.10.2 Animate
If you want the contour display to vary with the deformations during an animation, you can
check the Animate box. This can represent the effects of loading and unloading a structure.
When this is turned off, the deformations will animate, but the contours will not change.
Animate is only used for contour displays, not for criteria displays. When you are animating
contours, you will usually need to increase the number of animation frames to make the con-
tour animation look smoother.
Note:
The Auto-Group option automatically considers output for all nodes referenced by the ele-
ments in your group in addition to the nodes that you explicitly include into the group.
Therefore, if you have included all model nodes in the group, this option will have no effect.
Unless you are looking for some special effect, you should not include any nodes other than
those connected to elements in the group.
If you choose “Max Min”, you must specify the Maximum and Minimum contour values.
FEMAP will interpolate between them to determine all intermediate values. “User Defined”
is similar to “Max Min”. You must first specify the Maximum and Minimum values, then
press Set Levels. You will see the Contour/Criteria Levels dialog box. In the text boxes on
the left side, you can specify up to 10 additional intermediate contour level.
2
3
67
35
2
&
(6
6,
1
*
Postprocessing
As described above, you can control the standard contour palette by specifying up to six col-
ors, and FEMAP will interpolate between them to produce the entire contour spectrum. This
method produces very smooth transitions between colors in the spectrum, but does not allow
very precise color control, and often results in dithered (rather than solid) colors being used.
The User Palette option gives you precise control, with no interpolation of colors.
In addition to the normal palette options, the dialog box has additional boxes that show the
defined contour palette. To add to the palette, choose the color (and linestyle and pattern)
from the top of the box, then press Add. The selected color will be added to the palette. To 2
3
remove a color from the contour palette, select it and press Delete. Press Reset to delete all 67
of the selected colors. Press Reverse to swap the order of the colors in the palette. Press Save 35
to save the selected contour palette in a file, which you can retrieve later with the Load but- 2
&
ton. In either option the standard file access dialog box is used to access the contour palette (6
files. The file extension ".CNT" is always used for these files. The default user defined con- 6,
1
tour palette file is selected in the File Preferences command, and is loaded every time you *
start FEMAP.
To use the contour palette that you have defined, you must return to Contour/Criteria Levels
in the View Options dialog box, and switch the Contour Palette option to "User Palette".
When you select the User Palette, all contour and criteria plots will be done with the number
Postprocessing
of levels in the user palette, the "# of Levels" option is simply ignored. To change the num-
ber of levels, you must change the user palette, or switch back to the "Standard Palette".
Note:
This version of FEMAP includes several predefined contour palette files. These files have
been defined to access solid colors when used with most Windows 256-color drivers. You
can use them as a starting point for your own palettes by loading and modifying them.
Limits Mode list. Then specify the appropriate values in Minimum and Maximum. The fol-
lowing table lists the available modes and their uses:
Limits
Minimum Maximum Result
Mode
No Limits - - No Criteria. All Elements Pass.
Above - Yes Elements with output values
Maximum greater than Maximum Pass.
Below Yes - Elements with output values less
Minimum than Minimum Pass.
Between Yes Yes Elements with output values
between Minimum and Maxi-
mum pass.
Outside Yes Yes Elements with output values less
than Minimum or greater than
Maximum pass.
8.3.14 IsoSurface...
... controls the display of IsoSurfaces. You can control whether a Single IsoSurface is dis-
played, or to use the contour colors for the IsoSurfaces. You can also decide to deform the
model, set the IsoSurface color for the Single IsoSurface option, and to set a level for the
Single IsoSurface. When using the View Advanced Post Dynamic IsoSurface command, this
option will automatically be turned to a single color if both the Deformed and Contour Out-
put Vectors are the same. (See this section under the Specialized Postprocessing section
below for further details on IsoSurfaces).
8.3.16 XY Titles...
... specifies a title and subtitle for an XY display, and the location of these titles. You can
choose any of the standard eight locations for the Titles. In general, Center Left and Center
Right are not good choices. Unless you use very short titles, these positions will significantly
reduce the size of the graph. The titles are always displayed in the View Color. The title
View Color is also used for all axis labels.
XY Legend...
When you press Titles, FEMAP will display the XY Titles dialog box. You can specify a
Title and Subtitle, each up to 25 characters in length.
8.3.17 XY Legend...
... controls the location, and format of the XY legend. This legend contains one line for each
active curve. It defines the output data which is selected for the curve. The format of the
lines in the legend is:
Curve Number: Output Set, Output Vector (Curve Scale Factor)
want a specific number of divisions, specify that number plus one. You must add one
67
because there is always one more tic than division, for the end of the axis.
35
2
&
8.3.19 XY X Range/Grid... (6
6,
... controls the minimum and maximum X axis values, and the display of the vertical grid 1
lines. *
If you choose Automatic, FEMAP will set the minimum and maximum axis values equal to
the smallest and largest X values from your entire model. The nature of these values depends
on the type of XY plot (vs. ID, vs. Set...). Auto-Group is similar, but only considers values
Postprocessing
which are in the group you chose in the View Select command. If you pick “Max Min”, you
must manually set the Minimum and Maximum axis values.
Your Axis Range choices can be automatically updated by the View Autoscale, Pan, Zoom,
or Magnify commands. You can use these commands for XY-plots just like they are used for
model displays.
8.3.20 XY Y Range/Grid...
... is identical to XY X Range/Grid, except that it controls the Y axis and the horizontal grid
lines.
When you choose this command, the Animation Control dialog box is displayed. The but-
tons in this dialog are used just like the controls for a VCR or tape player. Press Pause if you
want to stop the current animation, then press Play to resume it. Pressing either Prev or Next
will also pause ongoing animations. Pressing these buttons will also change the frame that is
Controlling Animation in Multiple Windows
displayed. “Next” advances forward to the next animation frame. “Prev” goes backward to
the previous frame.
The buttons in the center of the dialog box change the speed of the animation, by changing
the Delay value. You can also change speed manually by typing a new Delay value. Larger
numbers mean longer delays and slower animation. Pressing Faster reduces the delay value
while Slower increases it. Press Fast to reset the Delay to one.
You can also change the order in which the animation frames will be displayed by choosing
Half or Full. Half animations go from the first frame to the last and then jump back to the
first. Full animations go from the first to the last, and then back to the first in reverse order.
When you are animating deformations, Half animations deform and snap back. Full anima-
tions repeatedly deform and undeform. Full animations are smoother while Half animations
are faster.
Note: 2
3
67
Here are some important things to remember when working with animations: 35
m If you move the graphics cursor over an animating window, the cursor may become 2
&
invisible (or blink) because animating windows constantly redraw the entire window and (6
hide the cursor. If you “lose” the cursor, keep moving the mouse in a single direction 6,
1
until it moves outside of the animating window. The cursor will be visible again. *
m Whenever you choose a command from the menu, either with the keyboard or mouse,
FEMAP will pause any ongoing animations. This gives you much better interactive
response time during the command you choose. To restart the animation, you must
Postprocessing
choose the View Advanced Post Animation, View Redraw, or View Regenerate com-
mand. The advantage of View Advanced Post Animation is that it does not require
FEMAP to recalculate the animation frames.
m Running a program file also stops all animations.
m You cannot make graphical selections in animating windows. Animations are just a
series of bitmaps with no direct connection to the entities in the FEMAP database.
m The delay factor controls animation speed by pausing between frames. The appropriate
delay factor depends on the computer speed, graphics board, size of the window, whether
you are doing color, or monochrome animation, and many more factors. If you are only
animating one window, you may have to increase this number substantially to slow down
an animation. With multiple windows, you may have to decrease it to speed up anima-
tions. If you are trying to make multiple windows animate at different speeds, adjust the
delay factors relative to each other. For example, if you have two windows, setting one
delay equal to twice the delay in the other window will animate at half the speed of the
other window. The ratio of the smallest to largest delay in the active animating windows
should always be less than 20 or 25 for best performance (preferably less than 10). If you
exceed these recommendations, the slower animating window will appear choppy, and in
some cases, may not animate at all. If you are experiencing this problem, you must
increase the delays in all windows (you can keep the ratios the same), so that your com-
puter can keep up with all of the animations.
Delta...
... defines the value when you click on the scrollbar to move it. By specifying a Delta, and
then clicking in the Windows scrollbar to move it, you can change the Value, and thereby the
position of the section cut by the Delta value. This is a convenient method to move through
the section cuts at specified increments.
Hint:
This is an extremely valuable toll when performing thermal stress analysis. You can define
the temperature vector as the Deformation vector to use for the IsoSurfaces, and then select a
stress value for the Contour vector. You can then visualize the stress values at a given tem-
perature.
As always, the specific options related to these displays can be found under View Options
(Category Postprocessing, Option IsoSurfaces).
2
3
67
35
2
&
(6
6,
1
*
Postprocessing
Enter Set ID to
activate here
or, choose an
existing set
from this list
Type description
for output set
here
Change Set
Value Here
Deactivate All
Output Sets Here
...makes a new Output Set or activates an existing set. To create a new Output Set, enter an
ID which does not appear in the list of available sets. Then enter a Title and press OK. As
always, you should choose a descriptive title. The titles are displayed, along with the IDs,
whenever you are asked to select an Output Set.
To activate an Output Set which already exists, simply choose it from the list, or enter its ID,
and press OK. To deactivate all Output Sets, press Reset. To change the Set Value, simply
type in the new value for the Set Value while the set is active. Since the Set value can be used
Model Output Vector...
for X-Y plotting, you can effectively change the scale of your X-Y plot by changing the set
values for each Output Set.
Adding Notes to an Output Set
In some cases you will be working with a series of analyses, or with multiple output sets
from the same analysis. Even with a title, it is often difficult to remember all of the charac-
teristics or critical aspects of a particular output set. The Notes feature lets you add an
extended description of up to 256 characters to each output set. The Notes can contain any
text that you want, with as many lines as you want, just press Ctrl+Q-Enter (not just Enter)
to advance to the next line. FEMAP will also automatically read some information from out-
put files and store them in notes, such as date and time of the run and the output file read.
Notes are not plotted to the screen, but the List Output Unformatted command will list them
with the other output set information. By turning off all the vector information, you can
obtain a listing of just your sets and notes.
Hint:
If you select a specific Output Vector but the numeric values does not appear under ID, it is
probably because the Output Set is not active. Please use Model Output Set to first activate
the Output Set, and the use Model Output Vector to pick the active vector.
be created. You can use this variable in your equation to vary the output value for each
entity. For example, if you have selected a number of nodes and the ID Variable is i, you
could use the equation:
XND(!i)
to use the X coordinate of each node as the output value. Similarly, you could use:
SQRT(SQR(VEC(1;2;!i))+SQR(VEC(1;3;!i))+SQR(VEC(1;4;!i)))
to define output values in the current vector which are the vector magnitude of the data in
Vectors 2, 3 and 4 from Output Set 1.
The default ID Variable is always i. If you do not want to use this variable, simply change it
to any other variable that you want to use. Always remember to use the variable that you
specify (or !i) in the equation.
Note:
The current contents of the ID Variable will be overwritten by this command. If you have
already defined !i, and want to preserve its current value, you must choose a different vari-
able before pressing OK. This applies even if you do not use the variable in your equation.
More. This is equivalent to a single term in the above equation. For the final vector that you
wish to linearly combine, press Last One, instead of More. This will combine the vector, and
exit to the FEMAP menu.
Some vectors can not be linearly combined by this command. When FEMAP reads output
from your analysis, certain vectors are identified as being not “linearly combinable”. Exam-
ples of this are Principal Stresses, Von Mises Stress and Total Displacement. Instead of com-
bining these vectors, FEMAP recalculates them based on their linearly combined
components (if all necessary components exist). This recalculation is only possible when
you combine entire output cases.
If you want to make a linear combination of all of your existing model output using a single,
constant scale factor, just press All Sets. This will create a new output set, which contains the
linear combination of all your previous data.
vector or set that you want to envelope), you must select one of the three available methods -
Min, Max or Max Abs. The resulting envelope is based on the following:
where
Venv is the vector that is created
Vi are the vectors to envelope, and
F( ), is the max, min or absmax function
The Entire Set check box controls whether FEMAP will envelope entire output sets, or just
individual output vectors. Just like Model Output Linear, this command works in a repetitive
fashion. That means you essentially envelope one From vector (or set) at a time, every time
you press More. This is equivalent to a single term in the above equation. For the final vec-
tor, press Last One, instead of More. This will envelope the vector, and exit to the FEMAP
menu.
Unlike Model Output Linear, all output data
can be enveloped. You can use the All Sets
command button to automatically create an
envelope of all existing output data in your
model. This creates a single, new output set.
The resulting envelope is based on the com-
bination method that you have selected.
How Envelope Works
The first set or vector that you select is sim-
ply copied directly to the set or vector which
will receive the enveloped data. Therefore, if
you choose Last One for the first vector, this
command is equivalent to Model Output
Copy. If instead you press More, and then specify additional vectors to envelope, the data
from those vectors is combined with the data which you have already enveloped. The
method used for the combination depends upon your selection. If you select Max envelop-
ing, the resulting data at each node or element will be the maximum value at that node or ele-
2
3
ment of the existing envelope and the vector you just selected. Min enveloping is just the
67
opposite. The result will be the minimum of the two values. Selecting Max Abs will result in 35
choosing the value which has the maximum absolute value. In this case (as well as all the 2
others) the enveloped data will still contain both positive and negative values. The absolute &
(6
value of the data is not saved, it is just used for the comparison.
6,
1
If data does not exist for a node or element, in either the existing enveloped data, or in the *
vector that you are currently adding to the envelope, the result will simply be the value of the
data that did exist. This is independent of the method you choose.
You can specify a single enveloping method, such as Max, and then select a series of vectors
or sets using More. This will create a new output vector or set which contains the maximum
Postprocessing
(or minimum, ...) output values at all nodes or elements in the original data. You can also
create much more complex envelopes where you vary the enveloping method to find the
maximum value of some output vectors, enveloped with the minimum values of other output
vectors. The possible combinations are limitless.
Using Ply Summary
If you are working with laminated plates with ply-by-ply results, or even with homogeneous
plates with top, middle and bottom data, you can choose to compute ply summaries. If you
turn off Entire Set, Ply Summary becomes available. You can then choose any “layered”
plate output vector and compute a summary envelope for that output type. The Ply Summary
will include the same type of output for all layers/plies in your model. This is the same as
picking each of the ply output vectors, but is done automatically. Typically, you will want to
set the Output Set to match the Input Set when you are using this method - the resulting
envelope will then be placed in the same set as the original output.
Requesting Set Info
If the Set Info option is selected, FEMAP will create an additional Output Set with the same
vectors as the Enveloped data. In this case however, the output values will actually be the ID
of the Output Set where the enveloped data value originated. This provides an easy way to
determine the worst case conditions for each Output Vector. This option is only applicable if
the Entire Set option is checked.
Finally, to complete your selections, you must choose whether to base the error estimate on
data from the Entire Model, or just data on elements selected in a specified Group. If you
choose the Elements in Group option, you must also select a Group. As the name of the
option implies, only the Elements in the selected Group are used, no matter whether the out-
put vector you select contains Nodal or Elemental output. Refer to the Model Output Con-
vert command for more information on choosing between your entire model and using
Groups. While that command does not specifically address error estimates, it uses output
vectors and Groups in a similar manner.
When you press OK, FEMAP will create a new vector, in the same Output Set that you
chose, which contains the error estimate. You can then select this data for contours, criteria
plots, XY-plots, reports, or any other postprocessing option - just like any other data.
What Are Error Estimates and Why Use Them
All finite element models and finite element analyses are engineering approximations.
Depending upon how many elements you create, the shape of those elements, loading and
boundary conditions, and many other factors, the accuracy of your model/approximation can
be very good or very bad. One of the main problems in using finite element results is that it
is difficult to tell when the results truly represent reality. One historical method of verifying
accuracy is to build a second model which is more refined (has more elements) and check to
see if you get the same or similar answers. If you do, then it is usually felt that the original
approximation was reasonable. Unfortunately, this method takes a lot of work, and a lot of
computer resources to run the additional analyses.
Error estimation attempts to quantify the validity of your approximations - without doing
any additional analysis or modeling. Even if the error estimations do not give you a defini-
tive answer concerning the accuracy of your model, they will certainly point out the portions
of your model which need the most careful consideration. Typically, these will be areas
where there are large gradients or localized changes in stress, displacement or other output
quantities. These areas are usually critical in your design, and unless you properly refine the
mesh, they can be poorly approximated.
The error estimates are based on these variations in output values. Ideally, within an element,
or between elements connected to a common node, the variations in output should be rela-
tively small. To the degree that these quantities vary, your model may not properly represent
the true output state in that region. Error estimates show you how much variation is present
2
3
throughout your model. 67
How Error Estimate Works 35
2
It may seem backwards, but error estimates of nodal output data are calculated at the element &
centroids. Similarly, error estimates of elemental, centroidal output data are calculated at the (6
nodes. This is similar to the conversion that takes place when you use the Model Output 6,
1
Convert command. Again, the error estimates need to look at the variations in output data. *
An error estimate of nodal output data will be based on the gradients that data causes in each
element. Hence the estimate is actually calculated for the element. An error estimate of ele-
mental, centroidal output data is based on the differences that occur at the elemental bound-
aries. In specific, FEMAP bases the calculations on the output values from all elements
Postprocessing
connected to a specific node. That is why the error estimates are formulated at the nodes for
elemental data.
The calculation of error estimates for nodal output is fairly straightforward. The values at
each node connected to an element are simply compared. Error estimates for elemental data
are more complicated. They follow the same rules that FEMAP uses for the Model Output
Convert command. Since this calculation is also done at nodes (element corners), FEMAP
needs to use the output value at the appropriate element corner for each node. If you recover
elemental corner output, FEMAP automatically uses these output values at each corner, even
though you must select a centroidal output vector. If you do not recover corner output,
FEMAP simply uses the centroidal value from the output vector that you selected.
You can choose any of six error estimation methods. All of them follow the procedures
described above. The only difference between them is the formula to calculate the estimate.
Max Difference Method
ValueMax – ValueMin
In each of these calculations, the “Min”, “Max” and “Avg” values refer to the minimum,
maximum and average output values at the node or element where the error estimate is being
calculated. The “Vector Max” values refer to the maximum value for all nodes or elements in
the output vector. You will notice that all error estimates are either zero or positive, since
they all use the absolute value of the various factors.
The choice of an appropriate error estimation method largely depends on the conditions in
your model. FEMAP will allow you to calculate as many error estimates as you want. You
just have to use the Model Output Error Estimate command multiple times. In general, the
Max Difference method is good at pointing out the largest gradients, in the portions of your
model with the largest output values. The Difference from Average Method will also identify
areas with the largest output values. In this case however, areas where only one, or a few val-
ues are significantly different will be accentuated. The Max Difference method will identify
the steepest gradients in the most critical portions of your model. The Difference from Aver-
age Method will identify just the steepest non-uniform gradients, the ones that vary in only a
single direction. The two percentage methods identify the same type of gradients, but do not
make any distinction between large and small output values. Use these methods only if the
magnitude of the output is less important than the changes in output. The final two normal-
ized percentage methods are usually the best at quantifying overall errors in areas with peak
output values.
Error Estimate Examples
A few brief examples, with hypothetical data will help to illustrate the various error esti-
mates:
Suppose you have output values surrounding some location (a node or element, it really does
not matter) that are 100, 100, 300, 300, and at another location you have 100, 100, 100, 500,
and at a third location you have 1, 1, 3, 3. The following error estimates would be calculated:
Sample Error Estimate
2
3
67
Max % Nrm
Nrm 35
% % 2
Max Diff Diff % &
Values Min Max Avg
Diff from
Max
from Max
Diff (6
Diff from 6,
Avg Avg Diff 1
Avg *
100,100, 100 300 200 200 100 100% 50% 40% 20%
300,300
100,100, 100 500 200 400 300 200% 150% 80% 60%
100,500
1, 1, 3, 3 1 3 2 2 1 100% 50% 0.4% 0.2%
Postprocessing
You will notice that the two unnormalized percentage methods make no distinction between
the first location with 100 and 300 output values and the last with 1 and 3. Also note how the
Max Difference from Average method (and the corresponding normalized percentage
method) highlights the middle position where all values are constant (100) except for the
single 500 value. You will notice that the average values for the first and second output posi-
tions are identical (200), even though they represent very different conditions. If you just
look at contour or overall data, you will only see these averages.
Original Vector
Transform into CSys 1
Total Translation
X Translation (CSys 0)
Y Translation (CSys 0)
Z Translation (CSys 0)
Note:
This technique cannot match, or improve upon the corner stresses that are generated by your
analysis program. If possible, you should recover corner stresses directly from the analysis
program, since they are typically based on the underlying element formulations. In some
cases however, analysis programs do not produce corner values, and this command can be
used to get a reasonable approximation. Again, it simply uses a linear interpolation scheme
based on the centroidal output provided by your analysis program. It is not based on any ele-
ment representations.
Model Output Extrapolate...
20
described by examples. 19
2
18
17
3
67
16
12
11
15
35
9 14
13
2
12
11 7 10
&
(7,8,9,12,13,14,17,18, and 19) as a geo-
5
8 4
5 (6
6,
7
3
6 4
*
3
1
distant ones. At these interior nodes the corresponding corner values in all adjoining ele-
ments will be equal.
After computing
Project onto Edge Use at Centroid
6
values at the inte-
5 5
8
rior nodes, we are
8
left with boundary
7 7
3
3
nodes(1-5, 6, 10,
2 2 11, 15, 16, 20, and
1
3 1
3 21-25). To deter-
mine values at
2 2
these corners, we
must extrapolate
the existing output
distribution. We will examine what happens at Element 2:
Consider the corner at Node 3. If you choose the “Project onto Edge” method, the centroidal
value is first projected normal to the element edge (8-3), and then along the edge to Node 3.
In this case, the first projection did not fall at the edge center, and the value at the corner will
be weighted based on relative distances between the projected location and Nodes 3 and 8.
If you choose the “Use at Centroid” method, the centroidal value is simply considered to be
the value at the midpoint of every edge. Regardless of the element shape/skew, the midpoint
is always set to the centroidal value. In this example the value at corner Node 3 would just be
the centroidal value plus the difference between the value at corner Node 8 and the centroi-
dal value. If we looked at a corner node, like Node 1, multiple extrapolations along the edges
are computed.
For perfectly rectangular elements both methods give the same result. In general however
the “Use at Centroid” method seems to give the most reasonable overall results. If you have
a highly skewed mesh, especially in an area of a relatively steep gradient, the “Projection”
method can often result in extremely large variations due to the projection. This occurs if the
projected location falls very near to the node that you are projecting from. In that case, the
length ratios become very large and the accuracy of the projection becomes suspect. You
should therefore only choose this alternate method if you know that your mesh is not highly
skewed.
If we also looked at what happens in Element 3, we would see a similar extrapolation toward
Node 3. However, in general the corner values at Node 3 will be different in the two ele-
ments, just as they normally would from your analysis program. If you later do a contour
plot of this output, how this situation is handled depends upon the View Options that you
choose. You can either choose to average the values, or to display the maximum.
This example showed a simple case, where the entire model consisted of one plane of con-
tinuous elements. The nodes on the boundary were simply the free edges of the model. In a
real model, the same technique is used, but you would normally choose the option to let
FEMAP segment the model. FEMAP then considers each segment independently. The free
boundaries are the free edges of the segment, not of the entire model.
Complex Output Commands
If you are working with solid elements, the process is identical, just a little harder to visual-
ize. Interior corner values are computed from geometric averages of the surrounding centroi-
dal values. Values at the corners on free boundaries/faces are computed by projections along
the element edges. It is again usually best to choose the “Use at Centroid” method, since rel-
atively skewed solid elements are fairly common.
The Output Query dialog box lets you select the Output Set which contains the output data
of interest. If you want to recover data from all available output sets, instead of just one,
choose the All Sets option.
The output which is reported is limited to the type of output you select. For example, if you
only want stress output, select the Stress Category. Select “Any Output”, if you want to
report all available output from the set or sets that you select.
In addition to choosing the Output Set and data category you want, you must choose to
recover data for either a Node, or an Element and then specify its ID. As always, you can
select the ID graphically, but you must first identify whether you want a Node or an Element.
Hint:
When selecting entities graphically, make certain the focus is in the ID box (i.e. the ID box
must be active) by clicking in the ID box. If you do not, and the focus of the Window is not
in the ID input area, you will not be able to select items graphically.
To produce the report, press either More or OK. If you press More, you will be able to
recover additional data without choosing the command again. If you choose OK, you will be
returned to the FEMAP menu. Unlike most commands, you will notice that More is the
default command button for this dialog box. This enables you to easily query multiple output
entries just by pressing Enter. Also, after you choose More, the input cursor will jump back
to the ID field, so you can choose a new Node or Element.
Since More is the default command button, you can simply double-click a Node or Element
to select it and automatically press More. Using this technique, you can query the output for
List Output Query...
multiple entities simply by repeatedly double-clicking on each one with the left mouse but-
ton.
The amount of output that is reported, depends on the types of output that are present in your
model. The format of the report looks like the following:
Element 1
Output Set 1 - PAL2 Case 2
Output Vector 5097 - MAJOR SHELL STRESS = 23680.
Output Vector 5098 - MINOR SHELL STRESS = -23680.
Output Vector 5099 - SHEAR SHELL STRESS = 15920.
Output Vector 5099 - VON MISES STRESS = 28640.
Output Vector 5099 - VONM % YLD STRESS = 23.
The sample shown above lists only a few items. If you have elemental corner stresses, or
stresses on top or bottom faces of an element, they will all be listed. If you choose All Sets,
all data types for each set are listed before the next set begins. This report, just like all others,
is written to all destinations which you specify in the List Destination command.
This command can be used very effectively when you are doing detailed analysis. With it,
you can often replace voluminous printouts or reports of model output, that have usually
been required to “look-up” data for further calculations. Instead, have FEMAP display the
appropriate portion of your model. Then choose the List Output Query command. Whenever
you need output for a given Node or Element, pick the type of output you want, choose the
Node or Element option, and double click on the entity you want to query. FEMAP will
immediately report the output you need in the Messages and Lists Window. You can even
make the display a contour or criteria plot, to visually lead you to critical areas where you
can then query.
Hint:
If you want to query the model quickly for a specific stress and/or displacement at given
nodes or elements, it is often easier to use the Dynamic Query option in FEMAP. Simply dis-
play the deformed and contour plot of the desired results, change the dynamic query from
Off (lower right hand corner of status bar/tray) to either Node or Element, and then hold the
cursor at a given node or element location. FEMAP will then provide a box listing the dis-
played output information for that node or element. You can then quickly move to other enti-
ties to obtain their results. When the box information is visible, you can even left click in the
2
3
area to send the information to the List Destination, or right click to annotate the model with
this text at that location. Please see sections on Dynamic Query in the FEMAP User Guide
67
35
for more information (Chapter 4 - User Interface and the end of Chapter 5 - the FEA Process
2
for more information &
(6
6,
1
*
Postprocessing
This sample report includes the detailed differences between the two vectors. For each Node
where data differs, the data values from both vectors are listed along with the difference. The
final line also shows the ID and value of the maximum difference (MxDiff), and the ID and
value of the maximum percentage difference (MxPct). Finally, the dot product (Dot) of the
two vectors is given.
Hint:
If you compare data that is identical, you will not see the header information for each vector
as it is compared. If you want to see this information, redo the command, but set the Maxi-
mum difference to zero (make sure List Details is off!). This will list all header information
and the last line summary for each vector.
List Output Unformatted...
Obviously, many variations on this format are also available by choosing other options. The
sample shows all four sections enabled in the 3 column format. The Output Vector Statistics
are shown after the data columns. The Calc flag indicates whether this vector can be linearly
combined. The Component Dir flag indicates whether there are additional vectors of data in
your model which represent the XYZ components of this vector. This flag will also be true
for vectors which contain elemental centroidal data if elemental corner data is present in
your model. Whenever the Component Dir flag is true, several additional lines will be added
to the report (as shown) to identify the other “component” vectors.
The summary data, shown at the bottom of the listing, provides a quick way to find overall
peak displacements, forces, or stresses. Depending on the vectors you list, these values may
compare dissimilar values, but they will always list the peaks. For example, the stress sum-
mary considers all types of stress. No distinction is made between normal, principal or cal-
culated values (such as Von Mises).
The Format ID list box will contain a list of all of the formats which are in the format library.
You can choose a different format library using the File Preferences, Libraries command.
The format you choose from this list will be used to create your report.
Options:
There are two sections to every report - Details and Summaries. The “Details” section con-
tains the actual report of data for each selected Node/Element. It is listed in the format you
choose. The “Summaries” section contains summary information (Max/Min values) for each
vector in your report. These summaries are listed at the end of each Output Set, and at the
end of the report. You cannot control the format of the summaries. The default option, “Full
Report”, enables both sections of the report. The other options enable only one section of the
report.
Choosing Skip Empty will skip detailed data lines for Nodes/Elements which do not have
any output data of the types requested. If data exists for any of the Output Vectors selected in
the report, this option has no effect. In any report, fields which are undefined (no data exists)
are listed as asterisks (*******).
Report Header:
If you turn on this option, an additional header is added to the top of the report which simply
lists all of the options that you selected to make the report.
The following is a sample header:
FEMAP Version 4.00 Wed Jan 13 09:53:08 1993
Model : s:\c\animate.mod Report : Node
Format : NASTRAN Displacement
Sort By : 2..X Translation in Ascending Order (Absolute Value)
Includes: Top 10
Limit To: Above 1.E-4 (Absolute Value)
Entity List:
If you turn on this option, a list of the IDs of all selected Nodes or Elements is added to the
top of the report. This list can be quite long if you have a large model, but it can be invalu-
able if you are limiting the actual output with the Top N or Limits options. It can also be
helpful when you use more complicated selection techniques like box picking or groups.
The following is a sample Entity List:
Selected Entities:
1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,19,20,21,22,23,24,25,26,
27,28,29,30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39,40,41,42,43,44,45,46,47,48,49,
50,51,52,53,54,55,56,57,58,59,60,61,62,63,64,65,66,67,68,69,70
mat ID list box will contain a list of all of the formats which have been defined in your
current model (not the format library). You can choose one of these (if there are any), or use
the New Format command button to define a new format. The format you choose from this
list will be used to create your report.
Titles
There are three types of titles available, Format Title, Page Titles, and Column Title. The
Format Title is not part of the report, but it will be used later to select this format. You should
always specify a descriptive title. You can also specify two Page Title Formats. These for-
mats are listed at the top of every page of your report. If you choose to have these titles hori-
zontally centered, the final position depends on the width of the longest format line. You can 2
3
where:
m < > characters define the width (and location) of the data field.
m “VectorID” contains the ID of the Output Vector to be selected.
m “Digits” specifies the number of significant digits which are to be written.
m The “EFormat” controls exponential output of values (“Y” or “N”).
m “LeftJustify”controls whether the numeric values are left or right justified or aligned
within the field width (also “Y” or “N”).
If the “EFormat” is “Y”, the field will always be written in exponential format. Otherwise, it
will be in floating point format or exponential format based on the value and field width. In
either case, output values that are zero will simply be written as 0., not 0.0000E+00I. If this
option is skipped the default value is “Y”.
The default value for “LeftJustify” is “N” if the option is skipped. If you skip this field a
default will be assumed based on the width of the field.
Several special “VectorID” values can be used, such as:
VectorID Interpretation
0 (or blank) Node/Element ID
-1 Output Set ID
-2 Output Set value (frequency...)
1 thru 99999999 Output Data value from selected VectorID
The special values, -1 and -2 are often used in the Page Titles. If “VectorID” is 0 or -1, the
“Digits” and “EFormat” options are ignored since the selected values are integers.
Limitations
The following limitations must be met for all formats:
m Formats can be up to 132 characters wide.
m You can define up to 40 data fields per format. Each field can be up to 80 characters
wide. The fields can be placed all on one line (assuming the maximum format width is
not exceeded) or spread across all lines.
m The number of significant digits must always be less than the field width and should be a
relatively small number. Choosing more than 7 or 8 significant digits is relatively mean-
ingless. The output data that FEMAP reads from your analysis program is probably not
that accurate.
m You must have at least one data field in a format. Blank formats, or formats with all text
are not allowed.
m In general, you can place any text anywhere between data fields in a format. You should
never use the characters < or > however. These characters indicate data fields, not text.
Copying Formats
m The number of < and > must always be equal on every format line. Data fields can not
extend across lines.
m All data vectors which are referenced in a format must have the same type. Nodal output
data cannot be mixed with Elemental output. Elemental centroidal and Elemental corner
data can be mixed.
There are no options with this command. You simply select the formats to be listed using the
standard entity selection dialog box and the report is produced. The format resembles the
following:
Output Format 3 - Loaded Displacements
Page Title 1 AutoCenter N DblSpace Y Page Title 2 AutoCenter N DblSpace N
STATIC ANALYSIS DISPLACEMENTS
You will notice that the listing simply duplicates the fields described above for defining the
format. This includes blank lines for any titles/format lines which are blank.
Hint:
One of the major reasons to Delete Output is to reduce the size of your model. Output can
require a significant amount of disk space, especially in comparison to the size of a FEMAP
model which does not contain output. When you delete output, however, you will not see a
change in the model size until you do a File Rebuild (see Chapter 2 for an explanation of this
command). FEMAP does not compact the database, and therefore recover the additional
space used by the output until you compact the database using File Rebuild.
2
3
67
35
2
&
(6
6,
1
*
Postprocessing
9Help and Non-Menu
(/
+
9.2.3 View Quick Options... Ctrl+Q or Shift+F6
3
... displays a dialog box so you can quickly control the display of various entities. This is the
same as choosing the View Options command and pressing the Quick Options button. Refer
to that command for more information.
Hint:
This command is useful if an active dialog box gets hidden behind a graphics Window. If
you can access commands on the View Toolbar, but you cannot access commands on the
FEMAP Main Window, an active dialog box may have been hidden. By repetitively per-
forming this command, you can bring the dialog box to the front, and then perform the com-
mand or cancel the operation.
Help and Non-Menu
10Index
A tetrahedral 5-35
autoscale 6-40
ABAQUS contact 4-11, 4-35, 4-36, 4-71 AVI 2-18
abort axes
listing 7-31 view 6-30
redraw 6-2 XY Plot 8-35
acceleration 4-42, 6-23 axisymmetric 4-33
accuracy 6-32, 8-48
ACIS 2-5, 2-7, 2-35, 3-55, 7-7
activate view 6-5 B
active backfaces 6-26
constraint set 4-66 background color 6-7
group 6-50 bar 4-8, 4-25
load set 4-38 beam 4-8, 4-25
output set 8-40 offsets 4-8
set 7-9 orientation 4-9
add to group 6-51 section property generator 4-27
align 3-86, 4-88 shapes 4-27
align view viewing shape 6-21
to coordinate system 6-39 beam diagram 8-4, 8-32
to vector 6-40 beam releases 4-9
to workplane 6-40 bending element 4-31
all views 6-2, 6-4 bias 5-45
analysis sets 4-68 blend 3-24
analyze 2-8 body load 4-38
angle 7-17 border 6-7
angle to curve 3-6 bottom to top 9-3
animation 6-10, 8-3, 8-4, 8-24, 8-25, 8-27, 8-36 boundary mesh 5-21
anisotropic 4-12, 4-15 boundary surface 3-32, 3-58
anti-symmetry 4-66 map to surface 3-89
arc 3-10 multi-surface 3-34
angle-center-start 3-12 break 3-76
angle-start-end 3-11
center-points 3-13
center-start-end 3-10
C
chord-center-start 3-12 Cache 2-32
points 3-13 calculate output 8-42, 8-45, 8-46
radius-start-end 3-11 cascade 6-7
start-end-direction 3-14 CATIA 2-5
area of element 7-20 center of gravity 7-18
arrow 8-25 center view 6-40, 6-44, 6-46
aspect ratio 6-31, 7-25 centroidal smoothing 5-64
at angle 3-5 chamfer 3-61, 3-80
automatic meshing check
hexahedral 5-7, 5-28 free edge 7-47
line elements 5-20, 5-62 free face 7-48
planar elements 5-21 chord 3-12
,
,
curved tube 4-24 coincident 7-24
customizing FEMAP 2-13 contact 4-11, 4-75 (;
cut 8-13 directions 6-20
cutting plane 8-13 distortion 7-25
cylinder 3-43, 3-55 draw 6-20
cylindrical coordinates 5-48 draw beam Y-axis 6-23
formulation 4-6
group 6-63
D line 4-8
damping 4-60 list 7-39
default mesh size 5-2 material angle 4-5, 4-96
defaults 2-25 midside node 4-100
define output 8-42 modify material 4-96
definition coordinate system 4-102 modify property 4-96
deformed 6-10, 8-3, 8-4, 8-27 modify type 4-95
scale 8-24 move 4-85
deformed data 8-9 normals 7-27
delete 3-90 offsets 4-8, 4-98, 6-21
FEA entities 4-104 order 4-100
group 6-64 orientation 4-9, 4-25, 4-98, 6-21
nondeletable entities 3-90, 4-104 other 4-10
output 8-68 output 8-43
views 6-47 plane 4-9
destination 2-14, 7-46 releases 4-9, 4-99, 6-21
diameter 3-15 reverse 4-99
difference from average 8-50 rotate 4-87, 4-88
dimetric 6-33 scale 4-90
displacement 4-42, 6-23 shrink 6-26
display options 6-14, 8-23 split quad 4-101
distance 7-17 type 4-5
distance from plane 7-24 element fill 6-26
distortion 7-25 element type 4-95
distributed load 4-43 elemental contours 8-11
divisions 3-90 elemental loads 4-43
,
,
continuous 3-8
icon menu 7-8
coordinates 3-9
(;
I-DEAS 2-5
horizontal 3-3
IDI 2-5
midline 3-5
IGES 2-5
offset 3-9
included angle 3-11, 3-12
parallel 3-4
increment 7-9
point and tangent 3-6
inertia 7-18
points 3-9
Interfaces 2-35
project points 3-2
ACIS 2-7
rectangle 3-8
Analysis 2-6, 2-7
tangent 3-7
DXF 2-7
vectored 3-10
FEMAP Neutral 2-6, 2-7
vertical 3-3
Notes 2-8
line elements 4-8, 5-49
Parasolid 2-7
linear combinations 8-45
STEP 2-7
linear elements 4-100
VRML 2-7
link 4-8, 4-29
internal angles 7-25
list 7-31
isometric 6-33
constraint 7-42
isosurface 8-4, 8-14, 8-34
coordinate system 7-37
dynamic 8-39
curve 7-34
isotropic 4-12, 4-13
destination 7-46
element 7-39
J formats 8-67
join 3-77 formatted output 8-64
JPEG 2-18 function 7-43
justification 7-16 geometry 7-32
group 7-44
layer 7-32
L load 7-41
labels 6-19 material 7-40
laminate 4-32 model info 7-45
laplacian smoothing 5-64 node 7-38
layer 3-88, 4-91, 6-9, 6-47, 6-61 output 7-44, 8-58
,
,
midline 3-5 nonlinear analysis 4-58
midplane 3-47 nonlinear force 6-23
(;
midside nodes 4-100 normal 7-27
midsurface 3-47
assign mesh attr 3-48
automatic 3-47
O
cleanup 3-48 offset 3-46
generate 3-48 offset curves 3-9, 3-25
intersect 3-48 offsets 4-8, 4-98
single 3-47 on-line help 9-1
single in solid 3-47 open window 6-5
trim to solid 3-47 optical 4-22
trim with curve 3-47 optimization 4-76
model accuracy 8-48 options 6-14, 6-16, 8-23
model colors 2-37 orientation 4-9, 4-98
model data 6-13, 8-4 orientation angle 4-96
model information 7-45 origin 6-30
modify 3-88, 4-90 orthotropic 4-12, 4-15
associativity 4-94 output 4-64, 8-40
element type 4-95 active vector commands 8-42
renumber 4-92 caclulate 8-46
moment 4-42, 6-23 combine 8-45
move 3-86, 4-88 compare 8-60
move by 3-83, 4-84 complex 8-57
move to 3-82, 4-82 convert 8-57
MPC 4-68 copy 8-45
multiple windows 6-2, 6-4, 6-6, 6-7, 9-3 define 8-42
error estimates 8-48
expand 8-57
N extrapolate 6-53, 8-54
neutral file 2-7 from loads 8-52
new windows 6-6 list 7-44, 8-58
next ID 7-9 transform 8-52
nodal constraint 4-66 worst-case 8-46
,
,
node 5-71 fillet 3-61
view 2-25, 2-29, 6-33 list 7-36
(;
rotate by 3-85, 4-87 mass properties 7-18
rotate to 3-84, 4-86 mesh 5-28, 5-35
ruled surfaces 3-39 mesh size 5-7
ruler 7-6 move 3-84
rules 6-56 pattern 3-57
primitives 3-57, 3-59
revolve 3-59
S rotate 3-85, 3-86
SAT 2-5 shell 3-62
saving messages 2-22 slice 3-64
saving pictures 2-18 slice along face 3-65
saving your model 2-3, 2-4 slice match 3-65
scale 3-87, 4-89 stitch 3-60
deformed plot 8-24 surface 3-58
geometry 3-71 Solid Edge 2-5
load 4-103 solid elements 4-33, 6-55
view 6-40 solid modeling 3-55
scratch files 2-2, 2-32, 2-33 sphere 3-45, 3-55
Scripting Language 2-24 spherical coordinates 5-48
section cut 6-27, 8-4, 8-13, 8-38 spline
section property generator 4-27, 7-20 blend 3-24
security device 9-2 drawing 3-20
select 6-10, 8-3 ellipse 3-21
selecting an engine 7-7 equation 3-23
selecting messages 2-22 hyperbola 3-22
set 4-38 midway 3-25
setup 2-25 multiple curves 3-25
printer 2-17 offset 3-25
shading 6-28 parabola 3-21
shape 6-21 points 3-23
shear panel 4-31 project 3-20
Shortcut Keys 2-31 tangent 3-24
,
,
style 8-3 writing 2-5, 2-8
zoom 6-43, 6-44
(;
View Toolbar position 2-30
viewing layers 6-9
X
X_T 2-5
visible layers 6-9
XY data 8-21
volume
XY Plot 6-10, 8-3, 8-20, 8-34, 8-35
align 3-87
list data 8-67
background 3-48
log-log 8-35
between 3-53
semi-log 8-35
corners 3-50
cylinder 3-55
draw 6-19 Z
extrude 3-53 zoom 6-43, 6-44
group 6-62 dynamic 6-35
list 7-36
mesh 5-34